Entreprises Sites Internet -Mars-2015-Belgique
Entreprises Sites Internet -Mars-2015-Belgique
INTEL sur FNAC.COM
- Horaires de levée du courrier en Belgique
- Revenir à l'accueil
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->
Sites Internet Belges :
www.abarth.be
www.moniteurautomobile.be
www.belgacar.com
www.economcar.be
www.supercar.be
www.dewildemotor.be
www.europcarcenter.be
www.myway.be
www.japancars.be
www.garagespringael.be
www.dt-mouscron.be
www.garage-desablens.com
www.art-et-lumiere.com
www.lescontesdeviolaine.be
www.van-gheluwe.be
www.ab-blaes.be
www.artlumiere-uccle.be
www.abatjour.be
abatjourtagoli.blogspot.com
www.artho.be
www.parquetdevloer.be
www.institutduparquet.be
www.agallis.be
www.crabetfils.be
012693.brokerweb.be
www.van-ingelgem.be
www.bureauvermeylen.be
www.motdehon.be
www.vdvconseil.be
www.bureauwilca.be
www.axa.be
www.lsvfinances.be
www.blueinsurance.be
www.dwa.be
www.soyermamet.be
www.eurocreta.be
www.insuranceeurope.eu
www.assurtou.be
www.petra-investments.be
www.ic-verzekeringen.be
www.vita-solutions.eu
www.qbere.com
www.garantifinance.be
www.gapcorp.be
www.eurogestion.be
www.ergo.be
www.aaacapitalfin.be
013211.brokerweb.be
www.losange-dhondt.be
www.invicta-art.com
www.assurnat.be
/www.fintro.be
www.duyzings.be
www.asvedec.be
www.at-assurances.be
www.elitis.be
www.onlinecredit.be
www.saag.be
www.assurement.be
www.kbctervuren.be
www.cbc.be
www.honore.be
www.gerlingcredit.com
www.secure.be
www.groupassur.be
www.metlife.be
www.odysseeconseil.be
www.pressur.be
www.dra-group.be
cea-belgium.be
www.felis.be
www.redasco.be
www.bernardjadot.be
www.rex.be
www.sobelco.be
www.verassfin.be
www.zenito.be
www.odns.eu
www.saint-mirande.be
www.edmondvanjean.be
www.aon.be
www.agesim.be
www.hermansetfils.be
www.assurteam.be
www.cygnesassure.be
www.credit-conseil.be
www.halpouter.com
www.codexbrokers.be
www.rjo.be
www.excelbrokers.be
www.valex-assurances.be
www.vanduynen.be
www.assurances-vandepaer.be
www.bcoh.be
www.meuwese-gulbis.be
www.sureplus.be
www.gielisetassocies.be
acinsurance.be
www.recordbank.be/fr/agent/bepac-services/watermael-boitsfort/265425
044130.brokerweb.be
www.eeckman.eu
www.vanbreda.be
www.cadcorp.com
www.assuresprl.be
www.smeys.be
www.acassur.be
www.ks-assurances.be
www.rentinsur.be
www.sefina.be
www.meraini.be
www.mvsaf-mv-desaintbonnet.eu
www.bnpparibascardif.be
www.wynsberghe.be
www.sarton.net
014034.brokerweb.be
www.acetim.be
www.vanhuffelco.be
www.live-in.be
www.viaxis.be
www.bas.ebroker.be
www.buasta.be
www.efia.be
www.brservice.be
www.bs2.be
www.jeansacre.com
www.svlv.be
www.omc-assur.be
www.moniqueleclercqsprl.be
www.feguigui.be
12690.assurances-belgique.be
www.desseille.be
www.pioro.be
www.guycarp.com
www.destaercke.be
louckx.be
www.stroh.be
www.finshop.be
www.consult4you.be
www.mathoux.be
www.eurobrokers-insurance.be
www.nverschelden.be
010449.brokerweb.be
www.benassur.com
www.sunassur.be
www.tolrip.com
13281.verzekering-belgie.be
www.vanbuggenhoudt.be
www.groupevanhelmont.be
www.patrimoning.com
www.marsh.com
www.gamsa.be
www.abpvercammen.be
www.stroobantsassurances.be
www.abcourtier.be
www.assur2000.be
www.jugnon.be
www.brodheim.be
www.segersassocies.be
www.rgf.be
www.floragarden.be
www.elagage-et-jardin.be
www.jardipol-renovation-jardin.com
www.vanwetter.com
www.iziplus.be
www.abtreeworkers.be
www.maconstructionetrenovation.be
users.belgacom.net/jardinia
www.olivier-deshorme.be
www.arboreal.be
www.arbresetjardins.be
www.ab-es.be
www.lebut.be
www.delval.be
www.arcadianova.be
www.progardener.be
www.jardin-beaute.be
www.jardinetpaysage.be
www.alex-verheyen.be
www.greenexpress.be
www.agreba.be
www.green-hand.be
www.aujardindubois.be
www.laserre-outil.be
www.cpmgarden.be
www.aux4vents.com
www.plaisir-vert.be
www.dreamgarden-brussels.be
www.ogreen.be
www.synaxis.be
www.lesjeunesjardiniers.be
www.ginion-jardin.be
www.lesmainsvertes.be
www.jardimpact.com
www.abcvert.be
www.jardisud.be
www.dagnelyrh.be
www.qoachin.com
www.essorschool.be
www.creacoach.be
www.lacambre-medicalcenter.com
www.theperformancecoach.be
www.plato.be
www.lifethroughchange.eu
www.team42.be
psychosport.eu
www.aloyse.be
www.laurencedujardin.com
www.alteregau.be
www.mpv-one.com
coachnroll.com
www.leschosesdelavie.be
www.everyoneweb.com/calipa
resonances.weebly.com
www.triskelia.be
www.livianemeth.com
www.biggerpicture.be
www.uniqueyouinstitute.com
www.extend-coaching.com
brigitteandre.com
www.sortirdulot.be
www.institut-mindfulness.be
www.bio-relooking.be
www.tshouly.com
www.psyetcoachadomicile.be
www.jacquelineleroy.com
www.helenedepoorter.com
www.cap-aster.com
www.coachurself.be
www.chalude.com
www.aikicom.eu
www.keytoyou.be
www.new-horizon.be
www.creeavie.com
www.yfis.be
www.completude.be
www.coachingforlawyers.eu
www.edrmentalcoaching.be
www.transformingtalent.be
www.viavectis.be
www.thebrusselshouse.be
www.tvist.be
www.horizoncoach.be
www.stepforcareer.com
www.coaching.be
www.beautycoolgym.be
www.michelejanssens.be
www.colourharmonie.com
www.bodytosoul.eu
www.capchangement.com
www.actifit.be
www.fleurdebach.be
www.o-ki.be
maisondumassage.be
www.espace-vitalite.be
www.massageantistress.be
www.osmozen.be
www.upledger.be
www.z3n.be
www.cer-reflexologie.be
www.blanchecolombe.be
www.hypnose-christine.com
www.hypnose-therapiesbreves-bxl.be
www.actafis.com
www.bofidi.com
www.intergest.com
www.c-f-o.be
www.acf-bruxelles.be
www.infomaco.com
www.pyxis.be
www.fiddel.be
www.ecovis.com
www.conac.be
www.notax.be
www.fidelium.eu
www.comptapro.be
www.sorgeloos.info
www.expertia.be
www.fisco-globe.be
www.grimonpont.be
www.bst.net
www.vxlnet.be
www.fiscalex.com
www.sariconsulting.com
www.gdg.be
www.bugeti.be
www.cogitax.be
www.regieconstellation.be
www.fidutile.be
www.compta-fisca.be
www.mut400.be
www.logical.be
acofisco.be
www.fiscalift.be
www.bibf.be
finacct.be
www.gpcompta.be
www.consultia.be
www.miklos.be
www.befi.be
compta-gestion.be
www.jlmcomptabilite.com
www.arickx.be
www.art-consult.be
www.ficofoda.be
www.cogeval.be
entrepriseevaluation.be
www.bebotax.com
www.fiscompta.be
www.jpmornardchartered.com
www.socomfin.be
www.indumat.com
www.jsservices.be
www.baracompta.be
www.logistica.be
www.aiec.be
www.bathi.com
www.callens.be
bureau-comptable-koroglu.be/fr
www.fiduciaire-makoudi.be
1150 WOLUWE-SAINT-PIERRE :
J-L Cars
Richoux Luminaires d'Art
Van Waeyenberghe Ch Abat-Jour
Life Invest
I.S.V
Fiacres (Mignon Benoit)
Hayois V
Ducassur
SERVAES INSURANCE CONSULTING
Technical Credit Insurance
Wodon
Djomo-Poka Diderot
Les Pierres Gestion
Assurteam
Van de Vyver P
Live-In
Feeling et Co
Van Ingelgem
Jean Sacré
DynaCap
Stroh Assurances
Wolubo
M I L
Consult 4 You
Monteignies Viehard
Insurance et Care Solutions
Pieters N
Benoit Stappaerts Assurances
Snyers Hubert
Scie à la Cime
Accrobranche
Arboreal TS
Abes
Green Hand
La Serre Outil
Haeck H
Cap Aster
Aikicom Perspectives
FP Coaching
Vandeville Françoise
Cocoach Guillaume
Cap Changement
Espace Vitalité
Vanderhaegen J-L
Audace
International Trading Consultants
Bicak D
Cantillion A
Fiscality Consult
Starquit Ch
Rainbeaux Valentin
Deramaix P
De Vaucleroy E
Morel et CY
Bureau d'Audit Conseil Inform-BACI
Kestemont C
Lemoine H
Hafidi R
Meunier J-L
JLM Comptabilité-Gestion
Vanden Bosch A
Callens, Pirenne, Theunissen et Co
1200 WOLUWE-SAINT-LAMBERT :
AA Auto Line
Van Gheluwe Olivier
A Van Ingelgem et Fils
Vermeylen Bureau
Asinco et Vellut
Ipsi Gest
B.E.A. Assurances
Bureau Mignon
Van de Zande B
Secure
Odyssée Conseil
Arnould E
Rousseau et Co
Bernard Gille
Assurances A Garnier
Assuravis-Merveille
Van Jean Edmond
Agesim
Janssens
Bureau Gaspard-Putteman
Felixass
WAETERMANS ANTOINE LOUIS
De Cat E
BCOH
Moors A (AMC)
Ascofin
Maes Jean-Marie
Verhellen
Fontaine E
Cape Victoire
Orassur
Van Herpe
Heyd Nicolas
AB Treeworkers
Germeau Vincent
Inukushuk
Deshorme
Baillon G
Poncin Virgi
Leroy J
Elyxe
Coppin Christine
Maison du Massage
Comptaspil
Delca International
Marbaix Ph
Fiddel
Grimonpont L
El Aissaoui A
Don V
Adexco
Baland, Apelmaen et Co
De Reus
De Villers Grand Champs J
Binon M
Michalak Lukasz
Parys
Godart H et Ass
Desmedt M
GP Compta
Clément P
Befi
De Roy-Jacques SNC (C et G)
Verstraeten P
Dresse D
A. Famenne-Gestion et Conseil sprl
Fays M-F
Olangi Bohombo C
Euromatax Consultants
Daneels J
Gesfiro
Dauwe F
Vandersmissen J P
Vandervelde J
Bureau Conseil Ph Janneau
Ph Thisse Conseil
WATERMAEL-BOITSFORT : Lesage Ets
Vandecaveye
Soyer et Mamet
Mommens R
Halpouter et Fils
Codex-Brokers
Paillet Jean-Marie
Gerard et Alterman
Record Bank - Bepac Services
MVSAF
Van Dessel Gilbert
LAURENT BOELS
Alternative Finance
Desseille Insurance
Guy Carpenter et Company
Tolrip
Marsh
Depoorter Hélène
Key to YOU
Maia Human Ressources
Shiatsu O-Ki
Baudry D
Ronse De Craene J-B
Govaerts J
Folien D
Accarain Y
Cofisc
Rossignol
1180 UCCLE : Springael Marc Ets
Technique et Art de la Lumière
Conseil
Conseils
Muller Thibault
O.D.N.S.
Saint Mirande
Roberts-Jones Olivier
Assufimmo
Valex Assurance
Reusassur
Bureau Vanhamme
MEUWESE ET GULBIS sa
A.C.Insurances
Lapraille S
Bureau Bavais
Smeys Verzekeringskantoor
Holding Land
Bavais M
Sarton et Associés-Vennoten
Acetim
P.G.A.
EUROPE ASSURANCES SERVICE
Bureau de Maleingreau d'Hembise
Le Conseil
BS2-BrusselsBrokers.be
Coverenter
S.V.L.V.
Olden et Cie
Cryns Ph
Tyteca et Labarre
Stinglhamber
Stuyck Edouard
Mathoux et Cie
EVI Assur
Eurobrokers Insurance Consultants
Daive
B.E.E.A.I
Sunassur
Stroobants et Co Assurances
Segers et Associés c/o Segassur
Patrick Janssens
Jardipol
Minot Pascal
L'Arbre Enchanteur
LIBECCIO
Arbre Enchanteur (L')
Arcadia Nova
Ah! Le Ginkgo Biloba
Dream garden
Les Jeunes Jardiniers
Essor Coaching School
Creacoach
Saveurs Croisées
Niclaus D
Crée à vie
Cantieni Cunin Christa
Milis M
VB Coaching
Claes C
Coaching
Janssens Michèle
Actifit
Heynen-Rademakers V
Diet-fit-coach
Himmer J-F
B2B Advice
Bury F
A.P. Consulting
Van de Kerckhove E
De Potter J-C
Cabinet de Gestion et de Fiscalité
Marciano D
Fiscod'Am sc
Bebotax BV
Immofiscal
Vanbinst G
1030 SCHAERBEEK : Courtiers Associés
Reflex Invest
Vita Solutions
Mayeur Florimond
Curran Pauline
Catherine W
Fougnies P
Pas Tania
BG Conseils
Sannator sprl
Dothee
Assurver sa-nv
Invicta Belgium International Insurance Services
Alp Yassin
Anadolu Crédit
Asfina
Gillieaux et Fils
Infoconseilassurance
Crédit Royal
Vanderplaetsen
Eloy Bernard
Mezgani Morad
Stekelorum Insurance
Bernard Jadot
TSAKALIOS, CHRISOVALANTIS
Laurant M
AGRM
ASJ Assurance et Risk
Lambermont Stéphanie
Sureplus
GD Credit
Tiaz
Taminiau Alain Assurances
Baets Assurances
ABP.Vercammen
Arbodiels
Alberty Guy
Dekeyser M
Berger Sébastien
Jardimpact
Van der Stegen de Sckrieck Aloyse
Lebrun Isabelle
TRISKELIA
Gascard Yung
Sole Olivier
Psy et Coach à domicile
Beauty Cool Gym
De Coster Valérie
A Paradise
Actafis
Suhanea Iulian
Bocher P
Intergest Belgium
Cailleau
Comptabilité, Finances et Organisation
Vandezande S
Sari S
Valassidis A
CLP Consulting
Infomaco
De Coster N
Ecovis Acta Consult
Gesafi sprl civ
Chardon E
New Comptafisc
Celik M
Mugemangango G
Comptapro
Deconinck A
Partners in Finances
Duru Kikaba S
Manalis Andreas
Fovel Yves
Fisc Compta
Sari G
Sari Gulnaz
Akfin
Deveci Dundu
Delli Gatti N
De Muynck Y
Kökten Fahri
Cordier V
Bureau Comptable et Fiscal EDB
Derinoz M
Vermeersch E
Van Den Bergh D
Steels E
TS Comptabilité et Fiscalité
De Fays R
Business Consulting et co
Leys P
Sancke Ph
Lkiya N
Pyroconsult
Kizil Huseyin
Rousseau P-Y
N et N Fiduciaire
Kooyman P
L.N. Fiduciaire Comptable et Fiscale
Isabel Cordon
Elicompta scprl
Mignolet R
1210 SAINT-JOSSE-TEN-NOODE : Les Contes de Violaine
Assurtou
Sterck A
Gestion Assurances Et Prêts
De Smedt et Charlier
Charlier Jean-Claude
Les AP
Takkariste Ahmed
Calipa Coaching
Coaching Livia Nemeth
Ges-Team
Warge M
Hadi A
Juleight
Atlas fisk
1060 SAINT-GILLES : A la Ombre de la Lumière
Crab Jean et ses Fils
Office Central des Assurés
H.P.P. Assurances
I-PARTNER
Jasoing A
Redasco
R.E.X.
NGANDU OLIVIER
Triangle Partners
Cedar Street Partners Belgium
Cygnes Assurés
Ntougas M
Heuze
Goubau P
Simescu Mihaela-Creola
Didier Gonin et Associates
Le Coach
Groupe de Gestion
OROBI ADEGOKE
Delhove H
Coenen Ch
Cogitax
Lefebvre O
C.D.C.
Sellier P
Verboomen R
Hanquet M
Global-Fisc
De Keyser C
Consultia SCCS
Miklòs Zoltàn
Toussaint J
Stéphane Vander Elst et Associés soc.civ.
Giron L
Hourman P
NEDER-OVER-HEEMBEEK :
Busschaert-Autowand
V.D.V. Conseil
Mues Alexis
MV Group
Boucquey
F.Vertik Access
1080 MOLENBEEK-SAINT-JEAN : Sobelmar-Credit Amal
Dellah I
De Gunst Louis
Rentinsur
BGA
Basit Insurance
D'Haeyer C
Verzek. Vancoppenolle
Haegeman Assurances
Monique Leclercq
Feguigui
De Knijf-Greven et Co
Bükk-Assur
Fin Shop
Certum
Benassur
Quartier T.i.j.s.
La Forêt en Ville
Les Mains Vertes
Positive Insight
De Ripainsel Eric
Blanche colombe
Covaci Management Solutions
Boukarssou S
Fisco Comptable Consult
Ifkirin S
Difisco scris
M.S.B. Tax et Accountancy
Yucom
1020 LAEKEN :
Adelphe
Rachem S
Wynsberghe
Phelco
Asi Alev
Bureau Van Buggenhoudt
A.G.A.
De Beys C
Yellow Brick, Coaching et Training
Score Ten
Rowi
1081 KOEKELBERG :
François R et JP
Moiny J
Trouman et Partners
Kante M
Decat Patrick
Sherman G
Saerens
De Bouvere C
Fonck G
Fisc-Compta Pro
Reno Assist Consult scrl
AIEC
1090 JETTE :
Eurosun
Pint Christian
Bureau Associates Taverniers
Anneet Gerard et Co
Efia
Mercelis Brokers
Bureau Massart
Van Ranst Marc
G.A.M. Crédits
Nijs J
M.S.B. Finance
G A M
Plaisir Vert
O'Green
Delval Lelia
Complétude Coaching
Horizon Coach
Stepforcareer
1050 IXELLES :
Europ Car Centre Garage Automobile
Art et Lumière Christophe de Diesbach
Abat-Jour Tagoli
Amazone DECO WOOD
D'Hoop Dominique et Cie
Mot-Dehon et Partners
Blue Insurance
De Wouters Associés
Hautfenne J-C
Croze William
FINEUS
Gestinsure
Guilmain et Berco
Asvedec
Diel Roland
Delhaye Ph
Lavand'Homme et de Borrekens
Honoré et Fils
Vansalen P
C.A.E.
Groupassur Bruxelles
Metlife Insurance
Chartis Europe Limited
DRA Insurance Brokers
SZYGOWSKI
CEA Belgium
Emelinckx Y
Shelter Family Office
Felis et Associés
Coché J
OPPALFENS ROLANDE CARINE
Dauby et Abel
Kawa Conseil
DEBORSU ALAIN
Excel Brokers
Vandepaer et Fils
Logé Th
Assur 2000
Irimia Petru-Aurelian
Clinckemaille M
Pettens Alexis
Vue d'en Haut
Les Jardins de Boondael
Jardinia
Terra Nova
Greenexpress
Qoach'In
Team 42
Psycho Sport
Coach'n'Roll
Estellita Eduardo
Human Resources Development Academy
Blaimont Florence
Résonances
Notté Pol
Positive Monday Attitude
Sortir du Lot
La Plénitude
Centre d'Etude de Réflexologie
Kichouh Hamid
Sanchez F
Gharbi L
Vanderhaegen A
ACF
L.T.M. Advisors
Eric Loiseau Comptabilité
Vandermeuter N
Expertia
EXFI
Befiscom
Daali M
Hubens J-P
Vander Elst A
Van Hecke E
Thubron Christopher
BST Services
D'Aspremont Lynden F
Fiscalex Consult
Pajot D
Fidutile
Hauptman
Florani J-C
Compta-Fisca
DMC
Van De Winkel et Partners SPRL
Ak T
Vossaert E
Logical
Fiduciaire France
Provost Ch
Bureau B.C.A.
Institut Professionnel des Comptables et Fiscalist
Lenaers J-P
Ayed Y
Peeters Y
Roosevelt Consulting Firm
MFG
ADG SPRL
1083 GANSHOREN :
Bibo-Assur
Rijavec Jonathan
Assist.Entrep.Assur. Secur.Soc.Urb.
Lawalrée D
Lavender Laurent
Isselee P
Osmose
J.S. SERVICES sprl
Logistica
Comptaplus Consulting
1190 FOREST :
Editions Auto-Magazine
Lesne G
Markanne
Mardon Beling et Associates
Beling M
Van Duynen
Assurances Nicole Flemal
Van Keymeulen A
Gielis et Associés
Eeckman Art et Insurance
Cadcorp sprl
Assure
K et S Assurances
Duyzings Uytters-Ass sa
Hostens M
Bureau Meraini
Cabinet d'Assurances et Financements
Darchambeau-Sobelfia
Mossoux Roger et Co
Dehon et Fils
SGPA
Laheyne Patrick Assurances
Au Jardin du bois
Giovannini Nicola
Coach'ur Self
Chalude and Associates
Hirth Laurent
Marcelle Fabienne
Gustot D
Arickx C
Engels V
Finantra
Mahieu M
Grandhenry and Partners scris
B G F C
Bureau Comptable F.I.G.
Defrene M
Lammouchi Ch
1140 EVERE :
Sophraline
Vanhove David
Acofisco Groupe
Schoos F
Finance et Accounting Management
Streignard A
Azarkan A
Duquennois M
Mohimi S
EB Consulting
E&B Consulting
1040 ETTERBEEK :
Goosse
Abat-Jour Artho
Jaenen Pascal
Eurocreta Service
Allianz SE
Vanest
Belgian Risk Management
IC Verzekeringen
Smart Plan
Product et Services Support
Assur-Infor
Eurogestion
Syn Brokers
Losange - D'Hondt
Payen
Vincent Ponet Assurances
C.D.C.A.
ASSURNAT
DTH Finance
Dupal Vincent
Uytters Bureau
Van Zuylen G
Assurances de Behault et Boulanger
Assurement sprl
Axa Banque-Brodheim Invest et Insurance
Manneback Valérian
Iziplus
Lievyns Th
Dagnely RH Coaching-Impact
Scholz et Friends Berlin
Carloni Sandrine
Psychosport
TIMMERS SYLVIE
Feng Shui Consulting
Alter Egau
Colour Harmonie
Cobry
Lemercinier G
Hang-Van U-N
Bofidi Brussels
De Jaegher F
Testa G
Pyxis.be
Lequeux F
Wilschrey
Geulette D
Jemine A
Bernard J
Bathi
A.B. Fisco
1000 BRUXELLES :
A.B. Blaes
Le Siffleur
UH Finance
Fopa Sob Lionel
Romero Amigo Michael
Havaux D
Insurance Europe
Canivet J-M
Petra Investments
QBE Re (Europe) Ltd - Secura Branch
Garanti Finance
ERGO
AAA Capitalfin
Partnership Protection et Pension
Specific Insurance et Risk
Fintro Bruxelles-Wavre
Elitis Bruxelles
S A A G
MSIG Insurance Europe
Verbraeken, Vandewal, Aché et Co
Pressur
Sobelco
Zenito
B et R Service
Odeurs Mühlebach et Cie-OMC
RGF Groupe (Bruxelles)
Abelift
Alixon
Van Wetter
Arbretaille
ABCvert.be
Orenbach Simon
The Performance Coach Belgium
Sohail Ali
Xiraki Stella-Maria
MPV-One
Devriendt Veerle
GAD
Savels Steve
Unique You Institute
Institut-Mindfulness
Helpigo
Body to Soul
Rosier N
Trullemans O
Schneider Jan
Bureau d'Etudes Wendrickx J-C
Conac-Administratie
B.C.T.H.
Sorgeloos
Fiducis
Finance and Accounting Management
Torelli B
Nconsult
Cavalieri C
Regie Constellation
Rabai A
Voorzorgskas
Ciku R
Dehaene R
Sulaj Bekim
El Bakali A
Fiscalift
Atarhouch
Finacct
Bettens E
Fiduciaire Comptable et Fiscale MJ
Grupp W
1082 BERCHEM-SAINTE-AGATHE
S.C.S Verbesselt
Wathelet Y
Flora
Ets Delval St
Aux 4 Vents
Ginion G
Viavectis
Molon C
La Placa Maria
1160 AUDERGHEM :
Abarth
Econom Car
A. Dumane Supercar
Martin et Vandermeulen
Sykora Igor
Picron M
Smets Cédric
AON Belgium NV/SA
COMPTE INVEST
BV GROUP ASSURFINANCES
MSIG Corporate Service Eur.Limited
Vanbreda Risk et Benefits
Catry Christian
Webb Daniel Consult
Inter Brokers
Huyberechts Co
Vanhuffel et Co
Viaxis
Viaxis
VDM Sarl Geneve
Bureau Assurances Services
Orgassim
Arbres et Jardins
Pro Gardener
Depiesse Luc (Synaxis sprl)
Extend Coaching
Tshouly Concept
MNJ Coaching
Thais Sander
Yfis
Allan D
Biquet M
Bugeti
Tilmans E
Carlton P
Serficom
Lindemann I
Barbieaux P
Barbieaux Comptabilité
Swaelens P
Optimax
Rousseeuw L
MBM
Cogeval
Graulich T
A.D.S.
Sauvaget A
Sempoux D
Vandersteen J
Collin O
T.C.F. et Associates
Coutinho Pinto R
Vandamme P
Asacompta
Vivier R
Entreprises-1070-ANDERLECHT-Mars-2015-Belgique :
Saad African Cars Export
Dewilde Motor et Co
Japan Cars-Jorez
Bruynseels
Jugnon Assurances
Bureau Wilca
Abelmo
Centre Hypothécaire d'Assurances et de Prêts
De Staercke et Associés
Crelan Louckx et Partners
Louckx J
Assurances S
Olsen et Co
K et Co Consulting
FAVAZZA DIDIER
Vander Haegen Jc
Lauwaert M
Verschelden
Steda Management
MARTIN VICTOR JEAN
Jugnon Assurances
Jugnon Assurances
Jugnon Assurances
Jugnon Assurances
Elagage et Jardin Authentique
Lalemant P
Le But
Spitaels O
Arborisens
C.P.M. Garden-Loos
J.M.R.L.
JardiSud
Bio-Relooking
Body Style
FD
Coach Camilia
Transforming Talent
Transforming Talent
Talent Coaching for Kids
Mnasri Sonia
Tvist
Upledger Instituut Belgium
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
Bourguignon S
Fiduciaire Bourguignon
Art-Consult scri
Bertha S
Fiduciaire des Classes Moyennes
Fiduciaire des Classes Moyennes
Ben Ali M
Woters M
El Hallabi K
JP Mornard Chartered
DB et Cie
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
K finances
Di Maggio G
Makoudi (Fiduciaire)
Fiduciaire d'Hoedt
BARA-COMPTA s.c. p.r.l.
Goficom s.c. p.r.l.
BRAINE-L-ALLEUD :
Agreassur
Point Vert Service
Rue Jules Cockx 12A
Avenue Général Dumonceau 56
Chaussée de Mons 668
Chaussée de Wavre 1354
Chaussée de Wavre 1261
Chaussée de Mons 707
Avenue Georges Henri 295
Chaussée de Wavre 245
Chaussée de La Hulpe 225
Chaussée de Mons 511
Chaussée de Saint-Job 771A
Val des Seigneurs 4 3
Ninoofse Steenweg 568
Chaussée de Vilvorde 104
Rue de la Montagne 84
Zone Industrielle de l'Europe 10
Boulevard Paul-Henri Spaak 6
Rue de la Tulipe 16
Rue de la Limite 14
Avenue Georges Henri 317
Rue Blaes 137
Rue des Tanneurs 141
Avenue du Prince de Ligne 149
Avenue Louis Gribaumont 40
Rue du Maraîcher 28
Chaussée Saint-Pierre 328
Rue Pierre Hap-Lemaître 43
Rue Mareyde 21
Chaussée de Charleroi 168
Rue de Dublin 36
Chaussée Saint-Pierre 328
Avenue d'Auderghem 324
Rue Pierre Hap-Lemaître 43
Rue Mareyde 21
Rue Geleytsbeek 87
Avenue de Saturne 25
Koningin Astridlaan 483 A
Chaussée de Waterloo 653
Cantersteen 47
Chaussée de Charleroi 214-216
Rue Jacques Jansen 17
Boulevard Brand Whitlock 114
Avenue Edouard Speeckaert 140
Boulevard Sylvain Dupuis 239 1
Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6
Rue Paul Lauters 58
Place Georges Brugmann 8
Rue François Vekemans 117
Chaussée de Mons 1071
Rue d'Arlon 36
Rue Colonel Bourg 107 3
Rue Hector Denis 54
Place Eugène Keym 7
Place Edouard Pinoy 7
Avenue Franklin Roosevelt 143
Avenue de la Foresterie 2
Avenue Léon Jourez 9
Rue Froissart 119
Rue Franklin 17
Avenue des Arts 27
Rue Sainte-Gertrude 16
Rue Franklin 112
Rue d'Arlon 36
Rue Montoyer 51
Place des Gueux 14
Avenue de l'Yser 31
Rue de la Pacification 2
Rue du Noyer 312
Rue Caroly 29
Square de Meeûs 37
Rue du Commerce 72
Rue du Trône 146
Avenue Milcamps 59
Boulevard du Régent 37
Chaussée de Louvain 362
Rue Verbist 77
Rue Saxe-Cobourg 5
Rue de Linthout 120
Avenue des Arts 12
Avenue des Arts 12
Chaussée de Wavre 627
Avenue de l'Opale 25 7
Avenue Milcamps 95ETRC
Chaussée de Wavre 692
Avenue de Tervueren 34 40
Boulevard Bischoffsheim 1-8
Avenue de Tervueren 46
Avenue du Diamant 45
Avenue du Diamant 69
Avenue de Roodebeek 58 3
Rue Jacques Jansen 17
Square Eugène Plasky 111 19
Square Eugène Plasky 107
Rue du Congrès 20
Avenue de l'Opale 124 1
Boulevard Brand Whitlock 155 7
Rue Royale 132 3
Square Vergote 38
Avenue de l'Armée 103
Rue de Tervaete 27
Boulevard Auguste Reyers 67
Rue de Pervyse 22
Boulevard Brand Whitlock 84 2
Avenue Hansen-Soulie 71
Rue Royale 194
Avenue Général Bernheim 18 AVENUE
Avenue Galilée 5B
Boulevard Brand Whitlock 58
Avenue Prekelinden 167 20
Avenue Prekelinden 167 20
Rue du Prince Royal 81
Boulevard Saint-Michel 89
Boulevard Louis Schmidt 96 B19
Avenue de Tervueren 187
Boulevard de l'Impératrice 56
Rue Gachard 37
Boulevard Louis Schmidt 53
Rue Dautzenberg 44
Avenue Louise 230
Rue Royale 233
Rue Van Dyck 14 ETRC
Rue Guillaume Stocq 29
Rue du Duc 94
Rue du Duc 94
Rue du Duc 94
Rue du Duc 94
Rue du Duc 94
Chaussée de Charleroi 13
Avenue Nestor Plissart 26
Avenue Louise 221
Place de la Reine 20
Place de la Vieille Halle aux Blés 47
Place de la Reine 16
Rue Cardinal Lavigerie 54
Rue Baron de Castro 77
Rue du Houyoux 12
Avenue de Tervueren 206 1
Avenue de Février 30
Rue Colonel Bourg 112 8
Avenue Louise 287
Rue du Châtelain 22
Avenue Louise 303 3
Rue Defacqz 80
Avenue Géo Bernier 2
Rue Armand Campenhout 63
Avenue de Tervueren 273 9
Rue de la Cambre 180
Rue de l'Automne 59
Rue de l'Automne 59
Rue de l'Automne 59
Rue de l'Automne 59
Boulevard de la Plaine 11
Boulevard de la Plaine 11
Avenue Général de Longueville 8 10
Avenue des Jardins 60
Clos de la Licorne 15
Rue Royale Sainte-Marie 142
Rue Joseph Brand 108
Avenue Voltaire 178
Rue de Tournai 6
Rue de Tenbosch 94
Rue du Zéphyr 59
Avenue Henri Jaspar 122
Avenue du Paepedelle 85-9
Chaussée de Haecht 342
Avenue de la Folle Chanson 15 16
Rue du Tabellion 66
Rue du Mont-Blanc 37
Allée des Freesias 1 129
Chaussée de Wavre 1251
Avenue de Broqueville 272 8
Rue Saint-Georges 30
Rond-Point de l'Etoile 5 27
Avenue Ernestine 2 15
Avenue des Eperviers 117 B033
Rue Crocq 32
Rue de l'Hôtel des Monnaies 101
Rue des Hellènes 40 4
Avenue du V-Day 26 B032
Avenue de la Couronne 435000
Rue Guillaume Kennis 10
Chaussée de Waterloo 323
Chaussée de Waterloo 323
Quai du Batelage 11
Cité Fontainas 8 1
Avenue Paul Hymans 21
Rue Vondel 92
Avenue des Anciens Combattants 82 1
Avenue Louis Lepoutre 51
Avenue Paul Hymans 47
Avenue de Tervueren 296A 2
Avenue Henry Dunant 23
Avenue Maréchal Foch 68
Rue Lincoln 32
Quai de Willebroeck 37
Oud-Strijderslaan 111 29
Avenue Molière 339
Avenue Molière 339
Avenue Paul-Henri Spaak 1
Avenue Paul-Henri Spaak 7
Avenue Henri Conscience 100 3
Rue Louis Hymans 45
Chemin des Deux Maisons 61 6
Rue Jules Cockx 8-10
Chemin des Deux Maisons 71 29
Boulevard Lambermont 154
Chaussée de Helmet 161
Avenue A. J. Slegers 21
Avenue Henri Conscience 136
Avenue Paul Hymans 105 38
Avenue Paul Hymans 105 38
Avenue de la Nielle 235
Rue Paul Wemaere 4
Chaussée d'Alsemberg 106
Avenue Vandromme 34
Avenue Brugman 124
Avenue du Martin Pêcheur 48 40
Chaussée de Haecht 843
Rue Edouard Deknoop 62
Avenue du Martin Pêcheur 23-25
Avenue du Martin Pêcheur 19
Avenue des Mûriers 27
Avenue Armand Huysmans 180 3
Avenue Albert 15
Rue de Fiennes 69
Avenue Montjoie 33 4
Avenue Albert 149
Avenue Albert 149
Avenue Franklin Roosevelt 90
Avenue Winston Churchill 190 14
Avenue du Roi 21A
Avenue Winston Churchill 192 13
Avenue de la Charmille 14 25
Avenue Albert 168
Avenue Jupiter 191
Avenue Jupiter 187 11
Rue du Gruyer 50
Avenue Winston Churchill 176
Boulevard Léopold II 88 9
Boulevard Léopold II 108
Square Servaas Hoedemaekers 22 12
Rue Vanderkindere 179
Avenue du Bois de la Cambre 115
Boulevard de la Woluwe 62
Rue Iwan Gilkin 7ET04
Square Servaas Hoedemaekers 18
Avenue Winston Churchill 118A
Chaussée de Helmet 389
Chaussée de Helmet 389
Avenue Reine Maria-Henriette 116
Avenue Montjoie 293 1
Avenue Montjoie 169 8
Avenue Jules Génicot 5
Place Eugène Keym 18
Rue Anatole France 96
Rue des Etangs Noirs 26
Avenue Maurice Maeterlinck 60
Avenue Franklin Roosevelt 134 8
Avenue Brugmann 256
Rue Marconi 167 5
Boulevard du Souverain 360
Boulevard du Souverain 360
Chaussée de Wavre 1705
Avenue Jupiter 147
Boulevard Leopold II 216
Avenue Marcel Thiry 82 13
Rue Berthelot 106-108 17
Jules Bordetlaan 160 8
Rue René Magritte 24
Avenue Zénobe Gramme 86
Boulevard du Souverain 159
Rue de Paris 45A
Avenue de Messidor 202
Rue Neerveld 57-6
Avenue Jupiter 109A 5
Avenue Everard 49
Avenue du Mistral 17
Avenue Everard 18
Avenue Louis Jasmin 56
Rue de Bonne 18
Boulevard du Souverain 125
Boulevard du Souverain 125
Avenue des Briqueteries 5
Place de l'Altitude Cent 1
Avenue Jean Dubrucq 147
Rue Léon Fourez 8
Rue du Château Kieffelt 20
Dries 54
Rue Antoine Clesse 23
Avenue Brugmann 355
Rue du Melon 34
Chaussée de Stöckel 231 11
Rue Honoré Longtin 48
Rue Ketels 22
Avenue de la Ferme Rose 3
Rue du Pannenhuys 22
Chaussée de Waterloo 1135
Avenue des Tritons 31 2
Rue Spruyt 20
Rue Konkel 200 2
Rue Eugène Degorge 26
Avenue De Fré 139
Avenue Van Volxem 264
Boulevard du Souverain 51 17
Avenue Edmond Parmentier 207
Avenue du Cerf Volant 14
Avenue Herrmann-Debroux 40-42
Avenue Herrmann-Debroux 40
Avenue Jean Burgers 3 18
Avenue Herrmann-Debroux 17-19
Avenue Brugmann 328 15
Avenue Neptune 43 4
Drève des Deux Moutiers 7
Avenue Odon Warland 109
Avenue Coghen 166
Rue du Gulden Bodem 45
Boulevard Jules Graindor 8
Avenue du Geai 44
Chaussée de Jette 479 2
Avenue de l'Observatoire 114
Drève du Renard 10
Avenue Charles Woeste 180
Avenue de la Raquette 11
Boulevard Edmond Machtens 61 7
Boulevard Edmond Machtens 61
Rue des Artistes 58
Chaussée de La Hulpe 110
Avenue Alfred Madoux 34
Chaussée de Waterloo 1110
Rue du Doyenné 18
Chaussée de Stockel 371
Chaussée de Waterloo 1163
Avenue du Panthéon 50
Avenue du Pérou 77
Avenue du Karreveld 73 1
Chaussée de Gand 463
Avenue de Jette 165
Avenue de Jette 165
Avenue Paul De Merten 14
Chaussée de Waterloo 1174-1176
Square Edmond Machtens 17
Square Edmond Machtens 17
Avenue des Sittelles 44
Rue Roosendael 114
Boulevard du Souverain 36 2
Boulevard Edmond Machtens 89
Avenue du Domaine 49 8
Avenue de la Paix 61 4
Boulevard du Souverain 2
Rue Wayez 190
De Formanoirstraat 28
Rue de Formanoir 28
Avenue du Duc Jean 24
Boulevard de Smet de Naeyer 189
Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6
Rue Alphonse Asselbergs 104
Avenue du Duc Jean 21 2
Rue Edouard Gersis 30
Avenue Victor-Emmanuel III 61
Rue de Veeweyde 19
Place de la Vaillance 34
Place de la Vaillance 34
Avenue Albert Lancaster 9
Drève des Shetlands 6 8
Avenue de la Faisanderie 49
Chaussée de Wemmel 55
Avenue du Château 30 1
Avenue du Panthéon 90 2
Rue de Bruges 11
Avenue de Biolley 24
Avenue de l'Escrime 99
Drève des Mustangs 8
Drève des Mustangs 8
Rue au Bois 500
Rue Jean Van Lierde 2
Rue de Veeweyde 119
Avenue Jean et Pierre Carsoel 118 16
Avenue Jean et Pierre Carsoel 118 16
Avenue des Croix du Feu 159 B002
Rue Colonel Chaltin 81 1
Chaussée de Waterloo 1335
Boulevard de Smet de Naeyer 383
Ninoofse Steenweg 563
Avenue du Vossegat 37 7
Rue Van Wambeke 32
Avenue du Haras 142
Avenue des Crocus 11
Rue de la Métairie 20
Avenue Charles Quint 30 2
Rue des Maraîchers 11
Avenue de la Basilique 325
Avenue du Roi Albert 79
Chaussée de Saint-Job 412
Boulevard Edmond Machtens 157 59
Boulevard Louis Mettewie 260
Chaussée d'Alsemberg 816
Avenue de la Foresterie 2
Boulevard Louis Mettewie 487 15
Avenue de Haveskercke 137
Avenue Houba de Strooper 74
Avenue Houba de Strooper 74
Avenue Houba de Strooper 74
Rue du Camp 14
Rue Zeyp 19
Place Peter Benoit 15 K
Cantersteen 47
Grand'Place 6
Boulevard Sylvain Dupuis 239 1
Boulevard du Souverain 2
Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6
Square Eugène Plasky 92-94
Cantersteen 47
Boulevard Sylvain Dupuis 239 1
Avenue René Gobert 14 6
Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6
Avenue Edouard Speeckaert 140
Avenue de la Couronne 311 8
Cantersteen 47
Boulevard Sylvain Dupuis 239 1
Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6
Cantersteen 47
Avenue de l'Université 32 1E
Boulevard Sylvain Dupuis 239 1
Avenue de la Chasse 180
Chaussée d'Alsemberg 1235
Rue du Monastère 42
Avenue Démosthène Poplimont 6
Avenue René Comhaire 65
Dieweg 89
Avenue de l'Idéal 56
Rue du Potaerdenberg 181
Rue d'Espagne 105
Chaussée d'Alsemberg 1045
Nilleveldstraat 60
Rue Saint-Sébastien 31
Avenue Docteur Decroly 52
Rue du Bourdon 35
Rue Gustave Fuss 25
Rue du Vivier 110
Rue du Cornet 65
Rue Le Corrège 39
Square Marguerite 1 31
Rue du Noyer 175
Place Saint-Pierre 38
Rue Borrens 51 1
Rue Artan 13
Avenue Ernest Cambier 4
Avenue de l'Equinoxe 37
Avenue A. J. Slegers 169
Avenue du Frioul 8 14
Avenue des Frères Legrain 111
Rue Joseph Wauters 80
Rue des Fortifications 30
Avenue des Merles 15
Place de Ninove 3
Rue Franz Merjay 68 1
Chaussée de Boondael 574
Rue Antoine Bréart 118
Rue de la Station de Woluwe 80
Avenue du Bois de la Cambre 199
Rue du Laekenveld 11
Rue Louis Jasmin 37
Avenue Edmond Parmentier 248
Avenue de Tervueren 420
Chaussée de Wavre 1967-1969
Rue Jakob Smits 101
Avenue François Folie 26 27
Avenue des Grands Prix 134
Rue Alphonse et Maurice Hellinckx 3
Avenue Théo Verbeeck 3
Rue du Château Beyaerd 137
Rue Mercator 30
Sint-Martinuskerkstraat 54
Avenue Josse Goffin 125
Avenue Mutsaard 74 41
Avenue de la Libre Académie 52
Rue du Bourdon 35
Rue de Linkebeek 1
Rue du Vieux-Moulin 66
Rue du Blanc Ry 63
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Rue des Bons Enfants 22
Chaussée de Tubize 63
Rue du Tilleul 127
Josse Biesmansstraat 24
Avenue Jules Malou 61
Rue Lanfray 19
Rue d'Espagne 105
Avenue Jean-François Debecker 31 A000
Avenue des Ajoncs 18
Rue des Primeurs 81
Chaussée de Stockel 377
Chaussée de Mons 574
Avenue Josse Goffin 153
Rue Marlène Dietrich 25
Rue de Percke 99
Avenue des Sorbiers 21
Rue de Moranville 64
Avenue André Drouart 48
Chaussée d'Alsemberg 1393
Rue Pierre Schlosser 7
Rue Bois des Iles 24
Rue Paloke 105
Avenue Louis Bertrand 41
Rue du Noyer 175
Rue du Village 29
Rue Kelle 156
Rue Commandant Ponthier 110
Chaussée d'Ixelles 52 2E
Avenue du Lac 87
Rue du hameau 1E
Rue de Trois Arbres 16B
Avenue Louise 193
Rond-Point Robert Schuman 6 5
Rue Belliard 12
Rue Le Corrège 20
Rue des Boers 21
Rue Wappers 5
Rue Général Capiaumont 25
Chaussée de Wavre 99
Rue Ernest Solvay 30
Rue Général Gratry 74
Rue Nothomb 42
Avenue du Front 14
Avenue de l'Opale 119
Avenue de l'Armée 63 11
Rue des Petits Carmes 24 CB54
Chaussée de Boondael 40
Rue Adolphe Mathieu 64
Avenue Louise 475 15
Avenue Louise 480
Rue du Bois de Linthout 46
Rue Verte 2A 32
Rue François Roffiaen 1
Rue François Roffiaen 34
Rue de l'Est 26
Boulevard Anspach 17 48
Rue de Belle Vue 28 1
Rue Georges Matheus 2
Rue de l'Aurore 4
Rue du Grand Hospice 3A
Avenue Charles Brassine 50 3
Rue Emmanuel Hiel 35-4
Avenue Ernestine 7
Avenue du Suffrage Universel 29
Rue Fernand Neuray 48 M000
Rue d'Alost 7
Avenue du Haut-Pont 1 1
Chaussée de Mons 25
Quai des Péniches 58 62
Rue de la Bougie 37 13
Rue du Chimiste 34
Avenue Henri Strauvens 1 B011
Avenue Eugène Demolder 119
Rue de Ribaucourt 135
Avenue de Calabre 4
Avenue Jacques Brel 34 B20
Rue de l'Application 62
Avenue de la Héronnière 100 19
Rue Pierre Delacroix 13
Avenue de Messidor 213
Avenue Molière 25 1
Chaussée d'Alsemberg 350
Chaussée d'Alsemberg 350
Carré des Platanes 2
Avenue des Tritons 59
Avenue Van Volxem 299
Chaussée de Wavre 1763
Avenue De Fré 139 18
Rue au Bois 166
Avenue du Cor de Chasse 93
Rue Jacques Vandervleet 33 M-H
Avenue Coghen 159
Rue Edmond Tollenaere 92
Rue du Moulin à Papier 96
Rue Victor Rauter 49
Avenue Paul De Merten 10
Drève du Sénéchal 30
Boulevard Edmond Machtens 172
Montagne de Saint-Job 76 A
Avenue Van Crombrugghe 118
Clos du Drossart 6
Parvis Sainte-Alix 39 B002
Boulevard Maria Groeninckx-De May 74
Boulevard Maria Groeninckx-De May 74
Dieweg 54 1
Avenue Gisseleire Versé 26
Eugène Ysayelaan 33
Avenue Waxweiler 45
Rue Emile Heylens 17
Boulevard Théo Lambert 56 4
Avenue des Frères Becqué 38
Avenue Jan Verdoodt 7 M-H
Place du Bourgmestre J. L. Thys 3 2B
Rue du Tir 14
Chaussée de Waterloo 788
Avenue Marcel Thiry 60 B04
Rue Auguste Van Zande 81
Rue Guillaume Kennis 21
Chaussée de Saint-Job 309
Rue Général Leman 32
Rue Le Titien 7
Avenue Roger Vandendriessche 19
Chaussée de Waterloo 715 31
Rue Marianne 29
Place Eugène Keym 41
Avenue des Eoliennes 2
Rue du Champ de la Couronne 21
Avenue de Biolley 47
Avenue Jacques de Meurers 107
Avenue Pieter Goedefroy 2 B6
Chaussée d'Alsemberg 842
Théo Lambertlaan 13
Rue de Theux 103
Rue Emile Banning 105
Rue Auguste Van Zande 81
Avenue des Cerisiers 47
Rue Emile Deroover 45 M000
Rue Frans Pepermans 72
Avenue Molière 55
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Chaussée Saint-Pierre 105 1
Chaussée de Wavre 273
Rue Philippe le Bon 34 37
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Rue Goffart 82
Rue Goffart 82
Avenue Léon Mahillon 33
Chaussée Saint-Pierre 387
Chaussée Saint-Pierre 387
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Chaussée de Louvain 30
Chaussée de Louvain 30
Rue Marcel Mariën 6 ET02
Rue Philippe Baucq 138B
Tervurenlaan 32
Avenue de Roodebeek 44
Rue des Moissons 26
Avenue Adolphe Lacomblé 59-65
Avenue Adolphe Lacomblé 59
Rue Nothomb 38
Rue du Congrès 49
Rue des Bataves 10
Avenue Léon Mahillon 68
Rue Bâtonnier Braffort 28
Rue Bâtonnier Braffort 28
Rue de la Croix de Fer 53
Avenue Milcamps 167
Rue des Cultes 7 9
Rue des Cultes 7
Avenue Emile Max 116
Avenue Léon Mahillon 127
Rue Albert de Latour 8
Rue Maes 13-1
Square Vergote 19
Rue de Venise 77
Rue Traversière 103
Boulevard Auguste Reyers 207 5
Rue de l'Arbre Bénit 19
Boulevard Auguste Reyers 159
Avenue Eugène Plasky 164
Rue Général Fivé 9B
Avenue Marie-José 172
Avenue de l'Armée 116
Avenue de l'Armée 116
Square Vergote 10B 13
Square Vergote 10B 13
Rue de Ligne 11
Boulevard Auguste Reyers 80
Rue de Ligne 11
Rue de Ligne 11
Rue Joseph Coosemans 107
Avenue de l'Emeraude 66 1
Rue Van Hammée 17
Avenue des Casernes 65
Rue Royale 117
Avenue Général Bernheim 18 3
Rue des Chevaliers 14 7
Rue des Chevaliers 14
Rue des Chevaliers 14 10
Place de la Patrie 43
Rue des Coteaux 85 1
Boulevard Saint-Michel 65 6
Boulevard Saint-Michel 65
Boulevard Saint-Michel 65 6
Avenue Dailly 50
Boulevard Saint-Michel 14 15
Rue de Ruysbroeck 90
Hippolyte Rolinpromenade 6 20
Avenue Rogier 188
Avenue Rogier 188
Avenue de la Toison d'Or 16
Rue Jean d'Ardenne 67
Chaussée de Haecht 51
Rue Paul Devigne 108
Rue Paul Devigne 108
Rue Paul Devigne 108
Rue Paul Devigne 108
Rue des Coteaux 136
Rue Frans Binjé 30
Rue Dautzenberg 36-38
Rue Dautzenberg 36
Rue Thiéfry 69
Rue Thiéfry 69
Avenue Jan Stobbaerts 99
Avenue Louise 453 9
Avenue Louise 179
Avenue Louise 486-5
Avenue Louise 349 1
Avenue Louise 304 5
Avenue Louise 326
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue du Castel 58
Avenue du Castel 58
Avenue de Mai 288
Rue Gachard 88 14
Rue Gachard 88 14
Avenue de Tervueren 237
Avenue de Tervueren 237
Rue Juliette Wytsman 88
Rue Vilain XIIII 8
Place de la Vieille Halle aux Blés 29
Rue Paul Bossu 7
Avenue Louise 272
Avenue du Castel 2
Avenue du Castel 2
Avenue de Tervueren 204
Rue Baron de Castro 79 5
Avenue Louise 304 5
Rue du Duc 28
Chaussée de Roodebeek 521
Avenue Rogier 10
Avenue Rogier 10
Tenbos 18 9
Avenue des Volontaires 233
Avenue Herbert Hoover 253
Avenue Charles Madoux 13-15
Avenue Charles Madoux 13-15
Rue d'Ecosse 11
Rue d'Ecosse 11
Rue d'Ecosse 11
Rue Capouillet 63 RC
Rue Saint-Bernard 11 5
Avenue de la Couronne 267
Avenue des Ombrages 1 22
Rue des Palmiers 34
Rue Verte 116
Avenue des Volontaires 327 21
Avenue des Volontaires 327 21
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue Louis Gribaumont 115-117
Rue Verte 133
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue du Couronnement 9
Avenue Roger Vandendriessche 81
Rue de l'Amblève 47
Rue de l'Amblève 47
Rue d'Ecosse 67
Rue d'Ecosse 67
Avenue Gustave Latinis 114 9
Avenue Frans Courtens 126
Chaussée de Haecht 271
Rue de Neufchâtel 28
Rue De Crayer 16
Rue De Crayer 16
Avenue Général de Longueville 4
Avenue Emile Duray 38
Rue Van Eyck 15
Rue Van Eyck 15
Chaussée de Vleurgat 213
Avenue de Stalingrad 14
Avenue de Stalingrad 14
Rue de la Victoire 168
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Avenue de la Couronne 548 1
Avenue des Saisons 111
Avenue des Saisons 111
Rue Africaine 60
Rue du Lavoir 43
Rue du Lavoir 43
Rue Africaine 60
Rue du Lavoir 43
Avenue Charles Gilisquet 81
Avenue Adolphe Buyl 64
Rue des Mélèzes 65
Avenue Charles Gilisquet 81
Rue du Tabellion 66
Rue Saint-Bernard 127
Avenue Edouard Speeckaert 19 5
Rue de l'Angle 2
Chaussée de Louvain 775
Boulevard d'Anvers 28
Rue Saint-Georges 32
Avenue Ernestine 1
Avenue Ernestine 1
Avenue Ernestine 1
Avenue Adolphe Buyl 73
Avenue Adolphe Buyl 73
Rue d'Irlande 18
Rue d'Irlande 18
Rue Rubens 85
Rue Colonel Bourg 127-129
Avenue des Eperviers 87
Avenue des Eperviers 87
Avenue des Eperviers 111 24
Avenue Louise 486
Rue De Praetere 12
Chaussée de Haecht 408
Avenue Guillaume Abeloos 2
Rue des Hellènes 40 4
Chaussée de Haecht 408
Rue de l'Hôtel des Monnaies 124A
Chaussée de Waterloo 462
Chaussée de Wavre 1297
Chaussée de Waterloo 462
Rue des Trois Ponts 40
Rue des Palais 127
Rue des Palais 127
Avenue du Suffrage Universel 10
Rue de l'Hôtel des Monnaies 138
Rue Caporal Claes 6 15
Avenue de la Quiétude 22
Rue Vanderschrick 16
Quai du Commerce 18
Avenue Josse Smets 42
Chaussée de Roodebeek 291
Rue Froebel 3
Avenue A. J. Slegers 91
Rue de la Fôret d'Houthulst 3 20
Rue Guillaume Kennis 67
Avenue Jeanne 33 4
Rue du Kent 30
Rue du Kent 30
Rue du Kent 30
Avenue Legrand 45
Rue Théo Coopman 5
Rue Théo Coopman 5
Rue Colonel Bourg 158 1
Square Robert Goldschmidt 20
Rue d'Alost 7-11
Avenue Paul Hymans 28
Rue de Lombardie 14
Avenue Paul Hymans 28
Rue de Lombardie 14
Rue du Fort 46
Rue Henri Wafelaerts 22
Rue Henri Wafelaerts 22
Avenue des Loisirs 2 2
Avenue Louis Ceusters 26 2
Avenue Pierre Curie 23
Boulevard Lambermont 171 6
Boulevard Lambermont 171 6
Chemin des Deux Maisons 179 66
Avenue Molière 339
Place Guy d'Arezzo 17 8
Chemin des Deux Maisons 63 5
Chemin des Deux Maisons 61 10
Chemin des Deux Maisons 63 5
Chemin des Deux Maisons 63 5
Rue de la Cambre 16
Rue du Foyer Schaerbeekois 36
Avenue de Visé 86
Avenue Charles Thielemans 9
Avenue Charles Thielemans 9
Clos Bel Horizon 11
Rue François-Joseph Navez 55
Avenue Notre-Dame 47
Rue Vervloesem 53
Avenue Molière 295
Rue du Dahlia 21 2
Rue Richard Vandevelde 102
Rue du Dahlia 21 2
Rue de Danemark 28
Rue de l'Intendant 70 1
Avenue Sleeckx 14
Rue Brogniez 138
Rue Brogniez 138
Avenue de Tercoigne 18
Rue Nestor de Tière 5
Rue Nestor de Tière 5
Rue de l'Intendant 92
Rue Gabrielle 99 5
Rue Berkendael 99
Rue Berkendael 99
Avenue du Port 108-110
Boulevard des Invalides 36
Boulevard des Invalides 36
Rue de l'Instruction 126
Avenue Montjoie 57
Avenue Montjoie 57
Rue de l'Instruction 126B
Avenue du Roi 40A
Boulevard des Invalides 32
Avenue de la Sauvagine 9 23
Avenue de la Sauvagine 7 97
Rue Théodore De Cuyper 100
Avenue Winston Churchill 147
Rue Le Lorrain 110
Avenue Franklin Roosevelt 108
Luxor Parc 14
Boulevard de la Révision 24 13
Boulevard de la Révision 24 13
Boulevard de la Révision 24 17
Herzieningslaan 24 13
Rue du Loutrier 60
Rue Max Roos 28 13
Rue Théodore De Cuyper 165 36
Rue Frans Pepermans 81
Rue Edith Cavell 63A
Avenue Maurice Maeterlinck 9
Rue Van Lint 25
Avenue Winston Churchill 87
Avenue Winston Churchill 87
Chaussée de Wavre 1572
Avenue Brugmann 228
Avenue Brugmann 228
Avenue de la Héronnière 90 4
Rue Houzeau de Lehaie 64
Avenue Tedesco 26
Avenue Tedesco 26
Avenue Tedesco 26
Avenue Winston Churchill 51
Avenue Winston Churchill 51
Avenue Winston Churchill 51
Avenue Marcel Thiry 79
Chaussée de Wavre 1574 1
Chaussée de Wavre 1574 1
Chaussée de Wavre 1574 1
Rue de la Vignette 179 3
Rue du Loutrier 13
Avenue Huart Hamoir 28
Rue Théophile Vander Elst 12
Rue Théophile Vander Elst 12
Rue de la Vignette 145
Square de Noville 8 32
Rue de la Vignette 145
Rue Cervantés 75
Rue Meyerbeer 48
Avenue du Derby 7 15
Rue Cervantés 68
Avenue Tedesco 5
Avenue Tedesco 5
Avenue Tedesco 5
Rue Neerveld 1 1
Rue des Vétérinaires 49 18102
Avenue Van Volxem 499
Rue Neerveld 1 1
Rue Jean-Baptiste Decock 17
Avenue du Mistral 28
Avenue du Mistral 28
Rue Picard 218 4
Rue Jean-Baptiste Bauwens 1
Rue Jean-Baptiste Bauwens 1
Rue Jean-Baptiste Bauwens 1
Boulevard Leopold II 214
Rue Meyerbeer 71 4
Place Princesse Elisabeth 11
Avenue de l'Aquilon 5 11
Avenue de l'Aquilon 5
Rue Vandernoot 18
Rue Vandernoot 18
Avenue du Bois de Sapins 2
Rue Georges Moreau 103
Boulevard du Jubilé 178A 3
Avenue du Cosmonaute 10
Chaussée de Bruxelles 400 2
Chaussée de Bruxelles 400
Chaussée de Bruxelles 400 2
Rue Meyerbeer 138B
Avenue Van Volxem 402
Avenue Everard 30
Rue Gabrielle Petit 27
Rue Drootbeek 42
Rue Drootbeek 42
Avenue Marcel Thiry 11 2
Chaussée de Wavre 1680 2
Rue des Alliés 315
Avenue Marcel Thiry 22 16
Avenue Marcel Thiry 22 16
Avenue des Noisetiers 44
Avenue Marcel Thiry 16 18
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
Avenue Louise 306
Avenue Richard Mazza 7
Avenue Marie de Hongrie 64 5
Avenue de la Couronne 38
Avenue des Gaulois 3
Boulevard Emile Jacqmain 16 23
Avenue de Tervueren 313
Rue Jakob Smits 123
Avenue Joseph Wybran 40
Avenue Charles Quint 30
Rue Georges Moreau 35
Rue Cornet de Grez 19
Avenue Clemenceau 87 4
Avenue du Château 58
Avenue Gounod 33
Avenue Gounod 33
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Square Charles-Maurice Wiser 17 19
Avenue de la Renaissance 1
AUDERGHEM
FOREST
ANDERLECHT
WOLUWE-SAINT-LAMBERT
IXELLES
WATERMAEL-BOITSFORT
UCCLE
WOLUWE-SAINT-PIERRE
NEDER-OVER-HEEMBEEK
HERSEAUX
LEUZE-EN-HAINAUT
SAINT-JOSSE-TEN-NOODE
BRUXELLES
BERCHEM-SAINTE-AGATHE
ETTERBEEK
SAINT-GILLES
KRAAINEM
BRUSSEL
SCHAERBEEK
JETTE
EVERE
"BRAINE-L'ALLEUD"
MOLENBEEK-SAINT-JEAN
KOEKELBERG
LAEKEN
GANSHOREN
HAREN
WAUTHIER-BRAINE
HOEILAART
OTTIGNIES
QUENAST
GENVAL
Product Brief
Intel® Edison
Introduction
The Intel® Edison development
platform is designed to lower the
barriers to entry for a range of
inventors, entrepreneurs, and
consumer product designers to
rapidly prototype and produce
“Internet of Things” (IoT) and
wearable computing products.
Intel® Edison Board for Arduino*
Supports Arduino Sketch, Linux,
Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth.
Board I/O: Compatible with
Arduino Uno (except 4 PWM
instead of 6 PWM):
• 20 digital input/output pins,
including 4 pins as PWM
outputs.
• 6 analog inputs.
• 1 UART (Rx/Tx).
• 1 I2C.
• 1 ICSP 6-pin header (SPI).
• Micro USB device connector OR
(via mechanical switch)
dedicated standard size USB
host Type-A connector.
• Micro USB device (connected to
UART).
• SD card connector.
• DC power jack (7 to15 VDC
input).
Intel® Edison Breakout Board
Slightly larger than the
Intel® Edison module, the
Intel® Edison Breakout Board has
a minimal set of features:
• Exposes native 1.8 V I/O of the
Edison module.
• 0.1 inch grid I/O array of
through-hole solder points.
• USB OTG with USB Micro
Type-AB connector.
• USB OTG power switch.
• Battery charger.
• USB to device UART bridge with
USB micro Type-B connector.
• DC power supply jack (7 to
15 VDC input).
Intel® IoT Analytics Platform
• Provides seamless Device-toDevice
and Device-to-Cloud
communication.
• Ability to run rules on your data
stream that trigger alerts based
on advanced analytics.
• Foundational tools for
collecting, storing, and
processing data in the cloud.
• Free for limited and
noncommercial use.
Intel® Edison
Development Platform
Intel® Edison Development Platform
Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions
marked “reserved” or “undefined”. Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them.
The information here is subject to change without notice. Do not finalize a design with this information.
Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order.
Copies of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel literature, may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725 or by visiting Intel’s website
at http://www.intel.com/design/literature.htm.
Intel processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor numbers differentiate features within each processor family, not across different processor families.
See http://www.intel.com/products/processor_number for details.
Intel, the Intel logo, Atom, Pentium, Quark, and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Copyright © 2014 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Please Recycle 331179-001
PHYSICAL
Form factor Board with 70-pin connector
Dimensions 35.5 × 25.0 × 3.9 mm (1.4 × 1.0 × 0.15 inches) max
C/M/F Blue PCB with shields / No enclosure
Connector Hirose DF40 Series (1.5, 2.0, or 3.0 mm stack height)
Operating temperature 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C)
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
Total of 40 GPIOs, which can be configured as:
SD card 1 interface
UART 2 controllers (1 full flow control, 1 Rx/Tx)
I2C 2 controllers
SPI 1 controller with 2 chip selects
I2S 1 controller
GPIO Additional 12 (with 4 capable of PWM)
USB 2.0 1 OTG controller
Clock output 32 kHz, 19.2 MHz
MAJOR EDISON COMPONENTS
SoC 22 nm Intel® SoC that includes a dual-core, dual-threaded Intel® Atom™ CPU at 500 MHz and a 32-bit
Intel® Quark™ microcontroller at 100 MHz
RAM 1 GB LPDDR3 POP memory
(2 channel 32bits @ 800MT/sec)
Flash storage 4 GB eMMC (v4.51 spec)
WiFi Broadcom* 43340 802.11 a/b/g/n;
Dual-band (2.4 and 5 GHz)
Onboard antenna or external antenna (SKU configurations)
Bluetooth Bluetooth 4.0
POWER
Input 3.3 to 4.5 V
Output 100 ma @3.3 V and 100 ma @ 1.8 V
Power Standby (No radios): 13 mW
Standby (Bluetooth 4.0): 21.5 mW (BTLE in Q4-14)
Standby (Wi-Fi): 35 mW
FIRMWARE + SOFTWARE
CPU OS Yocto Linux* v1.6
Development environments Arduino* IDE
Eclipse supporting: C, C++, and Python
Intel XDK supporting: Node.JS and HTML5
MCU OS RTOS
Development environments MCU SDK and IDE
Face 2
Niveaux de protection
RAID 0+1
(entrelacé
et en
miroir)
Nombre de disques : 4
Capacité nette avec
quatre disques
de 500 Go 1 To
Entrelacement et écriture miroir.
Les données sont entrelacées sur
deux disques et écrites en miroir sur
les deux autres. Les performances
sont ainsi optimales et les données
bien protégées.
Entrelacement avec parité. Les données
et les informations sur la parité sont
réparties sur chaque disque de la
matrice, offrant ainsi un équilibre parfait
entre performances, tolérances aux
pannes et utilisation de l’espace disque.
Nombre de disques : 4
Capacité nette avec
quatre disques
de 500 Go 1,5 To
RAID 5
(Parité) D4 D4 D4 D4
D4 D4 D4 D4
12 Connexion à votre système de stockage
1 Vous pouvez SOIT ouvrir la fenêtre de l’explorateur et saisir
l’adresse IP de votre système de stockage, SOIT double-cliquer
sur l’icône de votre bureau.
Si un écran de blocage du contenu d’Internet Explorer s’affiche,
cliquez sur Autoriser. Cliquez sur Ajouter dans l’écran Sites
de confiance.
Dans la page d’accueil, cliquez sur Log in to storage device
(Connexion au périphérique de stockage).
3
2
4 Saisissez le nom d’utilisateur et le mot de passe.
Cliquez sur Log In (Connexion)
Vous avez maintenant terminé la configuration utilisateur
basique de l’Intel® Entry Storage System SS4200-E. Pour
plus d’informations sur la configuration des utilisateurs et des
dossiers partagés, reportez-vous au Manuel d’utilisation du
logiciel de l’Intel® Entry Storage System SS4200-E. Pour
plus d’informations sur la sauvegarde de votre système,
reportez-vous à l’aide en ligne EMC* Retrospect Backup and
Recovery (Sauvegarde et récupération rétrospective EMC).
11 Réalisation de l’installation
Lorsque l’écran Congratulations (Félicitations) s’affiche,
notez l’adresse IP puis cliquez sur OK. 1
Si vous avez choisi un autre nom que celui par défaut
(storage) pour le dispositif, la page Restart Required
(Redémarrage nécessaire) s’affiche. Cliquez sur Apply
(Appliquer) pour redémarrer le système de stockage.
Vous pouvez perdre momentanément votre connexion
pendant ce laps de temps et devoir alors vous connecter
au Device Manager (Gestionnaire de périphériques).
10 Configuration de la date/heure
Sélectionnez un fuseau horaire dans la liste déroulante.
Indiquez un serveur horaire OU saisissez manuellement une heure et une date.
Pour utiliser le serveur horaire par défaut, cochez la case Automatically
synchronize with an Internet time server (Synchroniser automatiquement
avec un serveur horaire Internet) et sélectionnez Use the default time server
(Utiliser le serveur horaire par défaut).
Pour désigner un serveur horaire spécifique, cochez la case Automatically
synchronize with an Internet time server (Synchroniser automatiquement
avec un serveur horaire Internet) et sélectionnez Specify the time server
(Désigner le serveur horaire). Entrez l’URL du serveur horaire Internet dans la
zone de texte Server (Serveur) affichée.
Pour désigner manuellement un serveur horaire spécifique, désélectionnez
la case Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server
(Synchroniser automatiquement avec un serveur horaire Internet) et saisissez
la date actuelle (MM/JJ/AAAA), l’heure (hh:mm) ainsi qu’am ou pm dans
les zones de texte affichées.
Cliquez sur Apply (Appliquer) pour continuer.
2
1
3
Configuration de la notification
par courrier électronique
9
(Facultatif) Saisissez une adresse électronique valide si vous voulez que le système
vous envoie un message électronique en cas de problème. Cochez la case Additional
Credentials Required (Authentifications supplémentaires requises) uniquement si
votre réseau bloque le trafic SMTP ou nécessite des authentifications supplémentaires.
(Facultatif) Cliquez sur Send a test email message (Envoyer un message
électronique de test).
Cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour continuer.
1
2
3
Identification du système de stockage
sur le réseau
8
2
1
3
Par défaut, le nom du système de stockage est « storage ».
Vous pouvez conserver ce nom par défaut si vous le désirez.
Saisissez un nom de dispositif pour le système de stockage.
Ce nom vous permettra d’identifier le système sur le réseau.
Saisissez un nom descriptif pour le système de stockage.
Cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour continuer.
7 Création d’un compte Administrateur
Saisissez un nom d’utilisateur pour le compte Administrateur.
Ce nom d’utilisateur peut contenir jusqu’à 32 caractères.
Les espaces sont interdits.
Créez un mot de passe pour le compte Administrateur.
Pour plus de sécurité, choisissez un mot de passe comprenant
8 à 12 caractères. Les espaces sont interdits.
Cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour continuer.
1
3
2
6 Chargement du logiciel du système de stockage
Sélectionnez I accept the terms of the License Agreement
(J’accepte les termes de l’accord de licence) dans l’écran de
l’accord de licence. Cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour continuer.
Sélectionnez l’emplacement d’installation puis cliquez sur Next
(Suivant) pour continuer.
Cliquez sur Install (Installer).
Remarque : Sur les systèmes d’exploitation Apple* Macintosh, les écrans
d’installation ont la même fonctionnalité, même si leur aspect est différent.
Remarque : Il est recommandé de connecter le système de stockage à un
réseau compatible DHCP pour procéder à l’installation du logiciel.
Insérez le CD Resource livré avec votre Intel® Entry Storage System
SS4200-E, dans un ordinateur connecté au même réseau que celui du
système de stockage.
Remarque : Si le CD Resource ne démarre pas automatiquement,
parcourez ce CD et lancez manuellement le fichier install.exe.
Le logiciel de gestion du système de stockage doit être installé sur un
ordinateur connecté au même réseau que celui du système de stockage.
Suivez les différentes étapes de l’Assistant d’installation.
Sélectionnez Language (Langue) et cliquez sur OK pour continuer.
4
3
2
1
6
7
8
5
L’écran Installation complete (Installation terminée) s’affiche.
Cliquez sur Done (Terminé).
Le gestionnaire du système de stockage s’ouvre automatiquement
dans l’explorateur. L’écran Welcome (Bienvenue) s’affiche.
Cliquez sur Next (Suivant) pour lancer l’Assistant de configuration.
Remarque : Si le gestionnaire ne
détecte pas votre système de stockage,
les instructions Hardware Setup
(Configuration matérielle) s’affichent.
Remarque : Lors de la tentative de
connexion, Microsoft Internet Explorer*
peut afficher un écran d’avertissement
relatif au certificat de sécurité. Dans ce
cas, cliquez sur Yes (Oui) ou Accept
(Accepter) pour continuer.
Unité de stockage Intel®
Série DC S3500
Garantie limitée avec indicateur d'usure de support
Intel garantit à l'acheteur du Produit spécifié ci-dessus dans son emballage d'origine scellé (« Acheteur originel ») et à
l'acheteur d'un système informatique (contenant le Produit) conçu par un Acheteur originel (« Client du système originel ») ce
qui suit : si le Produit est utilisé et installé correctement, il sera exempt de tout défaut matériel et de fabrication, et il sera
généralement conforme aux spécifications rendues publiques par Intel pendant la « période de garantie », selon la période LA
PLUS COURTE parmi ce qui suit : (A) PÉRIODE DE CINQ (5) ANS À PARTIR DE LA DATE D'ACHAT DU PRODUIT DANS SON
EMBALLAGE SCELLÉ D'ORIGINE DANS LE CAS D UN ACHAT D’ORIGINE OU DE L’ACHAT D’ORIGINE D’UN ORDINATEUR
CONTENANT LE PRODUIT DANS LE CAS D’UN SYSTÈME CLIENT D’ORIGINE ; OU (B) LA PÉRIODE SE TERMINANT À LA DATE À
LAQUELLE L’UTILISATION DU DISQUE, MESURÉE PAR L’IMPLÉMENTATION PAR INTEL DE L’ATTRIBUT SMART E9 MEDIA WEAROUT
INDICATOR (INDICATEUR D’USURE DU SUPPORT), ATTEINT UNE VALEUR NORMALISÉE DE « 1 ». L’attribut E9 (Media
Wear-out indicator) est spécifié dans la fiche technique Intel du Produit. Un disque dur neuf et vierge indique une valeur
Indicateur d'usure de support de 100 tandis qu'un disque ayant atteint ses limites d'utilisation en écriture affiche une valeur de
1. Si le Produit, objet de la présente garantie limitée, ne parvient pas à respecter la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de
garantie, Intel se propose, selon son appréciation, de :
RÉPARER le Produit par des méthodes matérielles ou logicielles, OU
REMPLACER le Produit par un autre OU, si Intel n'est pas en mesure de réparer ni de remplacer le Produit,
REMBOURSER le prix Intel du Produit au moment où la demande de service de garantie est déposée à Intel dans le
cadre de cette garantie limité.
CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE ET TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE POUVANT EXISTER D'APRÈS LES LOIS ÉTATIQUES, NATIONALES,
PROVINCIALES OU LOCALES APPLICABLES, S'APPLIQUE UNIQUEMENT À VOUS, L'ACHETEUR ORIGINEL DU PRODUIT OU DU
SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI INCLUT LE PRODUIT ET DURE AUSSI LONGTEMPS QUE VOUS DEMEUREZ LE PROPRIÉTAIRE DU
PRODUIT. LA GARANTIE S'ACHÈVE DÈS LORS QUE LE CLIENT DU SYSTÈME ORIGINEL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE LE SYSTÈME
INFORMATIQUE, CE QUI INCLUT LE PRODUIT.
ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE
Intel ne garantit pas que le Produit sera exempt de défauts de conception ou d'erreurs appelées « errata ». Les errata
caractérisés actuels sont disponibles sur demande. De plus, cette garantie limitée ne couvre PAS :
Tous les frais liés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris la main d'œuvre, l'installation ou les autres
frais encourus par vous et, en particulier, les frais associés au retrait ou au remplacement de tout Produit soudé ou
autrement fixé de façon permanente à toute carte de circuit imprimé, OU
Les dommages subis par le Produit pour toute cause externe, y compris les accidents, les problèmes d'alimentation
électrique, les conditions environnementales, mécaniques ou électriques anormales, une utilisation non conforme aux
instructions du Produit, une utilisation abusive, une négligence, une modification, une réparation, une installation
incorrecte ou un essai inapproprié, OU
Tout Produit ayant été modifié ou utilisé en dehors des spécifications rendues publiques par Intel ou alors que les
marques d'identification originales (marque de fabrique ou numéro de série) ont été enlevées, modifiées ou oblitérées du
Produit ou dont l'étiquette ou la vis situées à l'extérieur du Produit ont été retirées ou cassées, OU
Tout Produit ayant atteint ses limites d'utilisation en écriture telles que mesurées par l'attribut SMART (E9) « Indicateur
d'usure de support » (valeur de 1), comme expliqué ci-dessus.
COMMENT OBTENIR LE SERVICE DE GARANTIE ?
Pour obtenir le service de garantie du Produit (dans son emballage d'origine scellé), vous pouvez contacter le point d'achat
d'origine conformément à ses instructions ou vous pouvez contacter Intel. Pour obtenir le service de garantie d'Intel, vous
devez contacter le centre d'assistance à la clientèle d'Intel (« ICS ») de votre région pendant la période de garantie et pendant
les heures ouvrées normales (heure locale), à l'exception des jours fériés, et retourner le Produit au centre ICS désigné.
(Consultez ce qui suit pour savoir comment contacter le centre ICS de votre région.) Soyez préparé à fournir les éléments
suivants :
1. Votre nom, adresses postale et électronique ainsi que votre numéro de téléphone
Copyright © 2011, Intel Corporation. Tous droits réservés.
0511/Merci de recycler
2. Preuve d'achat
3. Nom du modèle et référence indiquée sur le Produit
4. (éventuellement) une description du système informatique ainsi que la marque et le modèle
5. Description du problème
Il se peut que le représentant ICS ait besoin d'informations complémentaires, en fonction de la nature du problème. Une fois que
le centre ICS a vérifié que le Produit peut bénéficier du service de garantie, un numéro d'autorisation de renvoi de matériel
(« RMA ») vous est fourni, avec des instructions pour retourner le Produit au centre ICS désigné. Le numéro RMA doit être
apposé sur l'emballage du Produit lors de son expédition au centre ICS. Intel n’acceptera aucun retour d’un Produit sur
l’emballage duquel ne figure aucun numéro RMA valide. Vous devez retourner le Produit au centre ICS dans l'emballage original
ou dans un emballage équivalent, avec des frais d'expédition prépayés (aux États-Unis) et assumer le risque de dommages ou
de perte lors de l'expédition. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention peuvent être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous
sollicitez des services de garantie n'a pas été acheté auprès d'un distributeur agréé dans votre pays/région. (Pour connaître la
définition des termes pays/région, contactez votre centre d'assistance à la clientèle Intel® (ICS) local ou allez sur
www.intel.com/p/fr_FR/support.)
Intel peut décider de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit avec un Produit ou des composants neufs ou reconditionnés, à sa
discrétion. Le Produit réparé ou remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d'Intel dans des délais raisonnables après réception par le
centre ICS du Produit retourné. Le Produit retourné deviendra la propriété d'Intel à sa réception au centre ICS. Le Produit de
remplacement est garanti selon les termes de cette garantie écrite et est sujet aux mêmes limitations et exclusions pendant
une période de quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pour la fin de la période de garantie originale, la période la plus longue étant à
retenir. Si Intel remplace le Produit, la période de garantie limitée du Produit de remplacement n'est pas prolongée.
LIMITATIONS ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE
CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES DU PRODUIT ET INTEL NE RECONNAÎT AUCUNE AUTRE
GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS S'Y LIMITER, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE,
D'ADAPTATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, DE NON VIOLATION, DE RESPECT DES HABITUDES COMMERCIALES ÉTABLIES ET
DES USAGES DU COMMERCE. Certains États (ou juridictions) n'autorisent pas l'exclusion des garanties implicites et il est
possible que cette limitation ne vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES
EST LIMITÉE À LA PÉRIODE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. AUCUNE GARANTIE N'EST APPLICABLE APRÈS CETTE PÉRIODE.
Certains États (ou juridictions) n'autorisent pas les limitations de durée sur les garanties implicites et il est possible que
cette limitation ne vous soit pas applicable.
LIMITATIONS DE RESPONSABILITÉ
LA RESPONSABILITÉ D'INTEL DANS LE CADRE DE CETTE GARANTIE OU DE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE,
IMPLICITE OU EXPRESSE, EST LIMITÉE À LA RÉPARATION, AU REMPLACEMENT OU AU REMBOURSEMENT,
COMME STIPULÉ CI-DESSUS. CES RECOURS SONT LES SEULS ET UNIQUES RECOURS EN CAS DE
VIOLATION DE GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE AUTORISÉE PAR LA LOI, INTEL N'EST RESPONSABLE
D'AUCUN DOMMAGE DIRECT, SPÉCIAL, ACCIDENTEL OU CONSÉCUTIF RÉSULTANT DE TOUTE VIOLATION DE LA GARANTIE
OU SOUS TOUTE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE (Y COMPRIS, SANS S'Y LIMITER, PERTE DE PROFITS, IMMOBILISATION, PERTE
D'ACHALANDAGE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT D'ÉQUIPEMENTS OU DE PROPRIÉTÉS ET TOUT COÛT DE
RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DE TOUT PROGRAMME, OU DONNÉE, STOCKÉ OU UTILISÉ
AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ INFORMÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES.
Certains États (ou juridictions) n'autorisent pas l'exclusion ou la limitation des dommages accidentels ou consécutifs et il est
possible que les limitations ou exclusions ci-dessus ne vous soient pas applicables.
CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS DONNE DES DROITS SPÉCIFIQUES ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS AYEZ D'AUTRES DROITS,
DIFFÉRENTS SELON L'ÉTAT OU LA JURIDICTION.
TOUT LITIGE ÉMERGEANT OU LIÉ À CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE SERA ADJUDIQUÉ PAR LES TRIBUNAUX SUIVANTS ET RÉGI PAR
LES LOIS SUIVANTES : AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, AU CANADA, EN AMÉRIQUE DU NORD ET EN AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LE TRIBUNAL SERA
CELUI DE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIE, ÉTATS-UNIS ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L'ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. DANS LA
RÉGION ASIE-PACIFIQUE (À L'EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE), LE TRIBUNAL SERA CELUI DE SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI
Copyright © 2011, Intel Corporation. Tous droits réservés.
0511/Merci de recycler
APPLICABLE CELLE DE SINGAPOUR. POUR L'EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA COMPÉTENCE TERRITORIALE EST CELLE DE
LONDRES ET LE DROIT APPLICABLE EST CELUI DE L'ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES.
EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE
LIMITÉE (À L'EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION TRADUITE EN CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), C'EST LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE QUI
PRÉVAUDRA.
Intel® PRO/100
LAN+Modem56 CardBus
Adapter
User's Guide
How to Use This Manual
This Users Guide contains installation and configuration information for
Microsoft Windows* 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT*, and general
diagnostics and troubleshooting information.
Additional Information
For information on IBM OS/2*, 32-bit ODI* drivers, and Windows 3.x,
supplementary information on Windows 95, and modem command
reference information, see the text file README.TXT on the Intel CDROM.
Visit the Intel support website at support.intel.com for software updates
and supplementary technical information.
See Appendix A for worldwide access to Intel Customer Support.
Copyright © 1998 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, Oregon 97124-6497
Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this guide. Nor does
Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein.
* Other product and corporate names may be trademarks of other companies and are
used only for explanation and to the owners’ benefit, without intent to infringe.
First edition June 1998 717438-001
Contents
Hardware Installation........................................ 1-1
Windows 95 and 98 Installation........................ 2-1
Plug and Play Installation ......................................................... 2-1
Installing under Windows 95 and 98 ........................................ 2-1
Windows 95 and 98 Driver Parameters Reference .................. 2-2
Troubleshooting Modem Installation ........................................ 2-4
Windows NT Installation ................................... 3-1
Installing under NT 4.0 .............................................................. 3-1
Windows NT Driver Parameters ............................................... 3-3
Utilities, Diagnostics, and Troubleshooting ....... 4-1
Making a Floppy Disk ............................................................... 4-1
LAN Diagnostics ....................................................................... 4-2
Troubleshooting Checklist ........................................................ 4-2
Keyword Reference (All Drivers) .............................................. 4-3
Appendix A .......................................................A-1
A. Customer Support ................................................................ A-2
B. Specifications ....................................................................... A-3
C. Lifetime Limited Warranty .................................................... A-5
D. Regulatory Agency Notices .................................................. A-6
E. Software License Agreement ............................................... A-8
Note: Windows 3.x, IBM OS/2, 32-bit ODI
Installation and troubleshooting information for the Windows 3.x,
OS/2, and 32-bit ODI see the README.TXT file on the Intel CDROM.
Modem command reference information can be found in the
Windows Help file HELPDOCS.HLP on the Intel CD-ROM.
iv Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
CHAPTER 1
Hardware Installation
The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter supports both 10 Mbps and
100Mbps Ethernet networks and modem speeds up to 56Kbps for highperformance
connectivity in any environment. It plugs into your
computers Type II PC Card slot to connect to an Ethernet LAN and to
the telephone network.
Installation Overview
Follow the instructions in this chapter to install the PRO/100
LAN+Modem56 adapter hardware and network and modem cabling.
Then proceed to the software installation chapter for your operating
system environment, as follows:
Chapter 2. Windows 95 and 98 Installation
Chapter 3. Windows NT Installation
Chapter 4. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and troubleshooting information for the Windows 3.x,
OS/2, and 32-bit ODI see the README.TXT file on the Intel CDROM.
Modem command reference information can be found in the
Windows Help file HELPDOCS.HLP on the Intel CD-ROM.
The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter provides access to both 10Mbps
and 100Mbps networks with a single adapter cable, and auto-negotiates
10Mbps or 100Mbps network speed.
Category 5 (data grade) unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cabling is
required for 100Mbps or Category 3 or 5 for 10Mbps.
1-2 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
Power-Saving Modes
The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter includes battery saving technology
for maximum battery life on the road. When the LAN cable is detached,
the adapter senses the change and enters low-power mode. Normal power
is restored when the cable is reattached.
Before Installing Hardware
Check Package Contents:
Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus adapter
Ethernet adapter cable with a 16-pin PC Card connector at one end
and a female RJ-45 connector at the other
Modem cable with a 26-pin PC Card connector at one end and a
female RJ-11 modular telephone connector at the other
RJ-11 modular telephone cable
Software, User's Guide and online documentation on CD-ROM
Quick Installation booklet
Please fill out the Product Registration Card and mail or fax it
immediately to the Intel office indicated on the card.
Verify Other Required Equipment
To install the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter, you need the following:
1 A mobile PC with a CardBus slot.
2 A local area network supporting 10 or 100Mbps Ethernet and a
network operating system supported by the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56
adapter.
Since the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter automatically detects
the speed of the network to which it is connected, it may be safely
connected to either a 100Base-TX or 10Base-T network, as specified
in items 3 and 4 below.
3 For connection to a 100Base-TX 100Mbps Ethernet network, a
Category 5 (data grade) unshielded twisted pair (UTP) network cable
Hardware Installation 1-3
terminating in a male RJ-45 connector and connected to a 100Mbps
hub or switch.
4 For connection to a 10Base-T twisted pair Ethernet network, a
network cable terminating in a male RJ-45 connector and connected to
a 10Mbps hub or switch.
5 For modem operations: an analog telephone line, RJ-11 modular
telephone cable (supplied), and if needed, an RJ-11 adapter for the local
telephone system. Communications software is also required for
modem and fax operations.
Do not connect to a digital telephone line or digital PABX system.
In case of inadvertent connection to a digital line, special circuitry
protects your modem.
Determine System Requirements
During installation of the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter hardware, d
your operating system software should be loaded. If configured to do so,
your system will detect the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter. For details
on how to install driver software, see the chapter for your operating
system environment.
The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter hardware is compatible with
Types II and III PC Card slots that support CardBus technology.
Installation and removal procedures may vary on different
computers.
1-4 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
Installing the Hardware
Insert the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter
1 Grasp the CardBus adapter by the edges with the Intel label facing
upward and the wide connector next to the CardBus slot.
2 Insert the card into a CardBus slot and push it in until firmly seated.
The CardBus adapter can only be used in CardBus-compliant PC
Card slots.
Intel® PRO/100
Mobile Adapter
10/100
LAN
+
56K
Modem
CardBus
Inserting the CardBus into the Computer
Hardware Installation 1-5
Connecting the LAN Adapter Cable to the Card
Attach the 16-pin connector at the end of the adapter cable to the
matching receptacle on the left side of the PRO/100
LAN+Modem56 adapter. Press the connector gently into the
receptacle on the card until its firmly in place. Do not force the
connection.
Intel® PRO/100
Mobile Adapter
10/100
LAN
+
56K
Modem
CardBus
Connecting the LAN Adapter Cable to the CardBus Adapter
Disconnecting Adapter Cable from the Card
Grasp the small connector with the thumb and forefinger and gently
pull it free of the card.
Connecting the Network Cable to the LAN Adapter
Cable
Plug the network cable into the female RJ-45 connector, as shown
in the figure.
Connecting to the Network Cable to LAN Adapter Cable
LINK INTEGRITY LED
ORANGE - 100Mbps
GREEN - 10Mbps
TRANSMISSION
ACTIVITY LED
1-6 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
Connecting the Modem Cable to the Adapter
Attach the 26-pin connector at the end of the Intel modem cable to
the matching receptacle on the right side of the PRO/100
LAN+Modem56 adapter. Press the connector gently into the
receptacle on the card until its firmly in place. Do not force the
connection.
Intel® PRO/100
Mobile Adapter
10/100
LAN
+
56K
Modem
CardBus
Attaching the Modem Cable to the CardBus Adapter
Disconnecting Modem Cable from the Adapter
Grasp the small connector with the thumb and forefinger and gently
pull it free of the card.
Connecting the Modem Cable to the Telephone Line
Plug one end of the RJ-11 modular telephone cable into the RJ-11
receptacle on the modem cable, and the other end into an analog
(single-line) RJ-11 telephone wall jack.
Connecting the Telephone Cable to the Modem Cable
The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter will not work with digital
telephone lines or digital PBX systems. Special circuitry protects
your modem against damage from inadvertent connection to a
digital line.
Hardware Installation 1-7
MODEM CABLE
TELEPHONE
CABLE
CARRIER
DETECT
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
1-8 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
CHAPTER 2
Windows 95 and 98 Installation
Plug and Play Installation
Plug and play installation of the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter is
supported under Windows 95 OSR2 (version 950b or later) and Windows
98. Installation with these versions of Windows is described in this
chapter.
If you are using an earlier version of Windows 95 (versions 950 or
950a), see the README.TXT file on the Intel CD-ROM for
installation information.
Drivers Available
The following drivers for Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 are
supplied with the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter:
NDIS3 driver (M32A.SYS)
NDIS4 driver (M32A4.SYS)
The NDIS3 driver M32A.SYS is installed by default using the procedures
in this chapter. For NDIS4 instructions, see the README.TXT file on
the Intel CD-ROM.
Software Installation for Windows 95 OSR2
Note: if your laptop computer does not have a CDROM
drive, see "Making a Floppy Disk,"in Chapter 4.
1 With Windows running, insert the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter
into the CardBus slot and connect cables as shown above.
2 Windows detects a PCI Ethernet controller and displays the Update
Device Driver Wizard. In this procedure, the LAN driver will be
installed first and then the modem driver. Insert the Intel CD-ROM
2-2 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
and click Next to start the procedure. (If the New Hardware Found
window does NOT appear, proceed to step 8.)
3 Windows confirms the device name. Click Finish. This installs the
LAN driver. Windows may prompt you for the location of Windows
networking files. Usually these are located in
C:\windows\options\cabs or on your Windows 95 installation disk. If
prompted for the M32A.SYS file, change the path back to your Intel
CD-ROM. If prompted to restart, click No.
4 Windows detects the modem portion of the adapter and repeats the
process above for the modem component. If prompted for other files,
try changing the path to the Intel CD-ROM.
Note: Windows may display a message indicating some VXD
files are out of date. To determine if this affects operation of
your computer, restart and check the modem. If it will not
function, see the README.TXT file for detailed information.
5 For most networks, you will need to configure properties for your
protocols, computer identification, and preferred servers. Contact
your network administrator for details if you need assistance.
6 Restart the computer for the configuration to take effect.
7 When the computer restarts, the Country Identifier utility runs.
Specify your location and Save or Exit.
8 If the New Hardware Found window does NOT appear, you may
need to enable CardBus support in your computer BIOS. See your
computer's manual for information or check their website.
Software Installation for Windows 98
Note: if your laptop computer does not have a CDROM
drive, see "Making a Floppy Disk" in Chapter 4.
1 With Windows running, insert the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter
into the CardBus slot and connect cables as shown above.
2 Windows detects a PCI Ethernet Controller and displays the Add New
Hardware Wizard. Click Next to continue. In this procedure, the LAN
driver will be installed first and then the modem driver. (If the New
Hardware Found window does NOT appear, proceed to step 13.)
3 On the next screen, Windows prompts for a driver search. Choose
"Search for the best driver (Recommended)" and click Next.
Windows 95 and 98 Installation 2-3
4 Insert the Intel CD-ROM or floppy disk and click Next to continue.
If necessary, specify the path to your CD-ROM or floppy drive and
click Next.
5 Windows confirms the device name and location of the LAN driver
(NETM32A.INF). Click Next to continue. Windows may prompt you
for the location of Windows networking files. Usually these are
located in C:\windows\options\cabs or on your Windows 98
installation disk.
6 A message confirming successful LAN driver installation appears.
Click Finish.
7 Do not restart your computer yet. When prompted to do so, click No.
8 Windows detects the modem portion of the adapter and repeats the
process above for the modem (driver name is MDMM32A.INF). At
the end of this process, a small dialog appears reminding you to
restart. Click OK to close.
9 The Country Identifier utility also runs at this time. Specify your
location and click Exit or Save.
10 If the New Hardware Found wizard is present, click Finish.
11 For most networks, you will need to configure properties for your
protocols, computer identification, and preferred servers. Contact
your network administrator for details if you need assistance.
12 Restart the computer to complete installation.
13 If the New Hardware Found window does NOT appear, you may
need to enable CardBus support in your mobile computer's BIOS. See
your computer's manual for information or check their web site.
2-4 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
Windows 95 and 98 Driver Parameters Reference
M32A.SYS (NDIS3) and M32AN4.SYS (NDIS4) Driver
Settings
M32A.SYS is an NDIS3 driver. M32A4.SYS is an NDIS4 driver. Both
conform to the Microsoft Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS).
Required files for using M32A.SYS with Windows 95 and 98 include:
NETM32A.INF Installation file for Windows 95 and 98
M32A.SYS NDIS3 driver for Windows 95 and 98
There are user-configurable parameters to the M32A.SYS and M32A4.SYS
drivers which can be modified using the Network Control Panel built into
Windows 95 and 98. This applet queries the user for parameter selections
and sets the corresponding parameters in the registry. User-configurable
parameters are as follows (for descriptions see Chapter 4):
Parameter Valid Values Reg. Value
Adapter LEDs OFF 0
ON 1
Address Mode IO IO
MEMORY MEMORY
Cable Detect OFF 0
ON 1
Early Receive OFF 0
ON 1
Early Transmit OFF 0
ON 1
Line Mode AutoDetect 0
Half-Duplex 1
Full-Duplex 2
Line Speed AutoDetect 0
10 Mbps 1
100 Mbps 2
Link Integrity OFF 0
ON 1
Windows 95 and 98 Installation 2-5
Network Address See Network Administrators note below.
Receive Buffer Size 0-100 same
Transmit Buffer Size 0-100 same
For Network Administrators Only. The network node address can be
modified by specifying a value for Network Address such as
00A0C9112233. If the user does NOT specify a Network Address, then
the M32A.SYS driver uses the network node address contained in the
PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter Card Information Structure.
Troubleshooting Modem Installation
Review this section if any of the following problems occur:
Modem initialization errors occur when attempting to dial-out using
a communications application.
Connection fails or other problems occur.
It may be necessary to define a modem type within your communications
application. If the Intel modem is not listed, choose a Generic Hayes
compatible device.
If your computer is equipped with an infrared communications port, you
may need to disable this port. These ports often use COM port resources
required for other communications devices. Disable the infrared port both
in the computers CMOS or BIOS setup program and the Windows 95
Device Manager, as follows:
1 Some computers use a hardware setup utility to configure the infrared
port in the BIOS. See your computer documentation.
2 To disable the infrared communications port in Windows 95, go to
Device Manager tab under System in the Control Panel.
3 Double-click the Ports (COM & LPT) entry and the IR Serial Port
entry. Check the Disable in this Hardware Profile option to disable the
device.
2-6 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
4 You may also need to comment out any "device=" lines containing
TRANXIT in the SYSTEM.INI file. Use a semicolin at the beginning
of the line to comment out the line.
Use the Modem Diagnostics Tool to verify the computer-to-modem
interface.
1 In the Modems option in Control Panel, click Diagnostics.
2 In Diagnostics properties, highlight the COM port associated with the
Intel modem and click the More Info button. This causes Windows 95
and 98 to send commands to and read responses from the modem and
display information about the modem and its COM port. The Port
Information box should display the following information:
The IRQ and I/O address of the modems COM port. These
should match the physical configuration of the port or modem
adapter.
Modem responses to various AT commands. The Intel modem
may return ERROR for some AT commands that are not
supported. This does not indicate a failure.
3 The Record a Log File option in the Modems option can also help
identify modem problems by recording modem commands and
responses in a MODEMLOG.TXT file. To create the
MODEMLOG.TXT file, go to Control Panel, Modems, Properties,
Connection, Advanced. In the Advanced Connection Settings window,
place a check mark in the Record a log file option box. A
MODEMLOG.TXT file will be created in the C:\WINDOWS
directory the next time the modem is used.
CHAPTER 3
Windows NT Installation
The PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter supports manual installation
under Microsoft Windows NT 4.0. Plug and Play installation and hot
swapping of CardBus adapters are not directly supported by Windows NT.
When the CardBus Adapter is installed, the other PC Card slot is available
for use by another PC Card.
Drivers Available
The following drivers for Windows NT can be found on the Intel CDROM:
OEMSETNT - Installation file
M32A.SYS - NDIS3 driver
M32A4.SYS - NDIS4 driver
M32MENT4.SYS - modem enabler
For the latest information on CardBus support in Windows NT,
review the README.TXT file on the Intel CD-ROM or visit the
Intel support web site at support.intel.com.
Software Installation for Windows NT
1 Before powering-up your mobile computer, insert the PRO/100
LAN+Modem56 adapter into the CardBus slot, as shown on page 1.
2 With the adapter in the CardBus slot, power-up the computer, click
Start, click Settings, and select the Control Panel. The Control Panel
opens.
3 Double-click the Network icon. The Network Settings window opens.
4 Click the Adapters tab. The Network Adapters window opens.
5 Click Add. The Select Network Adapter window opens.
3-2 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
6 Click Have Disk, insert the Intel CD-ROM, and specify the correct
path for the CD.
7 Click OK. The Select OEM Option window opens, showing the
PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter.
8 Click OK. The Windows NT Setup window briefly displays.
9 The Intel PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 Settings window opens,
displaying the default settings.
Note: In most circumstances, the default settings will properly
operate the adapter. However, some computers may require
changes to the defaults.
10 Click OK. The Network Settings window redisplays.
11 Click Close. Complete any relevant dialog boxes that appear such as
TCP/IP settings. Contact your Network Administrator for help if
necessary.
12 When the Network Settings Change window opens, click Yes to
restart the computer.
Modem Setup
13 After the computer has been restarted, select Modems from the
Control Panel.
14 At the Install New Modem screen make sure that the Dont detect my
modem; I will select it from a list checkbox is NOT checked. Click Next.
NT will query the COM ports looking for the Intel modem. Once the
Intel modem is found, click Next. If a Standard Modem is found, click
Change. On the next screen, click Have disk. Type in the path to your
CD-ROM drive and click OK.
15 The Country Identifier utility automatically starts. Make the appropriate
country selection (United States or Canada is the default).
16 At the Install New Modem screen click Finish.
17 At the Modems Properties screen click Dialing Properties to set up
dialing properties (not necessary if a modem had been previously
installed). Click Close.
Windows NT Installation 3-3
Windows NT Driver Parameters
M32A.SYS and M32A4.SYS driver parameters can be modified using the
Windows NT Network Control Panel. This applet uses the
OEMSETNT.INF file to set the corresponding parameters in the registry.
For definitions of the keywords listed, see Keyword Reference in
Chapter 4. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting.
Parameter Valid Values Registry Value
Cable Detect OFF 0
ON 1
Early Receive OFF 0
ON 1
Early Transmit OFF 0
ON 1
Interrupt 3 - 15 same
Interrupt Style AutoDetect 0
PCI IRQ 1
ISA IRQ 2
I/O Port 0x1000-0xF800 same
LEDs Enabled OFF 0
ON 1
Line Mode AutoDetect 0
Half-Duplex 1
Full-Duplex 2
Line Speed AutoDetect 0
10 Mbps 1
100 Mbps 2
LinkIntegrity OFF 0
ON 1
Memory Address 0xC0000-B000C000 same
Memory Mode OFF 0
ON 1
3-4 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
PCCard Socket AutoDetect 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
Rx Buffer Size 0-100 same
Tx Buffer Size 0-100 same
For Network Administrators Only. To modify the network node
address manually, select Run, type regedit and press Return. Select
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE, System, CurrentControlSet, Services,
M32A. Click the Edit menu, select New, String Value. Rename the new
value NetworkAddress (no spaces, case sensitive), press Enter. Doubleclick
NetworkAddress and enter the 12 digit address (no spaces) in the
data field and click OK.
CHAPTER 4
Utilities, Diagnostics, and Troubleshooting
This chapter contains supplementary diagnostics and troubleshooting
information for the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter. For information
specific to your operating environment, see the appropriate installation
chapter. This supplementary information is intended for users or network
administrators who are already familiar with the PRO/100
LAN+Modem56 adapter and its user documentation, and who have run
into difficulties after having completed the appropriate installation
and troubleshooting procedures for their operating environment.
For additional troubleshooting information, see the Windows Help
file HELPDOCS.HLP on the Intel CD-ROM.
Additional Sources of Information
Consult your computer and network documentation as needed. For the
latest technical notes on the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter, see the
README.TXT file on the Intel CD-ROM, or visit the Intel World Wide
Web support site at support.intel.com.
See Appendix A in this Users Guide for Intel support services access
information.
Making a Floppy Disk
If your laptop computer does not have a CD-ROM drive, you may create
a floppy install disk from the CD-ROM on another computer. Follow
these steps:
1 Insert the Intel CD-ROM disk into the CD-ROM drive.
2 Insert a blank, formatted floppy disk into the floppy drive.
3 Click Start and then click Run.
4-2 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
4 In the window that appears, type:
d:\makedisk d: a: (where d: is your CD drive and a: is your floppy.)
5 Click OK to create the floppy disk. An MS-DOS window opens and
the program executes, making the floppy.
LAN Diagnostics
If you have trouble installing or setting up the LAN portion of the PRO/
100 adapter, try running the LAN diagnostics utility. To run this utility,
insert the Intel CD-ROM, click Start, then Run, and type:
M32ADIAG.EXE
and click OK. This starts the diagnostics utility. The utility can perform
several self-tests and provide useful data about the network connection.
For troubleshooting information, click the Support tab and then click the
Troubleshoot button.
Executing the Windows 95, 98, and NT Diagnostic
Program
1 Verify that the PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 adapter has been installed
and configured to work in your version of Windows.
2 Insert the Intel CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive.
3 Select Start, Run, X:\M32ADIAG.EXW, where X is the drive letter for
your CD-ROM. If you don't have a CD-ROM drive, see the section
above on Making a Floppy Disk.
4 Navigate through the diagnostic program by clicking the appropriate
tab. When finished, click OK to exit.
Troubleshooting Checklist
Review the README.TXT file on the Intel CD-ROM.
Be sure you have the current drivers for your adapter. Check the
Intel support web site at support.intel.com.
When loading drivers or running the test utility, keep the LAN
adapter cable attached to the CardBus adapter.
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 4-3
If trying to connect to a Novell server, try chaniging the frame type
of the IPX/SPX protocol from "Auto" to the specific frame type
used by the server.
In a twisted pair environment, try plugging directly into the hub or
concentrator.
Plug in to a known working network connection.
Try using the adapter on a different computer.
Try another adapter if available.
If your computer has multiple PC Card sockets, move the adapter to
another socket.
If you have more than one PC Card device in your computer,
remove the non-Intel PC Card devices.
Make sure that the interrupt, memory address, and I/O address for
the Intel device do not conflict with other installed hardware (such as
sound cards, CD-ROM drives and PEN devices). However, conflicts
with the CardBus controllers and/or IRQ handler for PCI steering
are normal and do not impact operation of the adapter
Try using different interrupt locations (i.e., 5, 10, 11).
Try using different port addresses (i.e., 280, 290, 310, 320).
Keyword Reference (All Drivers)
ADAPTER LEDS see NOLED.
ADDRESS MODE when set to IO disables requests for memory-mapped
mode on systems that only support an I/O-driven card. The MEMORY
setting provides increased performance on computers that allow simultaneous
availability of memory and I/O resources.
CABLE DETECT turns the automatic cable detect feature on or off.
When on, cable detect senses when there is no LAN cable attached to the
card, and puts the adapter into a low-power mode. Normal power is
restored when the cable is reattached.
DIRECT ENABLE (32-bit NDIS Drivers) forces the method used by
the driver to determine if an Intel CardBus adapter is present. Valid
parameters are AutoDetect, Off, and On. AutoDetect allows the driver to
4-4 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
determine if the CardBus bridge has already been set up by another
enabler such as Socket and Card Services. If so, driver will use the current
configuration. On forces the driver to enable the CardBus bridge without
checking its current state.
EARLY RECEIVE see NOEARLYRX.
EARLY TRANSMIT see NOEARLYTX.
INT, INTERRUPT see IRQ.
INTERRUPT STYLE (For 32-bit NDIS Drivers only) forces the
driver to use ISA IRQ routing or PCI IRQ routing. Some CardBus bridges
have the capability of supporting both PCI and ISA style IRQ routing.
Valid parameters are AutoDetect, PCI-IRQ, and ISA-IRQ.
IOADDRESS, IOBASEADDRESS specifies the base I/O address of
the Intel adapter I/O ports, in hexadecimal notation. The Intel CardBus
adapter requires 128 contiguous I/O addresses if run in I/O mode. If
using memory-mapped I/O mode, no I/O ports are necessary. If not
used, driver will detect an I/O port automatically.
I/O PORT see IOADDRESS
IRQ specifies a hardware interrupt for the adapter. If PCI interrupts are
used on the CardBus bridge, this parameter is ignored (unless the ISAIRQ
keyword is used as an override). If this parameter is not specified the
driver will detect an IRQ automatically.
ISAIRQ use this keyword to force ISA IRQ routing. Some CardBus
bridges have the capability of supporting both PCI and ISA style IRQ
routing. The driver automatically determines the best choice for this
option unless this keyword is used as an override.
LEDS ENABLED see NOLED.
LINE MODE (For 32-bit NDIS Drivers) selects either half-duplex or
full-duplex mode for the network. Valid parameters are AutoDetect, Half
Duplex, and Full-Duplex. Selecting full-duplex enables the PRO/100
LAN+Modem56 adapter to send and receive data simultaneously when
connected to a full-duplex hub.
LINE SPEED (For 32-bit NDIS Drivers) forces operation to 10 or
100 Mbps. Valid parameters are AutoDetect, 10 Mbps, and 100 Mbps.
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 4-5
LINK INTEGRITY, LINK DISABLE disables link integrity for nonIEEE
10BASE-T networks such as StarLAN 10. Without this keyword in
the driver command line, the driver defaults to link integrity ENABLED.
MEM, MEMORY, MEMORY ADDRESS specifies the host PC
memory location for the Intel adapter in hexadecimal notation, when
MODE MEMORY (memory-mapped I/O) is being used (see MODE).
The memory block occupies 4 Kbytes of host memory.
MODE, MEMORY MODE when set to IO (Memory Mode OFF)
disables request for memory-mapped mode on systems that only support
an I/O driven card. The MEMORY setting provides increased performance
on computers that allow simultaneous availability of memory and
I/O resources.
NETWORK ADDRESS allows user to override adapters unique
network node address by specifying a different node address.
NODEADDRESS see NETWORKADDRESS.
NOEARLYRX disables Advanced Look-ahead Pipelining features of the
adapter. This keyword may be used to troubleshoot systems that have
inexplicable network problems. Using this keyword may negatively impact
performance.
NOEARLYTX disables early transmit capability of the Adapter. This
keyword may be used to troubleshoot systems with inexplicable network
problems. Keyword could negatively impact performance.
NOLED turns off LED indicators to conserve power.
PCCARD SOCKET (32-bit NDIS drivers) see SOCKET.
PCIIRQ forces the driver to use PCI IRQ routing. Some CardBus bridges
have the capability of supporting both PCI and ISA style IRQ routing.
The driver automatically determines the best choice for this option unless
this keyword is used as an override.
RECEIVE BUFFER SIZE (RXBUFFERSIZE) sets size of the
adapter receive packet buffer. This is a number in decimal in the range 1 -
30 for 16-bit drivers and 1 - 100 for the 32-bit ODI driver. Each packet
adds approximately 1520 bytes to the resident size of the driver.
4-6 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
SOCKET (For 32-bit NDIS3 Driver M32A.SYS) identifies the number
of the host computers PC slot or socket into which the Intel CardBus
adapter is inserted. Valid parameters are AutoDetect, 1, 2, 3, and 4. If a
socket number is specified, only the specified socket is checked for the
Intel adapter. Under AutoDetect, the driver will automatically check all
slots for the Intel CardBus adapter.
TRANSMIT BUFFERS SIZE (TXBUFFERSIZE) sets the size of
the adapter transmit packet buffer. This is the number of transmit packets
in decimal in the range 1 - 10 for 16-bit drivers and 1 - 100 for the 32-bit
ODI driver. Each packet adds approximately 1520 bytes to the resident
size of the driver.
Appendix A
- Intel Automated Customer Support
- Specifications
- Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty
- Regulatory Notices
- Software License Agreement
A-2 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
Intel Automated Customer Support
You can reach Intel’s automated support services 24 hours a day, every day at
no charge. The services contain the most up-to-date information about Intel
products. You can access installation instructions, troubleshooting information,
and general product information.
Readme files on Your Product Disk
Review the topics in the README.TXT file on the CD-ROM.
Web and Internet Sites
Support: http://support.intel.com
Network Products: http://www.intel.com/network
Corporate: http://www.intel.com
FTP Host: download.intel.com
FTP Directory: /support/etherexpress/
Customer Support Technicians
US and Canada: 1-916-377-7000 (7:00 - 17:00 M-F Pacific Time)
Worldwide access: Intel has technical support centers worldwide. Many of
the centers are staffed by technicians who speak the local languages. For a
list of all Intel support centers, the telephone numbers, and the times they are
open, download document 9089 from one of the automated services.
Appendix A-3
Specifications
General Specifications
Model MBLA3256
Cable: 100Base-TX unshielded twisted pair for use on Category 5 (data
grade) cabling; 10Base-T unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
Connector: RJ-45
Operating Distance: 328 ft (100 m)
Ethernet specifications
Ethernet IEEE 802.3 for 10 Mbps, 802.3u for 100 Mbps
Type II CardBus PC Card
10/100 Mbps full-duplex
Size: 3.37 in (86 mm) x 2.13 in (54.0 mm) x 0.20 in (5.0 mm)
excluding adapter cable and network connection
Weight: 0.85 oz (24 g)
Power Requirements:
10Base-T 3.3V DC, 110 mA typical
100Base-TX 3.3V DC, 160 mA typical
Modem 3.3V DC, 240 mA typical (connected)
3.3V DC, 40 mA typical (sleep mode)
100Base-T+Modem 3.3V DC, 280 mA typical
100Base-TX+Modem 3.3V DC, 340 mA typical
Power Management:
Supports ACPI and CardBus Power Management Specification
Temperature Range:
Operating: 32°F to 131°F (0°C to 55°C)
Storage: -4°F to 149°F (-20°C to 65°C)
Humidity: 95% max. noncondensing
LEDs: Link integrity, transmission activity
Certification: FCC Part 15, Class B, CE Mark (EN 55022, Class B,
EN50082)
A-4 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
Modem Specifications
Data modulation: K56flex*/V.90 up to 56000 bps; V.34 from 33,600
down to 2400 bps; V.32terbo at 19200 and 16800
bps; V.32bis at 14400, 12000, 9600, and 7200 bps,
uncoded at 4800 bps; V.32 at 9600 bps, uncoded at
4800 bps; V.23 at 1200/75 and 75/1200 bps;
V.22bis at 2400 bps; V.22 at 1200 bps; Bell 212A at
1200 bps
Fax modulation: V.17 at 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, and 4800 bps;
V.29 at 9600, 7200, and 4800 bps; V.27ter at 4800
and 2400 bps
Fax support: Group 3, EIA/TIA Class 1
Error control: V.42 Error Control, MNP Levels 2-4 Error
Detection
Data compression: V.42bis (4:1) or MNP Level 5 (2:1)
Diagnostics: Power-up self tests of program RAM, data RAM,
and nonvolatile memory.
Nonvolatile RAM: 1 user definable profile; 2 thirty-six digit telephone
numbers; LAN Adapter ID and serial number
Command set: Hayes and Microcom compatible AT commands
Data interface: PCMCIA Release 2.1 compliant, 68-pin CardBus
connector
Analog interface: RJ-11C modular telephone connector
DTE speeds: 1200, 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 14400, 19200, 37400,
57600, and 115200 bps
Appendix A-5
Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty
Intel warrants to the original owner that the adapter product delivered in this package will be free from defects in
material and workmanship. This warranty does not cover the adapter product if it is damaged in the process of
being installed or improperly used.
THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OF NONINFRINGEMENT OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARISING
OUT OF ANY PROPOSAL, SPECIFICATION, OR SAMPLE.
This warranty does not cover replacement of adapter products damaged by abuse, accident, misuse, neglect,
alteration, repair, disaster, improper installation, or improper testing. If the adapter product is found to be defective,
Intel, at its option, will replace or repair the hardware product at no charge except as set forth below, or refund your
purchase price provided that you deliver the adapter product along with a Return Material Authorization (RMA)
number (see below), along with proof of purchase (if not registered), either to the dealer from whom you purchased
it or to Intel with an explanation of any deficiency. If you ship the adapter product, you must assume the risk of
damage or loss in transit. You must use the original container (or the equivalent) and pay the shipping charge.
Intel may replace or repair the adapter product with either new or reconditioned parts, and any adapter product, or
part thereof replaced by Intel becomes Intel’s property. Repaired or replaced adapter products will be returned to
you at the same revision level as received or higher, at Intel’s option. Intel reserves the right to replace
discontinued adapter products with an equivalent current generation adapter product.
Returning a defective product
From North America:
Before returning any adapter product, contact Intel Customer Support and obtain a Return Material Authorization
(RMA) number by calling +1 916-377-7000.
If the Customer Support Group verifies that the adapter product is defective, they will have the RMA department
issue you an RMA number to place on the outer package of the adapter product. Intel cannot accept any product
without an RMA number on the package.
All other locations:
Return the adapter product to the place of purchase for a refund or replacement.
Intel Adapter Money-back Guarantee (North America Only)
Intel wants you to be completely satisfied with the Intel adapter product that you have purchased. Any time within
ninety (90) days of purchase, you may return your Intel adapter to the original place of purchase for a full refund of
the purchase price from your dealer. Resellers and distributors, respectively, accepting returns and refunding money
back to their customers may return Intel adapters to their original place of purchase. Intel guarantees that it will
accept returns under this policy and refund the original purchase price to customers purchasing directly from Intel.
Limitation of Liability and Remedies
INTEL’S SOLE LIABILITY HEREUNDER SHALL BE LIMITED TO DIRECT, OBJECTIVELY
MEASURABLE DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT
OR SPECULATIVE DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING,
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND SPECIAL DAMAGES) INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, REPROCUREMENT COSTS, LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTIONS, LOSS OF GOODWILL, AND LOSS OF PROFITS, WHETHER ANY SUCH DAMAGES
ARISE OUT OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE, TORT, OR UNDER ANY WARRANTY, IRRESPECTIVE OF
WHETHER INTEL HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, INTEL’S TOTAL LIABILITY FOR ALL CLAIMS UNDER THIS
AGREEMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THESE LIMITATIONS ON
POTENTIAL LIABILITIES WERE AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT IN SETTING THE PRODUCT PRICE. INTEL
NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANYONE TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITIES.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above
limitations may not apply to you.
A-6 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
Critical Control Applications: Intel specifically disclaims liability for use of the adapter product in
critical control applications (including, for example only, safety or health care control systems, nuclear energy
control systems, or air or ground traffic control systems) by Licensee or Sublicensees, and such use is entirely at
the user’s risk. Licensee agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold Intel harmless from and against any and all claims
arising out of use of the adapter product in such applications by Licensee or Sublicensees.
Software: Software provided with the adapter product is not covered under the hardware warranty described
above. See the applicable software license agreement which shipped with the adapter product for details on any
software warranty.
FCC Compliance Statement
FCC Rules and Regulations - Part 15
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. Installed correctly, it probably will not
interfere with radio or TV reception. However, we do not guarantee the absence of interference.
This product generates and uses energy of about the same frequency as radio and TV broadcasts.
Installed incorrectly, it may interfere with reception of radio and TV broadcasts.
If you suspect this product is causing interference, turn your computer on and off while the radio or
TV is showing interference. If the interference disappears when you turn the computer off and
reappears when you turn the computer on, something in the computer is causing interference.
To reduce interference, try these suggestions:
• Change the direction of the radio or TV antenna.
• Move the computer, radio or TV. For example, if the computer is to the right of the TV,
move it to the left of the TV. Or move them farther apart.
• Plug the computer into a different electrical outlet than the radio or TV.
• Ensure that all expansion slots (on the back or side of the computer) are covered. Also
ensure that all metal retaining brackets are tightly attached to the computer.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
If the device is changed or modified without permission from Intel, the user may void his or her
authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Rules and Regulations - Part 68
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the back of the Intel® PRO/100
LAN+Modem56 CardBus adapter is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC
Registration Number and Ringer Equivalency Number (REN) for this equipment. You must, upon
request, provide this information to your telephone company.
Appendix A-7
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and
still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most but not all areas, the
sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your
local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area.
If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may
discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But if advance
notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your right to
file a complaint with the FCC.
Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that
could affect the proper functioning of your equipment. If they do, you will be notified in advance to
give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service.
If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment, please contact Intel Customer Support, at
916-377-7000 for information on obtaining service or repairs. The telephone company may ask that
you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are
sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning.
There are no user serviceable parts contained in this equipment.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to
party lines is subject to state tariffs.
Canadian compliance (Industry Canada)
When tested in at least one intended host:
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital
apparatus set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-
003 of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils
numériques de Class B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”,
NMB-003 édictée par le Ministre Canadien des Communications.
NOTICE: The Industry Canada (IC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that
the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The
department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an
acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by a user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telephone communications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power
utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This
precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
A-8 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an
indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The
termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement
that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
REN: See back of unit.
Manufacturer declaration
This certifies that Intel PRO/100 Mobile Adapters comply with the EU Directive 89/336/EEC, using
the EMC standards EN55022 (Class B) and EN50082-1. This product also meets or exceeds EN60950
safety requirements.
This product has been tested and verified to meet CISPR 22 Class B requirements.
Intel Corporation
Network Products Division - MS JF3-446
2111 N.E. 25th Ave.
Hillsboro, Oregon 97124
Software License Agreement
BY USING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF
THIS AGREEMENT. DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE UNTIL YOU HAVE CAREFULLY READ
AND AGREED TO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE
TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE
AND ANY ACCOMPANYING ITEMS.
LICENSE: Intel Corporation (“Intel”) grants you the non-exclusive right to use the enclosed
software program (the “Software”). You will not use, copy, modify, rent, sell or transfer the
Software or any portion thereof except as provided in this Agreement.
You may:
1. Install/use the Software on a single computer or on a single local area network (“LAN”) server;
2. Copy the Software solely for backup or archival purposes, including copying the Software into
memory.
RESTRICTIONS:
You Will Not:
1. Sublicense the Software;
2. Reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software;
3. Copy the Software, in whole or in part, except as provided in this Agreement.
TRANSFER: You may transfer the Software to another party if the receiving party agrees to the
terms of this Agreement and you retain no copies of the Software and accompanying
documentation. Transfer of the Software terminates your right to use the Software.
OWNERSHIP AND COPYRIGHT OF SOFTWARE: Title to the Software and all copies thereof
remain with Intel or its vendors. The Software is copyrighted and is protected by United States and
international copyright laws. You will not remove the copyright notice from the Software. You
agree to prevent any unauthorized copying of the Software.
DUAL MEDIA SOFTWARE: If the Software package contains multiple media, you may only use
the disks appropriate for your single-user computer or LAN.
Appendix A-9
WARRANTY: The Software is provided “AS IS.” Intel warrants that the media on which the
Software is furnished will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1)
year from the date of purchase. Upon return of such defective media, Intel’s entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be the replacement of the Software.
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: NEITHER INTEL NOR ITS VENDORS SHALL BE
LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF DATA,
INTERRUPTIONS OF BUSINESS, NOR FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER UNDER THIS AGREEMENT
OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
AUDIT: Intel reserves the right to have audits conducted to verify your compliance with this
Agreement.
TERMINATION OF THIS LICENSE: Intel may terminate this license at any time if you are in
breach of any of its terms and conditions. Upon termination, you will immediately destroy the
Software or return all copies of the Software and documentation to Intel.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS: The Software and documentation were
developed at private expense and are provided with “RESTRICTED RIGHTS.” Use, duplication, or
disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 52.227-14 and DFAR
252.227-7013 et seq. or its successor.
EXPORT LAWS: You agree that the distribution and export/re-export of the Software is in
compliance with the laws, regulations, orders or other restrictions of the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations.
APPLICABLE LAW: This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of California and the
United States, including patent and copyright laws. Any claim arising out of this Agreement will be
brought in Santa Clara County, California.PLEASE REVIEW THE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BELOW. BY OPENING THIS SOFTWARE OR PACKAGE OR OTHERWISE DOWNLOADING
OR COPYING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF
THIS AGREEMENT. DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE UNTIL YOU HAVE CAREFULLY READ
AND AGREED TO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE
TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE.
Year 2000 Statement
An Intel product, when used in accordance with its associated documentation, is “Year 2000
Capable” when, upon installation, it accurately stores, displays, processes, provides, and/or
receives date data from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, including leap
year calculations, provided that all other technology used in combination with said product
properly exchanges date data with it. See http://www.intel.com/support/year2000 for more
information.
A-10 Intel® PRO/100 LAN+Modem56 CardBus Adapter User’s Guide
Guide de configuration
Intel NetportExpress
Serveur d’impression
TM
Copyright © 1997 Intel Corporation. Tous droits réservés.
Première édition, août 1997 679940-001
Intel Corporation
5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway
Hillsboro, Oregon 97124-6497
Intel Corporation n’assume aucune responsabilité quant aux erreurs ou
omissions que pourraient contenir ce guide ni ne s’engage à mettre à jour
son contenu.
*Les autres noms de produit et appellations commerciales sont des marques
commerciales de sociétés tierces et sont utilisés exclusivement à titre
explicatif, au bénéfice de leur détenteur et sans intention d’enfreindre la loi.
A propose de NetportExpressTM PRO et PRO/100
serveurs d’impression
Les serveurs d’impression Intel NetportExpressTM PRO et PRO/100
assurent une performance élevée ainsi qu’une gestion centralisée des
imprimantes installées sur des réseaux à protocoles multiples. Les
serveurs d’impression NetportExpress vous permettent de repérer les
imprimantes où qu’elles se trouvent sur un réseau local (LAN).
Les serveurs d’impression NetportExpress prennent en charge la
plupart des marques et modèles d’imprimantes sur réseaux utilisant les
protocoles IPX/SPX*, NetBEUI, TCP/IP et AppleTalk* Phase II.
PARALLEL 1 PARALLEL 2 SERIAL
POWER BNC RJ-45 TEST
NetportExpress PRO
Activity
Transmit
Receive
PC-3782
Serveur d'impression
NetportExpress
Parallèle
Parallèle
Sèrie
Macintosh* Windows* UNIX* NetWare* OS/2*
Table des matières
Installation du matériel ........................................... 2
Serveurs d’impression PRO/100 PRO externes et internes
Installation du logiciel ............................................ 6
Installation du CD-ROM et configuration
Configuration de NDS de Novell NetWare* .................... 8
Mode serveur d’impression, mode imprimante distante
Configuration de Bindery de Novell NetWare ................. 10
Mode serveur d’impression, mode imprimante distante
Impression réseau dans l’environnement Microsoft .......... 12
Adresse IP sous Windows* 95, Windows NT* et Windows pour Workgroups
Configuration de LAN Manager*/LAN Server.................. 16
Impression à l’aide de netuse
Configuration d’AppleTalk* ...................................... 18
Connectivité des imprimantes
Configuration d’UNIX* ............................................ 19
Adresse IP, proprint, impression avec lpr/lpd, mises à jour du microprogramme à l’aide de tftp
Configuration d’AIX* .............................................. 27
Impression avec lpr/lpd
Gestion du serveur NetportExpressTM ........................... 30
Modification des configurations, mises à jour du microprogramme, paramètres avancés
Dépannage ......................................................... 33
Solutions matériel, logiciel, impression
Limites de la garantie/Notices ................................... 40
Informations sur les produits
Support clientèle .................................................. 42
Numéros des services d’assistance, accès au Web
Index ............................................................... 44
2
PARALLEL 1
PARALLEL 2 SERIAL
PARALLEL PORT
POWER RJ45
Activity
Transmit
Receive
DIAG
NetportExpress PRO/100 TM
SW1 10/100
PC-3773
Poursuivez l’installation du logiciel (voir la page 6). . .
3 Branchez
les câbles
d’alimentation aux
imprimantes ainsi
qu’aux ports du
serveur
d’impression.
4 Appuyez sur le bouton
« diag » pour envoyer une
page d’essai du serveur
d’impression NetportExpress
à l’imprimante. La page
d’essai comprend l’ID de
périphérique et diverses
autres données de
configuration.
2 Branchez le
câble d’alimentation
dans le serveur
d’impression.
1 Branchez le câble réseau au
connecteur RJ-45. Utilisez un câble
Catégorie 5 pour la connexion à un
réseau 100 Mbits/s. Utilisez un câble
Catégorie 3 ou 5 pour la connexion à un Voyant réseau 10 Mbits/s.
d’activité
ID de périphérique et
adresse réseau
(voir au bas)
Serveurs d’impression NetportExpress PRO/100 à port
unique et à 3 ports (Ethernet seulement)
Installation du matériel
Conseils d’installation du serveur d’impression PRO/100
• Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress est prêt lorsque son voyant d’activité est vert
et ne clignote pas. Les deux autres voyants peuvent clignoter, indiquant ainsi une
communication avec le réseau. Si le voyant d’activité est rouge et clignote, consultez la
section Dépannage de ce manuel.
• Le serveur d’impression PRO/100 détecte automatiquement la vitesse du réseau
Ethernet : 10 ou 100 Mbits/s.
• Le serveur d’impression détecte également le type de trames Novell NetWare : 802.2,
802.3, Ethernet II ou SNAP.
AVERTISSEMENT Lorsque vous branchez le câble d’alimentation, utilisez le bloc
d’alimentation fourni avec le PRO/100. Toute autre source d’alimentation pourrait entraîner
un mauvais fonctionnement du serveur PRO/100.
3
PARALLEL 1
PARALLEL 2 SERIAL
POWER BNC RJ-45
Activity
Transmit
Receive
DIAG
NetportExpress PRO TM
DB-9 POWER RJ-45 DIAG
1 2
PC-3774
Conseils d’installation du serveur d’impression PRO externe
• Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress est prêt lorsque son voyant d’activité est vert
et ne clignote pas. Les deux autres voyants peuvent clignoter, indiquant ainsi une
communication avec le réseau. Si le voyant d’activité est rouge et clignote, consultez la
section Dépannage de ce manuel.
• Le serveur PRO détecte le type de trames Novell NetWare : 802.2, 802.3, Ethernet II ou
SNAP.
• La version pour réseau en anneau à jeton détecte automatiquement le débit de données
lorsque les deux interrupteurs sont en position UP (réglage par défaut). (Voir la
page 34 pour la liste des réglages.)
AVERTISSEMENT Lorsque vous branchez le câble d’alimentation, utilisez le bloc
d’alimentation fourni avec le serveur PRO. Toute autre source d’alimentation pourrait
entraîner un mauvais fonctionnement du serveur PRO.
Poursuivez l’installation du logiciel (voir la page 6). . .
3 Branchez les
câbles d’alimentation
aux imprimantes
ainsi qu’aux ports du
serveur
d’impression.
Connecteurs
Ethernet
Interrupteurs
2 Branchez le câble
d’alimentation dans le
serveur d’impression.
1 Branchez le câble réseau (Catégorie 3 ou 5). Le
PRO Ethernet utilise un connecteur BNC ou RJ-45.
Le PRO pour réseau en anneau à jeton utilise un
connecteur RJ-45 ou DB-9.
Voyant
d’activité
ID de périphérique et
adresse réseau
(voir au bas)
Serveurs d’impression NetportExpress PRO externes
(Ethernet et réseau en anneau à jeton)
4 Appuyez sur le
bouton « diag »
pour envoyer une
page d’essai du
serveur
d’impression
NetportExpress à
l’imprimante. La
page d’essai
comprend l’ID de
périphérique et
diverses autres
données de
configuration.
Connecteurs
pour réseau
en anneau à
jeton
4
10Base-T
BNC 10Base-T
PC-3775
Exemples d’insertion, dans les imprimantes, de cartes de serveurs
d’impression NetportExpress PRO. Votre imprimante peut être différente de
celle illustrée. Assurez-vous que le connecteur d’imprimante de la carte est
complètement inséré dans la fente de connecteur de l’imprimante.
Bouton
Diagnostics
Connecteurs
réseau RJ-45
et BNC
Connecteurs réseau
RJ-45 et DB-9
Bouton
Diagnostics
ID de
périphérique
Connecteur
d’imprimante
Carte de Interrupteurs
réseau
en anneau
à jeton
ID de périphérique
Connecteur
d’imprimante
Carte Ethernet
Serveur d’impression NetportExpress PRO interne
(Ethernet et réseau en anneau à jeton)
Installation du matériel
PC-3124 PC-3126
5
• La carte de serveur d’impression PRO interne doit être connectée dans les fentes MIO
de l’imprimante.
• Pour obtenir la liste complète des imprimantes prises en charge, consultez la section
sur le support clientèle automatisé Intel au dos de ce manuel.
• Les imprimantes HP LaserJet* 4Si et 5Si comportent deux fentes MIO. Installez la carte
de serveur d’impression NetportExpress PRO dans la fente inférieure. Pour obtenir les
directives voulues, installez le logiciel Netport Manager sur n’importe quelle station de
travail Windows en réseau et consultez l’aide en ligne ou consultez les documents de
support Intel en ligne.
• La carte pour réseau en anneau à jeton détecte automatiquement les débits de données
lorsque les deux interrupteurs sont en position UP (réglage par défaut). (Voir la page
34 pour la liste des réglages.)
Conseils d’installation d’un serveur d’impression interne
Poursuivez l’installation du logiciel (voir la page 6). . .
Installation de la carte de serveur d’impression PRO
interne dans votre imprimante
1 Mettez l’imprimante hors tension et débranchez le câble d’alimentation.
2 Au besoin, retirez le capot de la fente MIO (entrée/sortie modulaire).
3 Notez l’ID de périphérique du serveur d’impression NetportExpress de
façon à pouvoir l’utiliser plus tard.
4 Repérez le connecteur à l’arrière de la fente MIO.
5 Insérez la carte de serveur d’impression en veillant à aligner le connecteur
de la carte avec le connecteur à l’arrière de la fente MIO. Lorsqu’elle est
bien en place, la carte devrait reposer à plat contre le cadre de l’imprimante.
6 Fixez la carte de serveur d’impression en resserrant les vis. Vissez
alternativement chacune des vis de façon à ce que la carte reste stable dans
la fente.
7 Branchez le câble réseau qui convient.
8 Branchez le câble d’alimentation à l’imprimante et mettez celle-ci sous
tension.
9 Appuyez sur le bouton Diagnostics de la carte de serveur d’impression
NetportExpress pour faire imprimer une page d’essai. La page d’essai
comprend l’ID de périphérique et diverses autres données de configuration.
6
Installation du logiciel
Installation des logiciels UNIX et AIX
Consultez la section sur la configuration NOS pour le système UNIX ou AIX.
Installation du logiciel pour réseaux Novell et Microsoft
L’installation du logiciel Netport Manager sur une station de travail Windows
vous permet de gérer tous vos serveurs d’impression NetportExpress. Vous
pouvez utiliser Netport Manager avec les systèmes Windows 3.1x, Windows
pour Workgroups 3.11, Windows 95 et Windows NT 3.51 ou 4.0.
Installation de Netport Manager
1 Insérez le CD-ROM dans l’unité du système Windows choisi.
• Systèmes Windows 95 ou Windows NT 4.0. Le programme de
configuration devrait être affiché automatiquement. Si ce n’est pas le
cas, choisissez Démarrer et Exécuter et sélectionnez le contenu du
lecteur de CD-ROM.
• Windows 3.1x ou Windows NT 3.51. A partir du Gestionnaire de
programmes, cliquez sur le menu Fichier et ensuite sur Exécuter.
Sélectionnez le contenu du lecteur de CD-ROM.
2 Exécutez setup.exe à partir du répertoire racine.
3 Installez Netport Manager et consultez ensuite la section NOS voulue pour
configurer le serveur d’impression NetportExpress en fonction de votre
système.
Remarque : Si seul le protocole IP est utilisé sur le système où Netport
Manager est installé, le serveur d’impression NetportExpress
doit utiliser une adresse IP pour communi-quer avec Netport
Manager. Imprimez une page d’essai pour savoir si une adresse
IP a été définie pour le serveur d’impression. Le cas échéant,
définissez cette adresse selon la marche à suivre décrite à la
page 15.
Configuration du serveur d’impression pour vos NOS. Consultez . . .
Configuration de NDS de Novell NetWare ...................................... page 8
Configuration de Bindery de Novell NetWare ................................ page 10
Impression réseau dans l’environnement Microsoft ....................... page 12
Configuration de LAN Manager/LAN Server ................................ page 16
Configuration d’AppleTalk .............................................................. page 18
Configuration d’UNIX .................................................................... page 19
Configuration d’AIX ....................................................................... page 27
Remarque : Vous pouvez configurer chaque port du serveur d’impression
NetportExpress pour utilisation de protocoles multiples.
7
Fenêtre principale de Netport Manager
Cliquez sur le
bouton
Properties
pour régler les
paramètres
matériels et les
paramètres de
nom pour
Netport.
Cliquez sur le
bouton
Configure pour
configurer le
serveur
d’impression
NetportExpress.
Création de disquettes d’installation
Vous pouvez créer des disquettes d’installation pour les programmes suivants :
• Netport Manager
• Port Monitor (pour l’impression Microsoft Network)
Les disquettes d’installation ainsi créées vous permettent d’installer ces
programmes sur tout système équipé d’une unité de disquette 3 1/2. Pour créer
les disquettes, insérer le CD-ROM dans le lecteur. A l’écran qui apparaît,
cliquez sur Make Setup Disks.
Web Netport Manager
S’il n’y a aucune station de travail Windows sur votre réseau pour exécuter
Netport Manager, vous pouvez installer votre serveur d’impression
NetportExpress à l’aide de l’explorateur Web. Le serveur d’impression
comprend un serveur http permettant d’afficher et de modifier les paramètres du
serveur d’impression à partir de l’explorateur Web. Dans un tel cas, une adresse
IP doit avoir été affectée au serveur d’impression.
• Pour savoir si une telle adresse existe pour le serveur, imprimez une page
d’essai à l’aide du bouton « diag » du serveur d’impression.
• Consultez la rubrique « Définition d’une adresse IP », aux pages 15 et 20
pour savoir comment attribuer une telle adresse au serveur.
• Consultez la rubrique « Utilisation de Web Netport Manager » à la page 31
pour savoir comment accéder à ce logiciel.
8
Avec ce mode, le serveur d’impression NetportExpress remplace le
programme de serveur d’impression NetWare. Le serveur d’impression
NetportExpress interroge la file d’attente du serveur de fichiers NetWare pour
savoir si des tâches d’impression s’y trouvent et envoie ensuite chaque tâche
directement à l’imprimante. Cette méthode accélère l’impression. Le mode
serveur d’impression est recommandé car il assure la meilleure performance
en termes d’impression. Pour pouvoir utiliser ce mode, vous devez disposer
d’une licence d’utilisation NetWare pour chaque imprimante (y compris les
serveurs d’impression multiports).
Configuration du serveur d’impression en mode serveur
d’impression NDS
Remarque : Netport Manager crée les files d’attente ou les serveurs d’impression
dont vous avez besoin pour l’installation de NetWare. Il n’est
donc pas nécessaire de créer ces objets dans NWADMIN ou
PCONSOLE.
1 Ouvrez une session en tant qu’Admin à la station de travail où Netport
Manager a été installé.
2 Lancez Netport Manager.
3 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID de périphérique correspond
au numéro du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé.
4 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure.
5 Sélectionnez Novell NDS Print Server.
6 Sélectionnez un contexte pour le serveur d’impression. Le contexte est en
quelque sorte le contenant dans lequel l’objet serveur d’impression est créé.
7 Pour chaque imprimante connectée au serveur d’impression, cliquez sur un
onglet Port et attribuez-lui une file d’attente existante ou encore ajoutez une
nouvelle file.
• Pour affecter une file d’attente existante, double-cliquez sur la file pour
l’ajouter à la liste des files d’attente affectées (Assigned Queues).
• Pour ajouter une nouvelle file, cliquez sur New Queues et créez-en une
nouvelle.
8 Cliquez sur OK et quittez Netport Manager.
Configuration d’une station de travail aux fins d’impression
A chaque station de travail qui utilisera l’imprimante, utilisez la commande
capture ou l’utilitaire d’impression de la station de travail pour rediriger
l’impression à la file d’attente NetWare que vous avez définie. Pour des
instructions complémentaires, consultez la rubrique sur l’aide NetportExpress
pour l’impression sous NetWare.
Configuration en mode serveur
d’impression NDS de Novell NetWare
Conseil pour le mode serveur d’impression NDS
Pour les paramètres avancés comme LIP (paquets Internet), consultez la rubrique
« Gestion du serveur d’impression NetportExpress » à la page 30.
9
Dans ce mode, PSERVER.NLM interroge la file d’attente du serveur de
fichiers NetWare pour savoir si des tâches d’impression s’y trouvent et
envoie ensuite la tâche d’impression au serveur d’impression, qui achemine
les données à l’imprimante. Aucune licence d’utilisateur NetWare n’est
nécessaire pour les serveurs d’impression NetportExpress. Ce mode n’est
toutefois pas recommandé car il est beaucoup plus lent que le mode serveur
d’impression.
Configuration du serveur d’impression en mode imprimante
distante NDS pour Novell NetWare
1 Ouvrez une session en tant qu’Admin à la station de travail où Netport
Manager a été installé.
2 S’il n’existe pas de serveur d’impression, créez-en un à l’aide de
NWADMIN ou de PCONSOLE.
3 Lancez Netport Manager.
4 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID de périphérique correspond
au numéro du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé.
5 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure.
6 Sélectionnez Novell NDS Remote Printer.
7 Sélectionnez un contexte pour le serveur d’impression. Le contexte est le
contenant dans lequel l’objet serveur d’impression est créé.
8 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression NDS de Novell que vous avez créé
dans NWADMIN ou PCONSOLE.
9 Pour chaque imprimante connectée au serveur d’impression, cliquez sur un
onglet Port et attribuez-lui une file d’attente existante ou encore ajoutez une
nouvelle file.
• Pour affecter une file d’attente existante, double-cliquez sur la file pour
l’ajouter à la liste des files d’attente affectées (Assigned Queues).
• Pour ajouter une nouvelle file, cliquez sur New Queues et créez-en une
nouvelle.
10 Cliquez sur OK et fermez Netport Manager.
11 Déchargez, puis rechargez PSERVER.NLM pour activer les modifications.
Configuration d’une station de travail aux fins d’impression
A chaque station de travail qui utilisera l’imprimante, utilisez la commande
capture ou l’utilitaire d’impression de la station de travail pour rediriger
l’impression à la file d’attente NetWare que vous avez définie. Pour des
instructions complémentaires, consultez la rubrique sur l’aide NetportExpress
pour l’impression sous NetWare.
Configuration du mode imprimante distante
NDS de Novell NetWare
10
Avec ce mode, le serveur d’impression NetportExpress remplace le
programme de serveur d’impression NetWare. Le serveur d’impression
NetportExpress interroge la file d’attente du serveur de fichiers NetWare pour
savoir si des tâches d’impression s’y trouvent et envoie ensuite chaque tâche
directement à l’imprimante. Cette méthode accélère l’impression. Le mode
serveur d’impression est recommandé car il assure la meilleure performance
en termes d’impression. Pour pouvoir utiliser ce mode, vous devez disposer
d’une licence d’utilisation NetWare pour chaque imprimante (y compris les
serveurs d’impression multiports).
Configuration du serveur d’impression en mode serveur
d’impression bindery
Remarque : Netport Manager crée les files d’attente ou les serveurs
d’impression dont vous avez besoin pour l’installation de
NetWare. Il n’est donc pas nécessaire de créer ces objets dans
NWADMIN ou PCONSOLE.
1 Connectez-vous en tant que Supervisor à partir de la station de travail où
Netport Manager a été installé.
2 Lancez Netport Manager.
3 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID de périphérique correspond
au numéro du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé.
4 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure.
5 Sélectionnez Novell Bindery Print Server.
6 Sélectionnez le serveur de fichiers où le serveur d’impression va être créé.
7 Pour chaque imprimante connectée au serveur d’impression, cliquez sur un
onglet Port et attribuez-lui une file d’attente existante ou encore ajoutez une
nouvelle file.
• Pour affecter une file d’attente existante, double-cliquez sur la file pour
l’ajouter à la liste des files d’attente affectées (Assigned Queues).
• Pour ajouter une nouvelle file, cliquez sur New Queues et créez-en une
nouvelle.
8 Cliquez sur OK et quittez Netport Manager.
Configuration d’une station de travail aux fins d’impression
A chaque station de travail qui utilisera l’imprimante, utilisez la commande
capture ou l’utilitaire d’impression de la station de travail pour rediriger
l’impression à la file d’attente NetWare que vous avez définie. Pour des
instructions complémentaires, consultez la rubrique sur l’aide NetportExpress
pour l’impression sous NetWare.
Conseil pour le mode serveur d’impression bindery
Pour les paramètres avancés comme LIP (paquets Internet), consultez la rubrique
« Gestion du serveur d’impression NetportExpress » à la page 30.
Configuration du mode serveur
d’impression Bindery de Novell NetWare
11
Dans ce mode, PSERVER.NLM interroge la file d’attente du serveur de
fichiers NetWare pour savoir si des tâches d’impression s’y trouvent et
envoie ensuite la tâche d’impression au serveur d’impression
NetportExpress, qui achemine les données à l’imprimante. Aucune licence
d’utilisateur NetWare n’est nécessaire pour les serveurs d’impression
NetportExpress. Ce mode n’est toutefois pas recommandé car il est
beaucoup plus lent que le mode serveur d’impression.
Configuration du serveur d’impression en mode imprimante
distante bindery
1 Connectez-vous en tant que Supervisor à partir de la station de travail où
Netport Manager a été installé.
2 S’il n’existe pas de serveur d’impression, créez-en un à l’aide de
NWADMIN ou de PCONSOLE.
3 Lancez Netport Manager.
4 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID de périphérique correspond
au numéro du serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé.
5 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure.
6 Sélectionnez Novell Bindery Remote Printer.
7 Choisissez le serveur de fichiers où le serveur d’impression bindery de
Novell se trouve. (Il s’agit du serveur de fichiers où PSERVER est
exécuté.)
8 Dans la liste des serveurs d’impression bindery de Novell, sélectionnez le
module PSERVER que vous désirez utiliser.
9 Pour chaque imprimante connectée au serveur d’impression, cliquez sur un
onglet Port et attribuez-lui une file d’attente existante ou encore ajoutez une
nouvelle file.
• Pour affecter une file d’attente existante, double-cliquez sur la file pour
l’ajouter à la liste des files d’attente affectées (Assigned Queues).
• Pour ajouter une nouvelle file, cliquez sur New Queues et créez-en une
nouvelle.
10 Cliquez sur OK et fermez Netport Manager.
11 Déchargez, puis rechargez PSERVER.NLM sur le serveur de fichiers
indiqué à l’étape 6, pour activer les modifications.
Configuration d’une station de travail aux fins d’impression
A chaque station de travail qui utilisera l’imprimante, utilisez la commande
capture ou l’utilitaire d’impression de la station de travail pour rediriger
l’impression à la file d’attente NetWare que vous avez définie. Pour des
instructions complémentaires, consultez la rubrique sur l’aide NetportExpress
pour l’impression sous NetWare.
Configuration du mode imprimante distante
bindery de Novell NetWare
12
Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress permet l’impression de documents
sur des stations de travail reliées en réseau fonctionnant sous Windows* 95,
Windows NT*, ou Windows pour Workgroups*. A l’aide de NetportExpress
Port Monitor sur une station de travail Windows 95 ou Windows NT, vous
pouvez également partager des imprimantes avec d’autres systèmes, y
compris Windows pour Workgroups et LAN Manager ou LAN Server.
Options d’impression
• Partage d’imprimantes :
Installez le NetportExpress
Port Monitor dans un système
Windows puis partagez le port
avec les autres stations de
travail Windows. La station de
travail sur laquelle Port Monitor
est installé spoule les travaux
d’impression et les achemine
au serveur d’impression
NetportExpress.
• Impression directe :
Installez le NetportExpress
Port Monitor sur chaque
station de travail Windows puis
imprimez directement sur le
serveur d’impression
NetportExpress.
Configuration du serveur d’impression pour
l’impression en réseau de Microsoft
1 Démarrez Netport Manager.
2 Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans la fenêtre de
Netport Manager.
3 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure.
4 Cliquez sur Microsoft Network Printing.
5 Tapez le nom et le domaine du serveur d’impression.
6 Pour chaque imprimante connectée au serveur d’impression, cliquez sur
l’onglet Port et indiquez le nom du port de l’imprimante connectée à ce port.
Configuration des stations de travail pour l’impression
Pour imprimer à partir de Windows 95 et de Windows NT, installez le Intel
NetportExpress Port Monitor. Le Port Monitor s’installe sur le système en tant
que port local que vous pouvez partager avec d’autres systèmes.
Impression réseau dans l’environnement
Microsoft
PC-3791
PARALLEL 1 PARALLEL 2 SERIAL
POWER BNC RJ-45 TEST
NetportExpress PRO
Activity
Transmit
Receive
PARALLEL 1 PARALLEL 2 SERIAL
POWER BNC RJ-45 TEST
NetportExpress PRO
Activity
Transmit
Receive
13
Configuration d’un système pour impression directe ou
partagée
Station de travail Windows 95
1 Insérez le CD du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le lecteur de
CD-ROM.
2 Si le programme Setup ne démarre pas automatiquement, tapez setup.exe à
partir du lecteur de CD-ROM.
3 Dans Setup, cliquez sur le bouton NetportExpress Port Monitor. Lorsque
l’installation est terminée, vous êtes prêt à configurer l’impression de la
station de travail.
4 Dans l’icône My Computer, cliquez deux fois sur le dossier Printers.
5 Cliquez deux fois sur Add Printer et suivez les instructions en vue de
configurer une imprimante locale temporaire sur LPT1. N’imprimez pas
de page d’essai.
6 Une fois que l’assistant Add Printer a terminé, cliquez sur la nouvelle
imprimante avec le bouton droit de la souris puis cliquez sur Properties.
7 Cliquez sur Details, puis sur Add Port.
8 Cliquez sur Other, sélectionnez Intel NetportExpress Network Port et
cliquez sur OK.
9 Cliquez sur Browse pour sélectionner Domaine, serveur d’impression
Netport et port où votre imprimante est connectée au serveur d’impression
NetportExpress.
10 Pour partager l’imprimante : dans Properties, cliquez sur l’onglet
Sharing. Sélectionnez Shared As et indiquez le nom de l’imprimante
partagée.
Pour configurer un système Windows NT 4.0
1 Insérez le CD du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le lecteur de
CD-ROM.
2 Si le programme Setup ne démarre pas automatiquement, tapez setup.exe à
partir du lecteur de CD-ROM.
3 Dans Setup, cliquez sur le bouton NetportExpress Port Monitor. Lorsque
l’installation est terminée, vous êtes prêt à configurer l’impression de votre
système.
4 Dans l’icône My Computer, cliquez deux fois sur le dossier Printers.
5 Cliquez deux fois sur Add Printer puis sélectionnez My Computer.
6 Suivez les instructions pour configurer une imprimante locale temporaire
sur LPT1. N’imprimez pas de page d’essai.
7 Une fois que l’assistant Add Printer a terminé, cliquez sur la nouvelle
imprimante avec le bouton droit de la souris puis cliquez sur Properties.
8 Cliquez sur Ports, puis sur Add Port.
9 Sélectionnez Intel NetportExpress Network Port puis cliquez sur New Port.
14
10 Cliquez sur Browse afin de sélectionner le domaine, le serveur
d’impression Netport ainsi que le port sur lequel votre imprimante est
connectée au serveur d’impression NetportExpress.
11 Pour partager l’imprimante : dans Properties, cliquez sur l’onglet
Sharing. Sélectionnez Shared et indiquez le nom de l’imprimante partagée.
Pour configurer un système Windows NT 3.51
1 Insérez le CD du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le lecteur de
CD-ROM.
2 Tapez la commande setup.exe à partir du CD.
3 Dans Setup, cliquez sur le bouton NetportExpress Port Monitor. Lorsque
l’installation est terminée, vous êtes prêt à configurer l’impression de votre
système.
4 Démarrez Print Manager.
5 Dans le menu Printer, cliquez sur Create Printer.
6 Dans la fenêtre Create Printer, tapez le nom d’une imprimante.
7 Sélectionnez le gestionnaire de l’imprimante.
8 Dans le champ Print to list, sélectionnez Other.
9 Sélectionnez Intel NetportExpress Network Port puis cliquez sur OK.
10 Cliquer sur Browse pour sélectionner le domaine, le serveur d’impression
et le port sur lequel votre imprimante est connectée au serveur
d’impression.
11 Pour partager l’imprimante : dans Print Manager, sélectionnez
l’imprimante. Dans le menu Printer, sélectionnez Properties. Cliquez sur
Share This Printer on the Network puis indiquez le nom de l’imprimante
partagée.
Configuration des systèmes pour partager une
imprimante
Station de travail Windows 95 ou Windows NT 4.0 pour imprimer
sur une imprimante partagée
1 Dans l’icône My Computer, ouvrez le dossier Printers.
2 Ouvrez Add Printer afin de démarrer l’assistant Add Printer.
3 Sélectionnez Network Printer puis indiquez le nom de l’imprimante
partagée qui est installée sur le poste où réside le NetportExpress Port
Monitor.
Station de travail Windows NT 3.51 pour imprimer sur une
imprimante partagée
1 Démarrez Print Manager puis cliquez sur le menu Printer.
2 Sélectionnez Connect to Printer.
3 Sélectionnez la nouvelle imprimante dans la liste Shared Printers puis
indiquez le nom de l’imprimante partagée que vous avez installée sur le
poste où réside le NetportExpress Port Monitor.
15
Impression avec Windows pour Workgroups
Remarque : NetportExpress Port Monitor ne peut être exécuté sous Windows
pour Workgroups. Toutefois, vous pouvez partager une
imprimante avec le système Windows 95 ou Windows NT sur
lequel est exécuté NetportExpress Port Monitor (voir
pages 12-13).
Configuration d’une station de travail Windows pour Workgroups
pour imprimer sur une imprimante partagée
1 Dans Print Manager, cliquez sur le menu Printer puis cliquez sur Connect
to Printer.
2 Dans la fenêtre Connect to Printer, sélectionnez le nom de l’imprimante
partagée qui est installée sur le système Windows 95 ou Windows NT où
réside le NetportExpress Port Monitor.
Configuration d’une station de travail Windows pour Workgroups
pour imprimer directement sur une imprimante
1 Démarrez Print Manager sur le système Windows pour Workgroups.
2 Ouvrez Printers.
3 Dans le menu Printers, sélectionnez Connect to Printer.
4 Sélectionnez la nouvelle imprimante dans la liste Show Shared Printers. Le
serveur d’impression NetportExpress sera affiché dans le domaine que
vous avez indiqué dans Netport Manager.
Impression sous Windows NT à l’aide de LPR
Vous pouvez imprimer sous Windows NT à l’aide de lpr. Cette méthode est
décrite dans l’aide de NetportExpress. Une adresse IP doit avoir été affectée au
serveur d’impression NetportExpress pour pouvoir imprimer à l’aide de lpr.
Configuration d’une adresse IP à l’aide de ARP
(Address Resolution Protocol)
1 Assurez-vous d’être dans le même segment de réseau que le serveur
d’impression NetportExpress.
2 A partir d’une station de travail Windows NT ou Windows 95, allez à
l’invite.
3 Tapez : arp -s ip_address network_address
où
ip_address représente l’adresse IP que vous désirez affecter au serveur
d’impression NetportExpress.
network_address représente l’adresse réseau de 12 caractères qui est
imprimée au bas du serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Pour Windows
NT, cette adresse doit être entrée sous la forme : xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.
Exemple : 00-A0-C9-12-34-56
4 Définissez l’adresse IP dans le serveur d’impression en tapant
pingip_address
où ip_address représente l’adresse que vous avez utilisée à l’étape 3.
16
Pour imprimer dans LAN Manager de Microsoft et LAN Server d’IBM, la
station de travail transmet un travail d’impression à un procédé d’impression
et le travail d’impression est mis dans une file d’attente d’impression puis
acheminé au serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Le serveur d’impression
achemine ensuite le travail d’impression vers l’imprimante sur l’un des ports
auxquels il est connecté.
Si vous disposez d’une station de travail Windows 95 ou Windows NT sur le
réseau, vous pouvez également imprimer à l’aide de l’impression en réseau
de Microsoft (voir pages 12-15).
Configuration du serveur d’impression NetportExpress
Remarque : Netport Manager ne peut être exécuté que sur des stations de
travail fonctionnant sous Windows. Si vous ne disposez que des
stations de travail fonctionnant sous OS/2* sur votre réseau,
vous pouvez utiliser Web Netport Manager pour configurer votre
serveur d’impression NetportExpress (voir « Utilisation de Web
Netport Manager » à la page 31).
1 Démarrez Netport Manager.
2 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID correspond à celle du
serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé.
3 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure.
4 Sélectionnez Microsoft Network Printing (pour LAN Manager) ou
sélectionnez LAN Server.
5 Sélectionnez le domaine où vous désirez que réside le serveur d’impression
NetportExpress.
6 Tapez le nom d’un port pour l’imprimante partagée ainsi qu’une brève
description.
Configuration de l’impression d’une station de travail OS/2 sur LAN
Manager de Microsoft
1 A l’invite d’OS/2 sur le serveur LAN Manager, redirigez l’impression vers
le serveur d’impression NetportExpress en tapant ce qui suit sur une ligne :
NET USE LPT2: \\NETPORT\PORT
où :
LPT2 est l’ID.
NETPORT est le nom que vous avez donné au serveur d’impression.
PORT est le nom du port que vous avez utilisé pour l’imprimante partagée.
2 Cliquez sur Print Manager sur le même serveur, sélectionnez Configure/
Queue dans le menu, puis cliquez sur Add.
3 Tapez un nom, une description, une file d’attente ainsi que toute autre
option que vous souhaitez modifier puis cliquez sur Add.
4 Cliquez sur OK.
5 Retournez à l’invite d’OS/2 puis tapez : NET ADMIN
Configuration pour LAN Manager/LAN
Server
17
6 Dans le menu principal, sélectionnez View/Share the Resource, puis
cliquez sur Add.
7 Dans la zone de liste, sélectionnez Printer puis cliquez sur Add.
8 Définissez le nom de la file d’attente en utilisant le nom de la file d’attente
que vous avez défini dans les étapes précédentes.
9 Tapez le nom de l’imprimante partagée ainsi que les autres paramètres
requis puis cliquez sur OK.
10 Cliquez sur Finish. Définissez l’entrée requise à l’écran suivant puis
cliquez sur OK/Finish.
11 Dans le menu principal, cliquez sur View/Exit puis retournez à l’invite.
12 A l’invite, confirmez les paramètres sélectionnés en tapant
NET SHARE.
Remarque : Pour interrompre le réacheminement, utilisez une
commande telle que
NET USE LPT2: /DELETE
Configuration de l’impression à partir d’une station de travail OS/2
sur LAN Server d’IBM
1 A l’invite d’OS/2 sur le serveur LAN Server, réacheminez l’impression
sur le serveur d’impression NetportExpress en tapant la commande
suivante sur une seule ligne : NET USE LPT2: \\NETPORT\PORT
où :
LPT2 est l’ID.
NETPORT est le nom que vous avez donné au serveur d’impression.
PORT est le nom du port que vous avez utilisé pour l’imprimante partagée.
2 Sur le bureau OS/2, ouvrez Templates.
3 Glissez et déposez le modèle de l’imprimante dans un dossier sur le bureau.
4 Dans la fenêtre Create a Printer, tapez le nom que vous souhaitez utiliser
pour l’imprimante.
5 Sélectionnez LPT1.
6 Dans la liste des gestionnaires, sélectionnez Corresponding Printer
Drivers.
7 Cliquez sur Create.
8 Cliquez sur OK.
9 Indiquez si vous voulez que le système installe une configuration
d’imprimante équivalente pour WIN-OS2, et partager l’imprimante que
vous avez créée.
Remarque : Pour interrompre le réacheminement, utilisez une
commande telle que
NET USE LPT2: /DELETE
Partage de l’imprimante que vous avez créée
Cliquez sur le coin gauche supérieur de l’icône de l’imprimante. Dans le menu
déroulant qui est affiché, sélectionnez Share Printer afin de partager
l’imprimante sur le réseau.
18
Configuration du serveur d’impression NetportExpress pour
AppleTalk
1 A la station de travail Windows où vous avez installé Netport Manager,
démarrez ce programme.
2 Sélectionnez le serveur d’impression dont l’ID correspond au numéro du
serveur d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez installé.
3 Cliquez sur le bouton Configure.
4 Sélectionnez AppleTalk.
5 Sélectionnez un nom de zone pour le serveur d’impression NetportExpress
dans le champ Zone de AppleTalk.
6 Cliquez sur l’onglet d’un port.
7 Dans le champ Chooser Name, tapez le nom qui doit apparaître pour ce
port dans la fenêtre Chooser sur les stations de travail Macintosh.
8 Identifiez le type d’imprimante sur laquelle le serveur d’impression est
connecté. Ce nom doit correspondre au nom du pilote d’imprimante
indiqué dans Chooser. Le type LaserWriter* utilisé par défaut fonctionne
pour tout type d’imprimante PostScript*.
9 Sélectionnez le groupe de polices qui réside dans l’imprimante. La sélection
par défaut est 35.
Remarque : Si votre imprimante prend en charge la communication
bidirectionnelle, le groupe par défaut sera « automatically set by the
printer ».
10 Cliquez sur OK pour terminer la configuration.
Configuration de l’impression d’une station de travail
1 A un poste Apple, ouvrez Chooser.
2 Sélectionnez le gestionnaire d’imprimante pour l’imprimante qui est
connectée au serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Si vous utilisez une
imprimante PostScript, vous pouvez sélectionner l’icône de l’imprimante
LaserWriter ou PostScript pour votre imprimante.
3 Si une liste AppleTalk Zone est affichée dans la fenêtre du Chooser,
sélectionnez la zone que vous avez indiquée lors de la configuration du
serveur d’impression.
4 Sélectionnez le nom du Chooser du serveur d’impression NetportExpress
que vous souhaitez que la station de travail Macintosh utilise.
5 Fermez la fenêtre duChooser.
Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress peut prendre en charge les
impressions acheminées par les stations de travail Macintosh* reliées à un
réseau Ethernet ou à un réseau en anneau à jeton.
Pour imprimer à l’aide de LocalTalk*, connectez le serveur d’impression à un
routeur sur un segment du réseau Ethernet.
Configuration pour AppleTalk
19
Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress prend en charge de nombreuses
configurations des systèmes UNIX en offrant différentes méthodes
d’impression. La méthode d’impression recommandée utilise proprint, qui
vous permet de visualiser l’état de l’impression dans un fichier journal. Vous
pouvez également utiliser lpr/lpd et ftp. (L’impression à l’aide de FTP est
décrite dans l’aide du Web NetportExpress.)
L’installation du logiciel proinstall pour UNIX vous permet d’obtenir les
fichiers requis pour utiliser proprint. Le logiciel contient également les
fichiers de mise à jour de UNIX.
Système Instructions de démarrage (tapez la commande sur une ligne)
HP-UX mount -t cdfs -o ro /dev/dsk/c1d1s0 /cdrom/npcdrom
SCO mount -f ISO9660 -o ro,lower /dev/cd0 /cdrom/npcdrom
Solaris 2.x mount -F hsfs -r /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s2 /cdrom/npcdrom
SunOS 4.1.3 mount -t hsfs -o ro /dev/sr0 /cdrom/npcdrom
UnixWare mount -F cdfs -r /dev/cdrom/c0b0t2l0 /cdrom/npcdrom
Installation du logiciel (utilisateurs de AIX, passez à la page 27)
Nota : Installez le logiciel si vous utilisez proprint ou si vous souhaitez
consulter les fichiers de mise à jour.
1 Connectez-vous à une station de travail UNIX en tant que root.
2 Tapez ls-l /cdrom/npcdrom afin de déterminer si le répertoire
d’installation existe déjà.
Dans le cas contraire, créez-le en tapant
mkdir -p /cdrom/npcdrom
3 Insérez le CD-ROM dans le lecteur d’une station de travail UNIX. Si votre
système ne prend pas en charge le démarrage automatique, procédez
comme suit :
Configuration pour des réseaux UNIX
4 Extrayez le logiciel proinstall du CD-ROM sur votre station de travail
UNIX hôte. Pour ce faire, tapez sur une ligne :
tar xvf /cdrom/npcdrom/unix/prounix.tar/usr/intl/
proinstall
5 Extrayez proprint ainsi que les fichiers du système d’exploitation. Pour ce
faire, tapez sur une ligne :
tar xvf /cdrom/npcdrom/unix/prounix.tar/usr/intl/
sous-répertoire
où sous-répertoire est l’un des suivants :
solx86 (Solaris 2.x x86) solaris (solaris 2.x SPARC) sco
sun (SunOS 4.1.x) unixware hpux
20
Configuration d’une adresse IP sous UNIX
Une adresse IP doit avoir été affectée au serveur d’impression
NetportExpress pour imprimer sous UNIX. Le serveur d’impression tente par
défaut d’obtenir une adresse IP... à l’aide de RARP, BOOTP, et DHCP. Le
serveur d’impression et la station de travail ou le serveur qui exécute les
commandes doivent être connectés au même sous-réseau et ne doivent pas
en être séparés par des routeurs.
Réglage manuel d’une adresse IP pour UNIX à l’aide d’ARP
1 Connectez-vous à une station de travail UNIX en tant que root.
2 Utilisez un éditeur de texte d’UNIX tel que vi pour ajouter l’adresse IP de
Netport ainsi que le nom d’hôte dans le fichier /etc/hosts.
3 Enregistrez le serveur d’impression sur votre station de travail en tapant
arp -s netportexpress network_address temp
où
netportexpress est l’adresse IP ou le nom d’hôte du serveur
d’impression NetportExpress dans le ficher /etc/hosts.
network_address est l’adresse du réseau NetportExpress sur la page
d’essai d’impression ou au bas du serveur d’impression. Sous UNIX, cette
adresse doit être entrée en segments de deux chiffres séparés par des deux
points. Exemple : 00:AA:00:1E:5D:B8
Remarque : Pour obtenir une adresse IP que vous pouvez utiliser
pour le serveur d’impression NetportExpress, adressez-vous à votre
administrateur de réseau.
4 Définissez l’adresse IP de NetworkExpress en tapant
ping netportexpress
où Netportexpress est l’adresse IP ou le nom d’hôte du serveur
d’impression NetportExpress dans le fichier /etc/hosts.
Utilisation de telnet afin de définir les paramètres tels que le
masque du sous-réseau et la passerelle par défaut
1 Sur la station de travail UNIX, utilisez telnet pour accéder au serveur
d’impression. Tapez : telnet ip_address
où adresse_ip_netportcorrespond à l’adresse IP du serveur
d’impression NetportExpress.
2 Connectez-vous en tant que root.
3 Tapez le mot de passe du serveur d’impression NetportExpress, ou
appuyez sur Entrée si aucun mot de passe n’est requis.
4 Dans le menu principal, sélectionnez TCP/IP Configuration.
5 Sélectionnez l’option que vous souhaitez modifier puis appuyez sur Entrée.
6 Définissez les paramètres que vous souhaitez configurer puis appuyez sur
Entrée.
7 Quittez telnet.
21
Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress offre deux méthodes d’impression :
en utilisant proprint ou lpr/lpd. Le logiciel proprint, qui est fourni avec le
serveur d’impression NetportExpress, vous permet de visualiser l’état de
l’impression grâce à un fichier journal. Comme l’indique le tableau qui suit,
la plupart des systèmes peuvent utiliser proprint. Les instructions
s’appliquent à la configuration de l’impression avec proprint et lpd/lpr.
Système d’exploitation Impression avec proprint Impression avec lpr/lpd
HP-UX X X
SCO X X
Solaris X X
SunOS X X
UnixWare X X
Autres systèmes BSD X
La plupart des versions
4 du système V X
Configuration de l’impression de la station de travail avec proprint
(HP-UX, SCO, Solaris, SunOS, Unixware)
1 Assurez-vous que vous avez déjà installé le logiciel et que vous êtes
connecté à une station de travail UNIX en tant que root.
2 A l’invite de la station de travail UNIX, tapez
cd /usr/intl
3 Tapez ./proinstall
4 Sélectionnez la plate-forme UNIX que vous désirez.
5 Dans le menu principal de proinstall, sélectionnez l’option 2.
6 Suivez les directives affichées à l’écran pour entrer l’adresse IP du serveur
d’impression NetportExpress.
7 Sélectionnez le mode d’impression. Le mode PostScript est utilisé pour la
plupart des impressions PostScript et PCL (Printer Command Language).
Ne choisissez le mode texte que si vous imprimez des fichiers de texte
UNIX.
8 Suivez les directives affichées à l’écran pour entrer le nom de l’imprimante.
9 Suivez les directives affichées à l’écran pour terminer l’installation.
10 Faites un essai d’impression de façon à vérifier votre configuration de
l’hôte UNIX.
Configuration de l’impression à partir d’une
station de travail UNIX
22
Configuration de l’impression d’une station de travail à l’aide de lpr/
lpd dans les environnements Solaris, Unixware et versions 4 du
système V
1 Connectez-vous à votre station de travail UNIX en tant que root.
2 Dans le fichier /etc/hosts, ajoutez un nom d’hôte unique et une adresse IP
pour chaque serveur d’impression NetportExpress à configurer.
3 Configurez la file d’attente d’impression et l’imprimante distante. Vous
pouvez utiliser l’utilitaire System Administration pour ajouter une
imprimante distante de type BSD, ou vous pouvez l’ajouter à partir d’une
ligne de commande en tapant l’une des séquences suivantes.
a Tapez : lpsystem -t bsd host
où host correspond au nom du serveur d’impression de l’étape 2 cidessus.
b Tapez le nom de l’imprimante.
• Pour imprimer des fichiers PostScript ou PCL, tapez sur une
ligne :
lpadmin -p printer -s host!port -I
postscript,simple
• Pour imprimer des fichiers texte UNIX standard, tapez sur une
ligne :
lpadmin -p printer -s host!port-I simple
où :
printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente de l’imprimante.
host correspond au nom du serveur d’impression de l’étape 2
ci-dessus.
port définit une imprimante distante rattachée au serveur
d’impression NetportExpress comme suit
LPT1_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT (port parallèle 1 ou la carte
interne)
LPT2_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT (pour port parallèle 2)
COM1_PASSTHRU ou COM1_TEXT (pour le port série)
Remarque : Utilisez PASSTHRU pour les impressions en mode
PCL et PostScript ou pour les fichiers d’application, et utilisez
TEXT si vous imprimez des fichiers texte UNIX standard.
c Tapez :
accept printer
enable printer
où :
printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente de l’imprimante.
23
4 Mettez à l’essai la configuration de l’impression. Tapez à l’invite :
ping host
lp -d printer file
où :
host correspond au nom du serveur d’impression de l’étape 2 ci-dessus.
printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente de l’imprimante.
file correspond au nom du fichier à imprimer.
Configuration de l’impression à l’aide de lpr/lpd sous HP-UX
1 Connectez-vous à votre station de travail HP-UX en tant que root.
2 Dans le fichier /etc/hosts, ajoutez un nom d’hôte unique et une adresse IP
pour chaque serveur d’impression NetportExpress à configurer.
3 Configurez la file d’attente d’impression et l’imprimante distante.
4 Tapez : lpshut
5 Tapez sur une ligne :
lpadmin -pprinter -v/dev/null -ormhost orpport
-ob3
où
printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente du poste local.
host correspond au serveur d’impression NetportExpress.
port définit une imprimante distante rattachée au serveur d’impression
NetportExpress comme suit
LPT1_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT (pour port parallèle 1 ou la carte
interne)
LPT2_PASSTHRU ou LPT2_TEXT (pour port parallèle 2)
COM1_PASSTHRU ou COM1_TEXT (pour le port série)
Remarque : Utilisez PASSTHRU pour les impressions en mode PCL
et PostScript ou pour les fichiers d’application, et utilisez TEXT si
vous imprimez des fichiers texte UNIX standard.
6 Tapez :
accept printer
enable printer
lpsched
où
printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente du poste local.
24
Configuration de l’impression à l’aide de lpr/lpd sous SunOS et
autres systèmes d’exploitation inspirés de BSD
1 Connectez-vous à votre station de travail UNIX en tant que root.
2 Ajoutez l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress et le nom
d’hôte dans le fichier /etc/hosts sur l’hôte BSD.
3 Ajoutez les entrées suivantes pour l’imprimante en bas du fichier /etc/
printcap.
printer_name|alternate_name|comment:\
:lp=:\
:rm=host:\
:rp=port:\
:mx#0:\
:lf=/usr/spool/lpd/errorlog:\
:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/printer_name:
IMPORTANT : La dernière entrée doit être suivie de deux points (:) et
non pas d’une barre oblique inverse (\).
où :
printer_name|alternate_name correspond au nom de
l’imprimante et au nom de l’imprimante de remplacement. Exemple :
lj3ps|LaserJet_IIIsi
comment correspond à un commentaire facultatif. Exemple :
printer_on_port_1
:lp correspond à un champ obligatoire.
host définit un nom d’hôte. Utilisez soit l’adresse IP du serveur
d’impression NetportExpress ou le nom du serveur d’impression tel qu’il
apparaît dans le fichier /etc/hosts.
port définit une imprimante distante rattachée au serveur d’impression
NetportExpress comme suit :
LPT1_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT (pour port parallèle 1 ou la carte
interne)
LPT2_PASSTHRU ou LPT2_TEXT (pour port parallèle 2)
COM1_PASSTHRU ou COM1_TEXT (pour le port série)
Remarque : Utilisez PASSTHRU en mode PCL et PostScript ou
pour imprimer des fichiers d’application, et utilisez TEXT pour
imprimer des fichiers texte UNIX standard.
mx#0 fournit un espace mémoire-tampon illimité.
/usr/spool/lpd/errorlogdéfinit l’emplacement du fichier
journal d’erreurs.
/usr/spool/lpd/printer_name définit un répertoire pour les
fichiers spoulés.
25
4 Accédez à l’invite shell puis créez un répertoire spoulé pour l’imprimante,
si celui-ci n’existe pas. Pour ce faire, tapez les commandes suivantes :
mkdir spool_directory
chown daemon spool_directory
chgrp daemon spool_directory
chmod 775 spool_directory
où :
spool_directory est indiqué dans le fichier /etc/printcap par
l’option sd=.
(Exemple : /usr/spool/lpd/lj3ps)
5 Activez la file d’attente de l’imprimante en tapant les commandes
suivantes :
lpc enable printer
où :
printer correspond à l’imprimante locale indiquée dans le fichier /etc/
printcap (par exemple : lj3ps )
6 Activez l’impression en tapant les commandes suivantes :
lpc start printer
où :
PRINTER correspond à l’imprimante locale indiquée dans le fichier /etc/
printcap (lj3ps dans le modèle printcap)
7 Testez la configuration en tapant :
ping host
lpr -P printer file
où :
host correspond au nom du serveur d’impression NetportExpress tel
qu’il apparaît dans le fichier /etc/hosts.
printer correspond au nom de la file d’attente de l’imprimante.
file correspond au nom du fichier à imprimer.
26
Mise à niveau du logiciel microprogrammé à l’aide
de TFTP
Les mises à niveau peuvent être installées avec TFTP (Trivial File Transfer
Protocol). Vous devez avoir accès à un hôte UNIX sur lequel est exécuté le
démon TFTP contenant les fichiers de mise à jour.
Mise à niveau du logiciel microprogrammé à l’aide de TFTP
Suivez les étapes 1 à 4 pour initialiser le démon TFTP. S’il est déjà en cours
d’exécution, passez à l’étape 5.
1 Modifiez le fichier /etc/inetd.conf. A partir de votre station de travail, tapez
une entrée pour votre démon TFTP. Exemple : (pour les utilisateurs de
systèmes Solaris) tapez sur une seule ligne :
tftp dgram upd wait root /usr/sbin/in.tftpd
in.tftpd -s/usr/local/tftpboot
où /usr/local/tftpboot correspond au répertoire de connexion ftp.
2 Sauvegardez le fichier inetd.conf.
3 Utilisez la commande grep pour rechercher l’ID du processus démon inetd.
Vous en aurez besoin pour réinitialiser le démon inet. Tapez
ps -ef | grep -v grep | grep inetd
exemple de sortie :
root 104 1 80 Dec 13 ? 0:01 /usr/sbin/
inetd -s
où 104 représente l’ID du processus démon inetd.
4 Réinitialisez le démon inet. Tapez
kill -HUP process_ID
où process_ID représente l’ID du processus démon inetd obtenu à
l’étape 3 ci-dessus (104 dans l’exemple).
5 Copiez nppro.upd (fichier de mise à jour du réseau) dans le répertoire de
connexion de votre démon TFTP.
6 Tapez telnet adresse IP de NetportExpress pour vous
connecter au serveur d’impression.
7 Dans le menu principal telnet, sélectionnez Utilities, puis Network Update.
8 Entrez l’adresse IP du serveur TFTP, ainsi que le chemin et le nom du
fichier de mise à jour du réseau.
9 Choisissez yes pour poursuivre la procédure de mise à jour du réseau.
Network Update ferme la connexion telnet.
10 Lorsque la procédure de mise à jour du réseau est terminée, vous pouvez
alors taper
telnet netportexpress_ip_address
pour communiquer avec le serveur d’impression NetportExpress.
27
Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress d’Intel peut imprimer dans
l’environnement AIX à l’aide de lpr/lpd. Pour configurer l’impression dans
l’environnement AIX, utilisez SMIT (System Management Interface Tool).
Pour les deux versions (4.1 et 3.2.5), suivre les étapes qui suivent :
• Installation du logiciel
• Définition de l’adresse IP
Consultez la section portant sur l’impression dans la documentation de votre
système AIX pour connaître l’ensemble de la procédure de configuration.
Installation du logiciel
1 Connectez-vous à une station de travail AIX en tant que root.
2 Démarrez le CD-Rom dans /cdrom/npcdrom en tapant
Mount -v cdrfs -o ro /dev/cd0 /cdrom/npcdrom
où
/dev/cd0 correspond au fichier du périphérique du lecteur de CD-ROM.
Il s’agit d’un fichier système. Consultez la documentation du système pour
connaître le nom exact du fichier.
3 Extrayez proflash et les autres fichiers du système d’exploitation en tapant
sur une ligne :
tar xvf /cdrom/npcdrom/unix/prounix.tar /usr/intl/
aix
4 Faites un test d’impression en appuyant sur le bouton « diag » sur le
serveur d’impression NetportExpress.
Définition de l’adresse IP
1 Connectez-vous à votre station de travail AIX en tant que root.
2 Ajoutez une entrée à la table d’hôte en tapant
smit mkhostent
3 Allez à l’invite puis tapez sur une ligne :
arp -s ether ip_address netport_address temp
où
ip_address correspond à l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression
NetportExpress.
netport_address correspond à l’adresse réseau du serveur
d’impression indiqué, au bas du serveur d’impression.
• Pour obtenir une adresse IP que vous pourrez utiliser pour le serveur
d’impression NetportExpress, adressez-vous à votre administrateur
de réseau.
• Pour connaître l’adresse de réseau du serveur d’impression, regardez
au bas du serveur d’impression ou sur la page d’essai de
l’impression.
Configuration en environnement AIX
28
4 Entrez l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans le champ
Internet Address et le nom d’hôte de ce serveur dans le champ Host Name
(Host Name représente n’importe quel nom d’hôte correct, choisi sous
UNIX).
5 Appuyez sur la touche F12 pour quitter smit.
6 Connectez-vous au serveur d’impression NetportExpress en tapant :
telnet NetportExpress_ip_address
7 Connectez-vous en tant que root.
8 Dans le menu principal telnet, choisissez l’option TCP/IP Configuration,
tel que le masque de sous-réseau et l’adresse d’une passerelle, que vous
souhaitez configurer et appuyez sur Entrée.
9 Définissez les paramètres pour chaque option que vous souhaitez
configurer et appuyez sur Entrée.
10 Quittez l’écran telnet.
11 Testez la configuration de votre réseau et la connexion en tapant
ping nom_d’hôte_NetportExpress
Impression dans l’environnement AIX 4.1
1 Connectez-vous en tant que root puis tapez
smit mkrque
2 Dans le champ Attachment Type, sélectionnez remote.
3 Tapez le champ de l’option que vous voulez configurer pour l’impression à
distance.
• Name of queue to add. Tapez le nom de la file d’impression locale.
• HOSTNAME of remote server. Tapez le HOSTNAME du serveur
d’impression NetportExpress que vous avez ajouté à la table d’hôte.
• Name of QUEUE on remote server. Les noms de file d’attente
corrects sont les suivants :
LPT1_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT (pour port parallèle 1 ou la carte
interne)
LPT2_PASSTHRU ou LPT2_TEXT (pour port parallèle 2)
COM1_PASSTHRU ou COM1_TEXT (pour le port série)
Remarque : Utilisez PASSTHRU pour les fichiers PCL, PostScript
ou les fichiers d’application et utilisez TEXT pour les fichiers texte AIX
standard.
• Type of print spooler on remote server. Cliquez sur list, puis sur
BSD, protocole d’impression du serveur d’impression NetportExpress.
4 Cliquez sur OK, puis cliquez sur Done pour sauvegarder votre
configuration.
5 Cliquez sur Cancel pour quitter smit.
6 Testez l’impression AIX avec le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. A
partir de la station de travail, tapez
29
lpr -P file_d’impression_locale/etc/hosts
oùfile_d’attente_d’impression_locale représente le nom
défini dans le champ Name of queue to add.
Impression dans l’environnement AIX 3.2.5
1 Lorsque vous êtes connecté en tant que root, tapez
smit mkrque
2 Tapez un champ pour chaque option que vous souhaitez configurer afin de
créer une file d’attente d’impression pour l’imprimante distante.
• Name of queue to add. Tapez le nom de la file que vous souhaitez
ajouter.
• Activate the queue? Cliquez sur list, puis cliquez sur yes pour activer
ou sur no pour désactiver la file d’attente.
• Destination Host for remote jobs. Tapez le nom de l’hôte que vous
avez ajouté à la table d’hôte.
• Pathname of the Short Form Filter for queue status output.
Cliquez sur list pour sélectionner le chemin d’accès du filtre de format
court que vous souhaitez ajouter.
• Pathname of the Long Form Filter for queue status output.
Cliquez sur list pour sélectionner le chemin d’accès du filtre de format
long que vous souhaitez ajouter.
• Name of queue on remote printer. Les noms de file d’attente corrects
sont les suivants :
LPT1_PASSTHRU ou LPT1_TEXT, LPT2_PASSTHRU ou
LPT2_TEXT, COM1_PASSTHRU ou COM1_TEXT
Remarque : Utilisez PASSTHRU pour les fichiers PCL, PostScript
ou les fichiers d’application et utilisez TEXT pour les fichiers texte
UNIX standard.
• Name of device to add. Tapez le nom de l’imprimante que vous
souhaitez ajouter.
• Backend Program pathname. Tapez
/usr/lpd/rembak
3 Cliquez sur Do, puis appuyez sur la touche F12 pour quitter smit.
4 Testez l’impression AIX avec le serveur d’impression NetportExpress. A
partir de la station de travail AIX, tapez
lpr -P file_d’impression_locale /etc/hosts
où
file_d’impression_locale représente le nom défini dans le
champ Name of queue to add.
30
Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress prend en charge plusieurs outils de
gestion de réseau et d’imprimante. L’application Windows Netport Manager
assure la configuration des serveurs d’impression de même que la
production de rapports d’état et la gestion de tous les systèmes d’exploitation
réseau gérés.
Vous pouvez également accéder à telnet ainsi qu’à une interface Web, Web
Netport Manager, contenant des outils supplémentaires de gestion du
serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Une adresse IP doit être définie pour
le serveur d’impression NetportExpress pour pouvoir accéder à ces services.
Affichage de l’état
Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression NetportExpress et cliquez sur le bouton
Status.
Modification de la vitesse du port parallèle
Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression NetportExpress. Cliquez sur le bouton
Properties et ensuite sur un onglet de port parallèle.
Modification de la configuration
Cliquez à droite d’un serveur d’impression NetportExpress et choisissez
Configure print services du menu automatique.
Restauration des paramètres d’origine par défaut d’un serveur
d’impression NetportExpress
Cliquez à droite du serveur d’impression NetportExpress et choisissez Factory
Defaults dans le menu automatique.
Mise à jour d’un serveur d’impression à l’aide de la technologie
Flash
Sélectionnez les serveurs d’impression NetportExpress que vous désirez mettre
à jour. (Maintenez la touche de majuscules enfoncée pour en sélectionner
plusieurs. Les serveurs sélectionnés doivent être dans le même segment réseau.)
Cliquez sur le bouton Update.
Modification des paramètres de communication (LIP pour NetWare,
par exemple)
Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression NetportExpress et choisissez
communications dans le menu Options.
Utilisation de Netport Manager
Gestion du serveur d’impression
NetportExpress
31
Accès à Web Netport Manager
1 Ouvrez votre explorateur Web.
2 Tapez l’adresse IP du serveur d’impression NetportExpress dans la boîte
Location et appuyez sur Entrée. La page d’accueil de Web Netport
Manager est alors affichée.
Remarque : Pour savoir si le serveur d’impression NetportExpress utilise une
adresse IP, imprimez une page d’essai en appuyant sur le bouton « diag » du
serveur. Consultez la rubrique « Définition d’une adresse IP », pages 15 à 20,
pour savoir comment définir ce type d’adresses.
Utilisation de Web Netport Manager
Vous pouvez également gérer vos serveurs d’impression en utilisant votre
explorateur Web pour vous connecter au serveur Web relié au serveur
d’impression NetportExpress.
Pour exécuter Web Netport Manager, vous devez disposer de Netscape* ou de
Microsoft Internet Explorer*, versions 3.0 ou plus récentes.
Modification du mot de passe
Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression NetportExpress et cliquez sur le bouton
Properties. Cliquez sur l’onglet de mot de passe.
Définition de l’adresse IP
Sélectionnez un serveur d’impression et cliquez sur le bouton Configure.
Sélectionnez TCP/IP. Si l’adresse IP n’est pas affichée, vous pouvez définir
une adresse. Pour toute demande d’adresse IP, adressez-vous à votre
administrateur de réseau.
32
Affichage du menu principal de telnet
1 A partir d’une station de travail utilisant TCP/IP, tapez
telnet netport_ip_address
où adresse_ip_netport correspond à l’adresse IP du serveur
d’impression NetportExpress.
2 Connectez-vous en tant que root en utilisant le mot de passe que vous
avez défini pour le serveur d’impression NetportExpress.
3 Choisissez la tâche que vous désirez exécuter à partir du menu principal.
Support supplémentaire à la gestion
Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress prend en charge les outils de gestion
de réseau suivants :
• Intel Device View for Web® 1.0 (www.intel.com/network)
• Intel LANDesk® Management Suite
• DMI* (Desktop Management Interface)
• SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
Consultez l’aide NetportExpress (NetportExpress Help) pour en savoir plus
sur ces outils.
Utilisation de telnet
33
La meilleure façon de résoudre un problème d’impression est d’aborder celuici
de façon systématique et de savoir où obtenir de l’aide. Cette section
énumère les principales causes des difficultés d’impression les plus courantes.
Les ressources suivantes s’inscrivent en complément des pages qui suivent :
• Module d’assistance Netport Manager Help (Netport Manager Help)
• Module de dépannage (icône Troubleshooting de la fenêtre Netport
Manager)
• Module d’aide Web (sur CD-ROM)
• Section « Support clientèle automatisé Intel » et support clientèle en ligne
Intel (voir la page 43).
Aucun voyant d’activité sur le serveur d’impression NetportExpress
r Le serveur n’est pas alimenté. Veillez à ce qu’il soit relié à une source
d’alimentation.
r Les câbles ne sont pas correctement branchés dans les prises. Vérifiez les
connexions.
r Vous tentez d’utiliser PRO/100 sur un réseau 100 Mbits/s alors que le
concentrateur ne prend pas en charge ce type de réseau. Vérifiez si le
concentrateur utilisé convient.
r Le câble réseau n’est pas connecté. Vérifiez la connexion.
Le voyant d’activité est rouge et clignote sur le serveur d’impression
Nombre de
clignotements Origine
1- 4, 8 Panne de l’unité. Contactez votre fournisseur ou le
support clientèle Intel.
5 Panne du port série. Déconnectez tous les périphériques
du serveur d’impression. Déconnectez et reconnectez le
câble d’alimentation du serveur d’impression.
6 Panne du port parallèle. Déconnectez tous les
périphériques du serveur d’impression. Déconnectez et
reconnectez le câble d’alimentation du serveur
d’impression.
7 Panne de l’interface réseau. Remplacez le câble réseau
ou connectez le serveur d’impression à un emplacement
réseau différent.
Problèmes relatifs au matériel du serveur
d’impression
Dépannage du serveur d’impression
NetportExpress
34
Que signifie le voyant vert 10/100 ?
r Ce voyant, situé au bout du périphérique PRO/100, devrait être éteint (OFF) sur
les systèmes 10 Mbits/s et allumé (ON) sur les systèmes 100 Mbits/s.
Comment faut-il régler les interrupteurs ?
r Serveurs d’impression PRO,version pour réseaux en anneau à jeton seulement
Vitesse du réseau Interrupteur 1 Interrupteur 2
Détection automatique
de la vitesse Vers le haut (Up) Vers le haut (Up)
Réglage à 4 Mbits/s Vers le bas (Down) Vers le bas (Down)
Réglage à 16 Mbits/s Vers le bas (Down) Vers le haut (Up)
r Serveurs d’impression Ethernet PRO et PRO/100
Ne s’applique pas. Les interrupteurs sont réservés pour usage ultérieur.
Problèmes d’impression
Impression impossible (commencez ici dans la plupart des cas)
r La vitesse du port parallèle peut ne pas convenir. La vitesse de ce port doit être
identique à celle de l’imprimante (voir le tableau ci-dessous).
Vitesse du
port parallèle Type d’imprimante utilisant cette vitesse
Basse HP LaserJet 3* ou modèles antérieurs, imprimantes à
matrice de points et imprimantes à jet d’encre
Moyenne Valeur par défaut. HP LaserJet 4* ou l’équivalent et la
plupart des autres imprimantes
Elevée HP LaserJet 5si* (24 ppm) ou imprimantes plus rapides
Logiciel A n’utiliser que si aucune autre vitesse ne convient.
Réglage de la vitesse du port :
• Sous Netport Manager, cliquez sur le bouton Properties.
• Utilisez telnet pour accéder au menu principal telnet et choisissez Port
Configuration.
• A l’aide de l’explorateur Web, entrez l’adresse IP de votre serveur
d’impression NetportExpress et choisissez ensuite Properties.
r L’imprimante est éteinte ou n’est pas en ligne. Assurez-vous que l’imprimante
fonctionne bien. Imprimez une page d’autovérification pour vous en assurer.
r Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress n’est peut-être pas convenablement
configuré. Vérifiez l’état (Status) sous Netport Manager.
35
r Le serveur n’est pas en ligne ou ne fonctionne pas. Vérifiez si les voyants du
serveur d’impression NetportExpress sont bien allumés. Appuyez sur le bouton
diag du périphérique pour imprimer une page d’essai afin de vérifier la
configuration.
r Le câble d’imprimante est trop long ou endommagé. Assurez-vous que ce câble
ne dépasse pas 1,80 m de long. Si vous pensez que le problème se situe au
niveau du câble, remplacez celui-ci avec un câble en bon état.
Impression impossible sous AppleTalk
r Le réseau est peut-être mal configuré. Assurez-vous que le Panneau de
configuration est paramétré sur le réseau approprié (LocalTalk*, EtherTalk* ou
TokenTalk*, selon le cas).
Si EtherTalk est utilisé sur le réseau, assurez-vous qu’il s’agit d’EtherTalk
Phase 2. Pour imprimer à l’aide de Phase 1, connectez le Macintosh au réseau à
l’aide d’un routeur (Apple Internet Router* ou Liaison Internet Router*, par
exemple) assurant le routage entre Phase 1 et Phase 2.
r Vérifiez si le serveur d’impression NetportExpress est configuré pour
l’impression AppleTalk. Vérifiez la configuration du serveur d’impression.
r L’imprimante choisie ne correspond peut-être pas au type d’imprimante (Printer
Type) spécifié sous Netport Manager. Vérifiez si le nom est exactement le
même, y compris la casse (majuscules et minuscules) et les espaces.
Impression impossible sous LAN Manager ou LAN Server
r Des files d’attente peuvent avoir été créées sur un système n’utilisant ni LAN
Manager, ni LAN Server. Vérifiez l’emplacement de chaque file d’attente.
r Les files d’attente peuvent avoir été affectées au mauvais port. Assurez-vous
que les files d’attente sont affectées au port LPT1, LPT2 ou LPT3 du système
utilisant LAN Manager ou LAN Server.
r Il est possible que les files d’attente soient mal configurées. Assurez-vous
qu’un seul port LPT logique soit associé à un port LPT physique donné. Les
files d’attente ne doivent pas toutes être affectées au port logique LPT1.
Impression impossible sous UNIX
r La commande tar, utilisée pour extraire les fichiers proinstall, a peut-être été
utilisée de façon incorrecte. Consultez le manuel.
r Les paramètres d’impression ne conviennent peut-être pas. La plupart des
applications utilisent la commande PASSTHRU pour l’impression. Cette
commande est utilisée par les langages d’impression PCL et PostScript.
N’utilisez la commande TEXT que si vous imprimez un fichier texte UNIX.
36
r Le réseau n’est peut-être pas connecté au serveur d’impression. Utilisez la
commande ping à partir d’une station de travail UNIX pour voir s’il existe une
connectivité IP avec la tâche TCP/IP du serveur d’impression Netport.
r Si vous utilisez proprint sur un hôte SCO, Solaris, UnixWare ou HP-UX,
assurez-vous que le chemin d’accès complet vers proprint soit défini.
Assurez-vous que le fichier lp_scrpt1 spécifie le chemin d’accès exact et
complet vers l’utilitaire proprint. Veillez également à ce que le numéro de tâche
soit spécifié. L’avant-dernière ligne du fichier lp_scrpt1 doit se lire comme suit :
(commandes de l’interpréteur ...) | usr/intl/hupx/
proprint ‘basename $0’ job=1 exit $ ?
r Si vous utilisez proprint, il est possible que le programme ne fonctionne pas.
Assurez-vous en en imprimant une tâche à partir de la ligne de commande, sans
utiliser le spouleur.
r Si vous utilisez lpd sans proprint et l’impression binaire ou des fichiers
PostScript, assurez-vous que le nom de file d’attente est le bon. Ce nom doit
être LPT1_PASSTHRU pour les fichiers ASCII.
Les files d’attente s’allongent, mais rien ne s’imprime
r Un autre serveur dessert peut-être la file d’attente. Sélectionnez une autre file
d’attente ou remplacez la file d’attente utilisée par l’autre serveur d’impression.
r L’imprimante peut être hors ligne ou être réglée pour un type de port invalide
(parallèle ou série). Vérifiez l’imprimante et les ports.
r Le réseau n’est peut-être pas connecté. Vérifiez la connexion. Pouvez-vous
imprimer une page d’essai? Si c’est le cas, vérifiez la connexion réseau entre la
station de travail et le serveur d’impression. Vérifiez également la connexion au
concentrateur ou au commutateur.
r Si la tâche semble s’imprimer, mais que rien ne sort de l’imprimante, c’est peut-
être qu’elle a été acheminée à une autre imprimante.
r Il est possible que les paramètres du pilote soient erronés. Vous tentez peut-être
d’envoyer une tâche PostScript à une imprimante de type autre que PostScript
ou encore d’envoyer une tâche non PostScript à une imprimante PostScript.
La tâche ne s’imprime pas correctement
r Le pilote d’imprimante n’est peut-être pas le bon. Assurez-vous que le pilote
qui convient soit utilisé.
r Il est parfois nécessaire de régler l’imprimante en mode autodétection de
travaux d’impression PostScript.
r Une imprimante PostScript tente peut-être d’imprimer une tâche autre que
PostScript. Vérifiez la tâche d’impression et l’imprimante.
r Si vous copiez un fichier graphique (binaire) vers LPT1, vous utilisez peut-être
un paramètre erroné. Le paramètre doit être /b :
copy /b lpt1
où
est le nom du fichier que vous désirez imprimer.
37
r Novell NetWare seulement. Le paramètre de page de titre peut être erroné.
Insérez le paramètre NT (No Tabs ou pas de tabulation) dans la commande
CAPTURE.
Les caractères ne s’impriment pas correctement
r AppleTalk seulement. Si l’imprimante n’imprime pas les polices correctement,
vérifiez si le groupe de polices spécifié dans Netport Manager est le groupe
approprié pour l’imprimante.
Remarque : Ceci ne s’applique que dans le cas des imprimantes n’ayant
aucune fonction d’impression bidirectionnelle.
L’imprimante série ne fonctionne pas correctement
r Les paramètres du port série ne correspondent peut-être pas à votre imprimante.
Sous Netport Manager, ouvrez le menu Device Properties et vérifier la vitesse
en bauds sous le port série, ainsi que le réglage de la parité, les bits d’arrêt, et
ainsi de suite. Assurez-vous que ces réglages correspondent à votre imprimante.
(Vous pouvez également effectuer cette vérification en entrant votre adresse IP
dans l’explorateur Web pour accéder aux pages Web du serveur d’impression.)
r Il est possible que le serveur d’impression NetportExpress ne soit plus sous
tension ou qu’il soit débranché. Vérifiez, sur l’imprimante, si le voyant de saut
de page ou d’activité est allumé. Réinitialisez l’imprimante pour vider les
données non imprimables. Vous devrez peut-être réinitialiser le serveur
d’impression NetportExpress.
r Le câble est peut-être défectueux. Branchez le câble série à une station de travail
et essayez d’imprimer. Si aucun fichier ne s’imprime à partir de cette station de
travail, remplacez le câble.
L’imprimante insère un espace entre les lignes
r Le cas échéant, désactivez la fonction de retour automatique à la ligne. Si vous
utilisez Netport Manager, sélectionnez le NetportExpress posant problème et
cliquez sur Properties. Dans la fenêtre de paramétrage du port, désactivez la
fonction de retour automatique à la ligne. Vous pouvez également utiliser
l’explorateur Web ou telnet. Consultez la rubrique Gestion du serveur
d’impression NetportExpress à la page 30.
Il est impossible d’imprimer alors que l’impression fonctionnait
auparavant
r Si vous avez changé le nom Netport (Netport Name) ou le nom de partage
(Share Name) de votre serveur d’impression NetportExpress après avoir
configuré celui-ci, le nouveau nom n’apparaît peut-être plus dans la liste des
serveurs d’impression et l’imprimante ne peut donc reconnaître votre serveur.
Supprimez les configurations de port et réaffectez les serveurs d’impression et
les files d’attente, selon le cas.
38
Problèmes liés à Netport Manager
Netport Manager ne peut pas être lancé
r Vérifiez la station de travail. Essayez d’exécuter Netport Manager à partir d’une
autre station.
r La configuration n’est peut-être pas terminée. Si vous venez de configurer ou
de réinitialiser le serveur d’impression NetportExpress, attendez quelques
secondes avant de cliquer sur l’icône de serveur d’impression dans la liste.
Le serveur d’impression NetportExpress est absent ou son nom dans la
liste est inexact
r Il faut peut-être réinitialiser le serveur d’impression NetportExpress.
Débranchez le câble d’alimentation et rebranchez-le. Attendez environ 30
secondes et cliquez sur l’icône de serveur d’impression apparaissant dans la
liste des serveurs d’impression. Si le serveur n’est toujours pas affiché, cliquez
sur le menu View et ensuite sur Refresh.
r Si le voyant d’activité clignote à une fréquence précise, c’est qu’il y a peut-être
un problème au niveau du périphérique. Vérifiez la liste au début de la section
Dépannage. Si vous pensez que le périphérique est défectueux, branchez le
serveur d’impression à un autre branchement réseau pour voir s’il fonctionne à
cet autre endroit.
r Si vous avez changé le nom de partage (Share Name) ou le nom Netport
(Netport Name) de votre serveur d’impression NetportExpress après avoir
configuré celui-ci, il n’apparaît peut-être plus dans Netport Manager.
Reconfigurez le serveur d’impression en spécifiant le(s) nouveau(x) nom(s).
Un message est imprimé au lieu de la tâche
r Si un message s’imprime au lieu de la tâche demandée, c’est que les
communications bidirectionnelles activées pour l’imprimante ne sont pas prises
en charge par cette dernière. Sous Netport Manager, allez à Properties,
sélectionnez le port et désélectionnez l’option de communications
bidirectionnelles.
Le défilement de la liste des serveurs d’impression est lent
r Il est possible que le réseau compte un grand nombre de serveurs d’impression.
Vous pouvez améliorer la performance de Netport Manager en regroupant les
serveurs d’impression.
39
Autres difficultés
Impossible de partager les files d’impression dans LAN Manager
r LAN Manager seulement. Si vous essayez d’utiliser la commande NET
SHARE pour partager une file d’attente qui n’est pas encore affectée à
l’imprimante appropriée, le message DOS suivant apparaît :
The destination list provided does not match the
destination list of the printer queue.
Utilisez NET ADMIN pour contrôler et corriger les affectations imprimantes/
files.
1 A l’invite OS/2 plein écran, tapez :
NET ADMIN
2 Cliquez sur le menu View et ensuite sur Shared Resources.
3 Dans la fenêtre Shared Resources, sélectionnez .
4 Choisissez l’option Printer et cliquez sur OK.
5 Dans la fenêtre Share a Printer Queue with the Network, sélectionnez la
file voulue. Cliquez sur OK.
6 Affichez les informations des ressources partagées (Shared Resource
Information) pour connaître les affectations files/imprimantes. Cliquez sur
Done.
7 Attribuez aux utilisateurs et aux groupes des droits d’accès à la file
d’impression. Sélectionnez l’utilisateur ou le groupe dépourvu de droits
d’accès, puis sélectionnez Yes pour « accès autorisé ». Choisissez Permit
pour ajouter cet utilisateur ou ce groupe à la liste des droits d’accès affectés
(Assigned Permissions). Cliquez sur OK.
8 Quittez NET ADMIN.
Oubli du mot de passe
r Effectuez une mise à jour sérielle pour supprimer le mot de passe existant.
Si le modèle de serveur d’impression NetportExpress ne comporte pas de port
série, contactez le service de support clientèle Intel.
40
Limites de la garantie
Intel garantit au propriétaire initial que le produit fourni dans cet emballage est exempt de vice de
fabrication pièces et main-d’oeuvre pendant une période de trois (3) ans à compter de : (i) la date
d’acquisition sous réserve d’enregistrement en renvoyant la carte d’enregistrement accompagnée
d’une copie du justificatif d’achat; de (ii) la date de fabrication; ou de (iii) la date d’enregistrement
effectué par voie électronique à condition que cet enregistrement intervienne dans un délai de 30
jours suivant l’achat. La garantie sera nulle si le produit est endommagé lors de l’installation. Intel
vous recommande de confier l’installation de ce produit à votre revendeur.
LA GARANTIE CI-DESSUS EXCLUT TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, DE QUELQUE NATURE ET A
QUELQUE TITRE QUE CE SOIT, EXPLICITE, IMPLICITE OU REGLEMENTAIRE, ET NOTAMMENT
DES GARANTIES DE COMMERCIALISATION OU D’UTILISATION A UNE FIN DETERMINEE AINSI
QUE DES GARANTIES CONTRE LA VIOLATION DES DROITS DE PROPRIETE INTELLECTUELLE
DE QUELQUE PARTIE QUE CE SOIT OU TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE EN RAPPORT AVEC UNE
PROPOSITION, UNE SPECIFICATION OU UN ECHANTILLON.
Cette garantie ne couvre pas le remplacement de produits endommagés à la suite d’abus,
accident, mauvaise utilisation, négligence, modification, réparation, sinistre, installation incorrecte
ou test inapproprié. Dans tous les autres cas de défectuosité, les obligations d’Intel se limiteront,
à la discrétion d’Intel, au remplacement ou à la réparation du produit sans autres frais que ceux
indiqués ci-dessous, à condition que le produit soit livré accompagné d’un numéro d’autorisation
de retour de matériel (RMA) (voir ci-dessous) soit au revendeur soit directement à Intel. En cas
d’expédition du produit, vous devez assumer le risque de dommage ou de perte encouru lors du
transport. Vous devez utiliser l’emballage d’origine (ou équivalent) et prendre à votre charge les
frais de transport. Intel peut réparer le produit ou le remplacer par un produit neuf ou
reconditionné, et le produit retourné devient la propriété d’Intel. Intel garantit que le produit
réparé ou remplacé est exempt de vice de fabrication pièces et main-d’oeuvre pendant : (i) une
période de quatre-vingt-dix jours (90) suivant la date de réexpédition; ou (ii) la période de la
garantie d’origine de trois (3) ans restant à courir, au cas où cette période serait plus longue.
Cette garantie vous confère des droits juridiques spécifiques. Il se peut que vous disposiez
d’autres droits, lesquels peuvent varier selon les juridictions. Tous les composants ou toutes les
pièces contenues dans ce produit sont couverts par la garantie limitée d’Intel s’appliquant à ce
produit. Le produit peut contenir des pièces entièrement testées et recyclées, garanties comme si
elles étaient neuves.
Retour d’un produit défectueux (RMA)
Avant de retourner un produit défectueux, contactez un groupe de support clientèle Intel pour
obtenir un numéro d’autorisation de retour de matériel (RMA) :
Amérique du Nord seulement : (916) 377-7000
Ailleurs dans le monde : Retournez le produit au revendeur.
Après s’être assuré que le produit est bien défectueux, le groupe de support clientèle demande au
service d’autorisation des retours de matériel d’émettre un numéro RMA que vous devez inscrire
à l’extérieur de l’emballage. Intel n’accepte pas les produits dont l’emballage ne porte aucun
numéro RMA.
Responsabilité limitée et recours
EN AUCUNE CAS, INTEL NE POURRA ETRE TENUE RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES INDIRECTS
OU SPECULATIFS (ET NOTAMMENT DES DOMMAGES INDIRECTS, DES DOMMAGES-INTERETS
ACCESSOIRES ET DES DOMMAGES SPECIAUX RESULTANT DE L’UTILISATION OU DE
L’IMPOSSIBILITE D’UTILISER LE PRODUIT, QUE CE SOIT EN RAPPORT AVEC LE CONTRAT, UNE
NEGLIGENCE, UN TORT OU TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE OU PAR SUITE DE VIOLATION DES DROITS
DE PROPRIETE INTELLECTUELLE DE QUELQUE PARTIE QUE CE SOIT, MEME SI INTEL A ETE
41
PREVENUE DE L’EVENTUALITE DE TELS DOMMAGES, ET NOTAMMENT PERTE
D’EXPLOITATION, INTERRUPTIONS D’ACTIVITE ET PERTES FINANCIERES EN TOUT ETAT DE
CAUSE, LA RESPONSABILITE D’INTEL EN VERTU DU PRESENT CONTRAT NE POURRA EN
AUCUN CAS EXCEDER LE MONTANT EFFECTIVEMENT PAYE POUR L’ACQUISITION DU PRODUIT.
CES LIMITES DE REPONSABILITES POTENTIELLES ONT ETE UN CRITERE CLE DANS LA
DETERMINATION DU PRIX DU PRODUIT. A CE TITRE, INTEL N’ASSUME AUCUNE
RESPONSABILITE ET N’AUTORISE PERSONNE A LE FAIRE EN SON NOM.
Dans certains pays, la loi ne permet pas la limitation ou l’exclusion de la garantie pour les
dommages-intérêts ou les dommages indirects. Par conséquent, les limitations ou exclusions
susmentionnées ne s’appliquent pas nécessairement à vous.
5/28/97(kc)
Notice FCC relative aux interférences radioélectriques
Ce matériel a été testé et déclaré conforme aux limites imposées à un appareil numérique
de classe A, conformément à l’alinéa 15 de la notice FCC relative aux interférences
radioélectriques. Ces limites sont conçues pour assurer une protection raisonnable
contre les interférences dangereuses dans une installation commerciale.
Ce matériel produit, utilise et peut émettre une énergie à haute fréquence et, s’il n’est pas
installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions, il peut provoquer des interférences
nuisibles pour les radiocommunications. Il n’est toutefois pas garanti que ces
interférences ne se produiront pas sur une installation particulière. S’il s’avère que cet
équipement produit des interférences nuisibles sur une réception radio ou télévisuelle, ce
qui peut être déterminé en mettant hors tension, puis de nouveau sous tension le
matériel, il est conseillé d’essayer de corriger les interférences en prenant l’une ou
plusieurs des mesures suivantes :
• Modifiez l’orientation de l’antenne de réception radio ou TV.
• Dans la mesure du possible, augmentez la distance qui sépare le matériel concerné de
l’antenne de réception.
• Raccordez le matériel à une prise appartenant à un circuit différent de celui du
récepteur.
Si le problème persiste, contactez votre revendeur ou un technicien radio/TV
expérimenté.
REMARQUE Ce matériel est conforme à l’alinéa 15 de la notice FCC relative aux
interférences électromagnétiques. Son exploitation est soumise aux deux
conditions suivantes : (1) Ce matériel ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences,
et (2) ce matériel doit en outre supporter n’importe quelle interférence
reçue, y compris les interférences susceptibles de perturber son
fonctionnement.
AVERTISSEMENT Toute modification n’ayant pas été expressément approuvée par
Intel peut se traduire par l’annulation du droit d’exploitation de ce
matériel dont jouit l’utilisateur.
Normes CE
Le présent serveur d’impression NetportExpress est conforme à la directive de l’UE, 89/
336/EEC, et fait appel aux normes EMC EN55022 (Class A) et EN50082-1. Ce matériel
répond également aux normes de sécurité EN60950.
Ce matériel a été testé et déclaré conforme aux normes CISPR 22 Class A.
42
Canada
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils
numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur : « Appareils
Numériques », NMB-003 édictée par le Ministre Canadien des Communications.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital
apparatus set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled: “Digital Apparatus,”
ICES-003 of the Canadian Department of Communications.
VCCI Class 1 (Japan)
Intel Corporation, Mailstop JF3-406, 5200 NE Elam Young Parkway
Hillsboro, Oregon 97124-6497 USA
43
Techniciens du support clientèle Intel
Autres services fournis gratuitement : Vous pouvez consulter nos spécialistes en support
technique sans aucun frais.
Services accessibles dans le monde entier : Intel possède des centres de support technique
dans le monde entier. Le personnel de la plupart de ces centres se compose de techniciens
parlant les langues locales. Pour obtenir la liste des centres de support Intel, les numéros de
téléphone et les heures d’ouverture, téléchargez le document numéro 9089 à partir d’un des
services automatisés.
Si vous n’avez pas accès aux services automatisés, contactez votre revendeur ou distributeur
local.
Ou appelez le +1-916-377-7000 de 07:00 à 17:00, du lundi au vendredi, heure du Pacifique -
Etats-Unis.
03/31/97
Support clientèle automatisé Intel
Vous pouvez accéder aux services du support automatisé d’Intel 24 heures sur 24, tous les jours et
gratuitement. Ces services offrent les toutes dernières informations disponibles sur les produits Intel. Vous
pouvez obtenir des instructions d’installation, des informations de dépannage et de nombreuses notes sur
la compatibilité, ainsi que des informations plus générales sur les produits.
Fichiers World Wide Web & Intel Bulletin Board
d’aide Intel Internet FTP Service (BBS)
Obtenez des Accédez à la page d’accueil Consultez le BBS
informations Intel sur le Web ou modem (8-N-1,
détaillées par téléchargez des informations jusqu’à d’Intel.
l’affichage en ligne à l’aide d’un site anonyme Connexion par
des fichiers FTP. 14,4 Kbps).
README.
Dépannage ✓ ✓
Mises à jour logicielles ✓ ✓
Notes d’installation ✓ ✓
Information sur les produits ✓
Mode d’accès : WWW Etats-Unis et Canada
Généralités : 1-503-264-7999
www.intel.com/network/print Europe
News : news://cs.intel.com +44-1793-432955
Support clientèle : Reste du monde
http://support.intel.com +1-503-264-7999
FTP
Hôte : download.intel.com
/enduser_reseller
Répertoire : /support
44
utilisation de ARP 15
Définition d’une adresse IP
sous UNIX 20
Dépannage 33
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) 20
DMI (Desktop Management Interface) 32
Domaine 13, 14
E
Etat
affichabe avec Netport Manager 30
F
Fenêtre principale de Netport Manager 7
Fichiers de journalisation
pour proprint 21
Files d’attente
attribution en mode serveur d’impression NDS
de Novell
ll 8
G
Garantie, limites 40
Gestion de réseau
outils supplémentaires 32
H
HP-UX 19
utilisation de proprint 21
HTML
accès à Web Netport Manager 31
I
ID de périphérique 2, 3, 4
Impression
avec LAN Manager ou LAN Server 16
d’une page d’essai 2, 3
impression impossible 34
partage sous LAN Manager ou LAN
Server 17
problème de câblage 35
problèmes courants 34
utilisation de la commande CAPTURE avec
Novell 8
utilisation de proprint 21
Impression dans l’environent Macintosh 18
Impression de LAN Manager/LAN Server 16
impression directe sous Windows 95 13
Impression directe sous Windows NT 3.51 14
Impression directe sous Windows NT 4.0 13
Impression FTP 19
Impression LPR
pour Windows NT 15
impression lpr/lpd 21, 22, 23, 24
impression lpr/lpd dans l'environnement
UNIX 19, 21, 22, 23, 24
impression partagée sous Windows 95 14
Impression partagée sous Windows NT 3.51 14
Impression réseau dans l’environment
Microsoft 12
Imprimantes LaserJet
Index
A
Adresse IP
paramètres Netport Manager 31
paramètres UNIX 20
paramètres Windows NT 15
Adresse MAC. Voir Adresse réseau
Adresse réseau 3, 20, 27
Aide
support clientèle 42
AIX 27
impression dans l’environement AIX 28
impression dans l’environement AIX 3.2.5 29
Alimentation
celle à utiliser 2, 3
AppleTalk
dépannage pour problèmes
d’impression 35, 37
AppleTalk Phase 1 35
Autodétection des débits de données 3
B
BOOTP (protocole Boot) 20
C
Câblage
câble d’alimentation 2
Câbles
Catégorie 3 ou 5 2, 3
parallèles 3
problèmes d'impression 35
Câbles Catégorie 3 ou 5 3
Cartes de serveurs d’impression internes
insertion dans les imprimantes 4
installation du matériel 4
CD-ROM
Logiciel de serveur d’impression
NetportExpress 6
Chooser 18
Configuration
modification à l’aide de Netport Manager 30
pour protocoles multiples 6
Connecteur DB-9 3, 4
Connecteur RJ-45 2, 3
pour carte de serveur d’impression PRO
interne 4
Connecteurs
cartes de serveurs d’impression internes 4
DB-9 3
RJ-45 3
RJ-45 et BNC, pour cartes Ethernet PRO
internes 4
Contexte
pour mode serveur d’impression NDS de
Novell 8
D
Débits de données
réseaux en anneau à jeton 3
Définition d’une adresse
avec Netport Manager 31
45
configuration du mode imprimante distante
NDS 9
configuration pour services bindery 10
licences d’utilisateur 8
mode imprimante distante pour services
bindery 11
NW Admin et PCONSOLE 8, 10
Types de trames 2, 3
O
OS/2
impression avec LAN Manager 16
impression avec LAN Server 17
Outils de gestion d’imprimante 30
Outils de gestion Web 32
P
Page d’essai
(impression) 2, 3
Paramètres avancés de configuracion 30
Paramètres de configuration, advancés 30
Paramètres d’origine
restauraation 30
Passerelle par défaut 20
PASSTHRU 24
PCONSOLE
superflu pour configuration de Netport
Manager 8
PERSERVER.NLM
en mode imprimante distante NDS de
Novell 9
Phase 1, AppleTalk 35
Phase 1 impression avec LocalTalk 18
Phase 2, EtherTalk 35
Problèmes d’impression 34
Problèmes d’impression (imprimante série) 37
problèmes d’impression AppleTalk 37
Produit, retour 40
proprint 19
fichiers de journalisation 21
systèmes pris en charge 21
Protocoles multiples
configuration 6
Protocoles multiples, configuration 6
R
RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol)
20
Réseau en anneau à jeton
débits de données 3
position par défaut 5
Restauration des paramètres d’origine 30
Retour d’un produit défectueux 40
RJ-45 4
S
SCO 19
utilisation de proprint 21
Serveur d’impression
retour 40
Serveur d’impression NetportExpress
installation du logiciel 6
installation des cartes de serveurs
d’impression i 5
Imprimantes LaserWriter 18
Installation du logiciel
AIX 6
UNIX 6
Installation du matériel
instructions pour carte interne 5
Intel Device View pour Web 32
Interrupteurs 5
paramètres 34
paramètres appropriés 34
Interrupteurs, réseau en anneau à jeton
position par défaut 2, 3, 5
L
LANDesk Management Suite 32
Licences d’utilisateur (Novell) 8
LIP (paquet Internet) 8, 10
LocalTalk 18
lpr/lpd
systèmes pris en charge 21
M
Mémoire Flash
mise à jour à l’aide de TFTP 26
Mémorie
mise à niveau de la mémoire Flash à l’aide de
TFTP 26
Microprogramme
mise à niveau à l’aide de TFTP 2, 26
MIO (entrée/sortie modulaire)
fentes de l’imprimante pour cartes de serveurs
d’impression internes
ression internes 5
Mises à jour de la mémoire Flash 30
Mode imprimante distante 11
configuration pour services bindery 11
NDS de Novell 9
Mode serveur d’impression
NDS de Novell 8
Services bindery de Novell NetWare 10
Moniteur de port 12
Mot de passe
modification 31
oubli 39
N
NDS
configuration pour mode serveur
d’impression 8
NDS de Novell NetWare
configuration pour mode serveur
d’impression 8
Netport Manager
utilisation de to manage printing 30
NetportExpress Port Monitor 12
Normes CE 41
Notice FCC relative aux interférences
radioélectri 41
Novell NetWare
46
Serveur d’impression PRO, externe
installation du matériel 3
Serveurs d’impression
Serveur d’impression PRO externe -
Installation du matériel
atériel 3
Services bindery
configuration du mode serveur
d’impression 11
mode serveur d’impression 10
SMIT (System Management Interface Tool) 27
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol
32
Solaris 19
impression avec lpr/lpd 22
utilisation de proprint 21
Subnet mask 20
SunOS 19
impression avec lpr/lpd 24
utilisation de proprint 21
Support, clientèle 42
System V, Release 4
impression avec lpr/lpd 22
Systèmes fondés sur BSD
impression avec lpr/lpd 24
T
Telnet 32
réglage des paramètres de configuration 20
TEXT 24
TFTP
mise à niveau de la mémoire flash 26
Types de trames
Novell NetWare 2, 3
U
UnixWare 19
impression avec lpr/lpd 22
utilisation de proprint 21
V
Vitesse du port 30
paramétrage 34
Vitesse du port parallèle
modification à l’aide de Netport Manager 30
Vitesse du réseau
10/100 Mbits/s 2
Voyant d’activité 2, 33
Voyant vert 34
Voyants
vert 34
voyant d’activité 2
voyant rouge d’activité 33
W
Web Netport Manager 31
définition 7
Windows 95
installation du logiciel 6
Windows for Workgroups direct printing 15
Windows for Workgroups printing 15
Windows NT
installation du logiciel 6
Windows pour Workgroups
imprimer directement 15
installation du logiciel 6
Z
Zones 18
48
Installation du matériel
Installation du logiciel
Configuration de NDS de Novell NetWare
Configuration bindery pour Novell NetWare
Impression réseau dans l’environnement Microsoft
Configuration de LAN Manager/LAN Server
Configuration d’AppleTalk
Configuration d’UNIX
Configuration d’AIX
Gestion du serveur d’impression NetportExpressMC
Dépannage
Limites de la garantie/Notice (conformité aux normes)
Support clientèle
Index
*679940-001* 679940-001
Now you can be connected without being tied down – with
Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN Adapters and Access
Points. Fast and compatible with existing Ethernet
technology, wireless LANs extend the reach and the
usefulness of your wired network resources. From
conference rooms, training centers and cafeterias,
you are free to work, teach or study wherever you’re
most productive. There’s no easier way to provide
reliable, real-time LAN access away from the desk.
Extend your network … or create
a new one
No network? No problem – the Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN
Solution can serve as the basis for an entirely new network infrastructure, in which
devices are instantly deployed or reconfigured without the costs and concerns of pulling
wires throughout a building. Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN PC Cards also let you
create ad hoc networks on-the-fly, sharing information in secure peer-to-peer sessions,
allowing communication with only the people you authorize.
Intel is the worldwide leader in Fast Ethernet networking connections1
, and also
co-inventor of the Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet standards, so it shouldn’t
be surprising that Intel is now providing the best Wireless Ethernet solutions. Intel has
designed these new wireless LAN products to IEEE 802.11b High Rate specifications,
protecting your investment in infrastructure and assuring you of cross-vendor
interoperability.
Fast 11Mbps connectivity based on ■ Interoperates with other 802.11b Wi-Fi*-approved products
IEEE 802.11b High Rate standard ■ Backwards compatible with 802.11 Direct Sequence products
(aka Wireless Ethernet) at 1 and 2Mbps
■ Dynamic rate scaling tunes performance to minimize interference
■ Automatic load balancing and preemptive roaming optimize
each client’s connection to the LAN
■ Seamless bridging between separate Ethernet networks allows
connectivity without cables
Reliable and trusted net access – ■ 128-bit Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) protects information
even when you’re not at your desk in transit by adding powerful encryption without a noticeable
impact to performance
■ Bi-directional authentication restricts LAN access to recognized
clients and Access Points via advanced security settings Brand name reliability ■ The quality, reliability and support that you would expect
from the world leader in Fast Ethernet networking connections1
Simple to set up and manage ■ Plug ‘n’ Play adapter installation
■ Browser-based configuration and management with full support
for SNMP v3
■ Integrates into existing Ethernet networks
•
Supporting Features Benefits
•
Intel®
PRO/Wireless 2011
LAN Solution
Networks as mobile as the people who use them
■ Extend LAN
connectivity without
costly wiring
■ Deploy instant
networks at
any location
KEY FEATURES
•
■ Enables mobile roaming
and building-wide
coverage
■ Bridges wired and
wireless networks
■ Eases installation
and management
KEY FEATURES
•
•
Support for data and VoIP
applications, wireless handsets –
Enables converged H.323 voice
and data networks that are
truly mobile.
Network-to-network bridging –
Bridges between wired and wireless
networks and can also connect two
wired networks wirelessly.
Secure access control with
bi-directional authentication –
Use MAC addresses and
pre-defined network IDs to
restrict which adapters and
Access Points can connect
to the network.
Embedded web server –
Configure, monitor and manage Access Points from
anywhere in the world via standard web browser.
Multi-purpose design –
Mounts easily on walls
and ceilings, rests
discreetly on shelves
and filing cabinets.
•
Private, trusted connections
128-bit Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) ■ Encrypts transmissions to help ensure privacy while
maintaining speed and quality
Bi-directional authentication ■ Restricts LAN access to recognized clients and
Access Points via advanced security settings
Standards-based design
Compliant with IEEE 802.11b High Rate specification ■ Ensures interoperability with all other 802.11b High Rate
compliant products
Reliable performance
Seamless bridging to, from and between ■ Innovative, cost-effective solution extends the reach of
Ethernet networks wired networks to conference rooms, classrooms, training
centers, etc.
Wireless repeating ■ Extends network coverage to areas that don’t have
network access
Simple to set up and manage
Advanced manageability ■ Allows firmware updates via FTP or a direct serial connection
without taking the Access Point offline ■ Upgrade entire wireless network at one time from one
remote location
Embedded web server with full support for ■ Enables configuration and management with a browser from
SNMP v3 anywhere in the world, so changes take just a few mouse
clicks, not a personal visit
Receives power through the Ethernet cable2 ■ Simplifies set-up and eliminates costly process of running
electricity to each Access Point
Comprehensive site survey tool ■ Makes it easy to optimize Access Point placement for best
(included in every box) coverage and performance
Features Benefits
BNC-mounted 1dB gain diversity antennas –
Provide reliable coverage for most indoor
environments. Built-in BNC connectors also
support a wide variety of optional
specialty antennas.
Intel®
PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN Access Point
The fastest & easiest way to enable network connectivity wherever you need it
Whether you need to extend the reach of a wired network or quickly deploy an all wireless LAN,
Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN Access Points provide a reliable, easy-to-install network
infrastructure. Intel’s standards-based solution is ideal for historic buildings, leased office spaces,
temporary projects … any location where wired connectivity is not practical or cost-effective.
Uninterrupted connectivity
Advanced roaming scheme ■ Operates continuously and automatically in the background,
so that connection with a new Access Point is established
before the old connection is lost
Mobile IP ■ Seamless roaming across sub-nets without rebooting
Location profiles ■ Enables travel between offices or between home and work
without reconfiguring laptops to log onto a network
International roaming ■ Automatically selects the correct spectrum range when used
in multiple countries
Easy to use and manage
Task Tray indicators ■ Automatic updates keep users informed of signal strength
and quality
PRO/Wireless client utilities ■ Optimize power and performance levels, graph interference
patterns, view transmission statistics
DHCP support ■ Lets clients obtain a leased IP address from a DHCP server,
eliminating the complexity of assigning fixed IP addresses in
a large enterprise
Robust management system ■ Configure and monitor from anywhere in the world via
web browser
Automatic performance optimizations
Load balancing ■ Automatically switches among Access Points to optimize signal
strength and quality, and minimize spectrum sharing
Dynamic rate scaling ■ Always seeks to connect at 11Mbps, then switches (if network
traffic demands) to 5.5, 2 or 1Mbps for increased signal range;
automatically returns to higher speed when conditions allow
Advanced power management ■ Extends laptop battery life to maximize time away from the desk
Ad hoc mode ■ Allows direct peer-to-peer communication without using an
Access Point – perfect for small networks or temporary
project teams
Features Benefits
■ Advanced hardware
design provides
secure, high-speed
connectivity while
roaming
■ Ad hoc mode enables
simple peer-to-peer
networks
■ Intelligent on-board
power management
extends laptop
battery life
KEY FEATURES
DHCP –
Supports the same dynamic
IP address servers as wired networks.
Location profiles –
Allows hassle-free traveling
among networks.
Mobile IP –
Enables roaming
across sub-nets
without rebooting.
Integrated diversity antennas –
Two integrated antennas overcome
multi-path problems for the best
possible connection.
Automatic load balancing
and preemptive roaming –
Continuously monitors signal strength,
signal quality and Access Point
traffic and makes adjustments to
optimize performance.
•
•
•
Intel®
PRO/Wireless 2011
LAN PC Card
Fast, reliable network connectivity – even when you’re not at your desk
Unleash the productivity of your workforce with Intel® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN PC Cards.
With untethered instant-networking capabilities, users of laptops and other mobile devices can
work where they’re most productive.
Take your network with you
Immediate access to critical information while you’re still in a conference room … real-time
updates to your supply-chain system from the factory floor … ad hoc, peer-to-peer networking
sessions wherever you happen to be … classroom computers and peripherals that communicate
with each other and the Internet instantly and easily – the possibilities of wireless connectivity
come to life with Intel PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN PC Cards.
0600/SG/JN/PP/OC/10K Please Recycle NP1690
Information in this document is provided in connection with Intel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document. Except as provided
in Intel’s Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products, Intel assumes no liability whatsoever, and Intel disclaims any express or implied warranty, relating to sale and/or use of Intel products including liability or
warranties relating to fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, or infringement of any patent, copyright or other intellectual property right. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, or life
sustaining applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. For the most current product information, please visit http://www.intel.com/network
* Third-party trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
SPECIFICATIONS Intel® PRO/Wireless LAN PC Card
NOTEBOOK SLOT TYPE Type II 16-bit PC card
SOFTWARE DRIVERS Windows* 2000, 98, 95, NT*, Pocket PC and DOS; Linux*; Palm OS*
DEVICE DRIVERS NDIS2, NDIS3, NDIS4, NDIS5 and ODI
SOFTWARE UTILITIES Location profiles “My WLAN places”; Real-time signal
strength/quality “NIC Utilities”; Diagnostic and Configuration
“NIC Info”; Firmware upgrade “NIC Update”; Site Survey Tool
NETWORK ARCHITECTURE Supports peer-to-peer networking and communication to
TYPES wired networks via Access Points
RANGE AT 1MBPS (TYPICAL) 1500ft (460m) open environment; 300ft (90m) office environment
RANGE AT 11MBPS (TYPICAL) 400ft (120m) open environment; 100ft (30m) office environment
ANTENNA Integrated internal diversity antenna
LED INDICATORS Link status and link activity
RECEIVE SENSITIVITY -87dBm @ 1Mbps; -85dBm @ 2Mbps; -84dBm @ 5.5Mbps
-81dBm @ 11Mbps
MAX OUTPUT POWER Typical 18dBm; Minimum 14dBm
POWER CONSUMPTION Transmit: 300mA typical (500mA max.); Receive: 170mA typical
(300mA max.); Sleep: 10mA typical (25mA max.)
SAFETY COMPLIANCE USA/Canada: UL1950/CSA 22.2; Europe: CE Marked
DIMENSIONS Length: 111mm/4.37in; Width: 54mm/2.23in; Thickness:
5mm/.20in; Weight: 1.6oz/45.36g
SPECIFICATIONS Intel® PRO/Wireless LAN Access Point
STANDARDS CONFORMANCE IEEE 802.11b High Rate, IEEE 802.3 (10BASE-T), 802.1H,
802.1d Spanning Tree, SNMP v2
LOCAL CONFIGURATION Direct console port (serial EIA-232 DB-9 male)
REMOTE CONFIGURATION HTTP, Telnet, SNMP, PPP, tFTP, and Intel feature to perform bulk
configuration to many APs
AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION BOOTP and DHCP
MAXIMUM CLIENTS 256
MANAGEMENT FEATURES Client Access Control via MAC address; Embedded HTTP Server
SNMP traps; Multilevel passwords
DIAGNOSTIC CAPABILITIES Event logging, data packet tracing, SNMP alarm generation,
operating statistics; Protocol and bandwidth filters; Site Survey
utility with signal strength logging
ROAMING SUPPORT IEEE 802.11b High Rate compliant with Intel enhanced roaming
features; Mobile IP
PERFORMANCE Proxy ARP; Short preamble support; QoS Voice and
ENHANCEMENTS Data Prioritization
SECURITY 64- or 128-bit Encryption; Access Control List;
MD5 Member Authentication (Mobile IP)
RANGE AT 1MBPS (TYPICAL) 1500ft (460m) open environment; 300ft (90m) office environment
RANGE AT 11MBPS (TYPICAL) 400ft (120m) open environment; 100ft (30m) office environment
ANTENNA Two 2.2dBi dipole antennas with diversity support; also supports
specialty antennas
LED INDICATORS Status, network activity, and RF activity
RECEIVE SENSITIVITY -87dBm @ 1Mbps; -85dBm @ 2Mbps; -84dBm @ 5.5Mbps;
-81dBm @ 11Mbps
MAX OUTPUT POWER Typical 18dBm; Minimum 14dBm
POWER SUPPLY Input: 85 to 270V AC; Ouput: 12V DC
POWER ENHANCEMENTS Power over Ethernet option2 (eliminates need for AC power at
AP location)
SAFETY COMPLIANCE USA/Canada: UL1950/CSA 22.2; Europe: CE Marked
DIMENSIONS Length: 15.24cm/6in; Width: 21.59mm/8.5in;
Height: 4.45cm/1.75in; Weight (w/ power supply): 1lbs./0.454kg
HARDWARE SHIPPING Access Point, two dipole antennas, one power supply, one
CONFIGURATION country-specific power supply cord (three in “EU” SKU),
mounting brackets, clips and screws
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Intel Customer Support Services offers a broad selection of programs. For more
information, contact us on the World Wide Web at support.intel.com/sites/support.
Service and availability may vary by country.
ON-LINE DOCUMENTS
To learn more about Intel ® PRO/Wireless 2011 LAN Solutions, or to connect with an
Intel® Premier Provider in your area, visit us at www.intel.com/network
ORDER CODES
Wireless PC Card, 2.4GHz, 11Mbps
North America WPC2011NA
Europe R&TTE countries, Australia WPC2011EU
France WPC2011FR
Japan WPC2011JP
Wireless Enterprise Access Point, 2.4GHz, 11Mbps
North America WEAP2011NA
Europe R&TTE countries, Australia WEAP2011EU
France WEAP2011FR
Japan WEAP2011JP
FOR PRODUCT INFORMATION
World Wide Web www.intel.com/network
U.S. and Canada 800-538-3373
UK +0870-6072439
France +01-41-918529
Germany +069-9509-6099
Italy +02-696-33276
Spain +91-377-8166
Finland +9-693-79297
Denmark +38-487077
Norway +23-1620-50
Sweden +08-445-1251
Holland +020-487-4562
Japan +81-298-47-0800
Hong Kong, Taiwan, Korea, Singapore and ASEAN +65-213-1000
Australia +61-2-9937-5800
SPECIFICATIONS Intel® PRO/Wireless LAN Product Suite
DYNAMIC RATE SHIFTING 1, 2, 5.5, 11Mbps
(Auto-selects highest usable rate)
NETWORK STANDARD(S) IEEE 802.11b High Rate, 802.3, 802.1H, 802.1d Spanning Tree
FREQUENCY 2.4GHz ISM band
WIRELESS MEDIUM Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS)
MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance (CSMA/CA)
OPERATING SYSTEMS SUPPORTED Windows* 2000, 98, 95, NT*, and Pocket PC; Linux*; Palm OS*
ENCRYPTION No encryption option; 64-bit WEP encryption option; 128-bit WEP encryption option
MODULATION DBPSK @ 1Mbps; DQPSK @ 2Mbps; CCK @ 5.5 and 11Mbps
OPERATING CHANNELS 11 channels (U.S. and Canada); 13 channels (ETSI compliant countries); 14 channels (Japan)
ROAMING IEEE 802.11b High Rate compliant with Intel enhanced roaming features; Mobile IP with MD5 encryption for member authentication
CERTIFICATION U.S./Canada: FCC Part 15 Class B US Unintentional Emissions; FCC Part 15.247, 15.205, 15.209 US Spread Spectrum; DOC RSS-210 Canadian Spread Spectrum;
Europe: ETS 300 328, ETS 300 826, CE Marked; Japan: RCR STD-33; Contact us for other information outside the U.S.
ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING RANGES Operating Temperature: -20° to 70°C; Storage Temperature: -30° to 80°C; Operating Altitude: up to 2.4km; Humidity: 95% maximum non-condensing
Shock: 40G, 11mS, half sine; Vibration: 2G peak, sine; 0.02G peak random
WARRANTY Three year: Access Points; Lifetime limited: Client Adapters
1 Dell’Oro Group, 1999
2 Requires optional accessory
Document Number: 317804-010
Intel® Core™2 Duo Processor,
Intel® Pentium® Dual Core
Processor, and Intel® Celeron®
Dual-Core Processor
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Supporting the:
- Intel® Core™2 Duo Processor E6000 Δ and E4000 Δ Series
- Intel® Pentium® Dual Core Processor E2000 Δ Series
- Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core Processor E1000Δ Series
December 2008
2 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
THIS DOCUMENT AND RELATED MATERIALS AND INFORMATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS, OR ANY WARRANTY OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF ANY PROPOSAL,
SPECIFICATION, OR SAMPLE. INTEL ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY ERRORS CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT AND HAS NO
LIABILITIES OR OBLIGATIONS FOR ANY DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT. Intel
products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, life sustaining, critical control or safety systems, or in nuclear facility
applications.
Intel Corporation may have patents or pending patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights
that relate to the presented subject matter. The furnishing of documents and other materials and information does not provide
any license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any such patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual
property rights.
Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Intel accepts no duty to
update specifications or product descriptions with information. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any
features or instructions marked “reserved” or “undefined.” Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no
responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them.
The hardware vendor remains solely responsible for the design, sale and functionality of its product, including any liability arising
from product infringement or product warranty. Intel provides this information for customer’s convenience only. Use at your own
risk. Intel accepts no liability for results if customer chooses at its discretion to implement these methods within its business
operations. Intel makes no representations or warranties regarding the accuracy or completeness of the information provided.
Copies of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel literature, may be
obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725, or by visiting http://www.intel.com .
The Intel® Core™2 Duo processor, Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor and Intel® Pentium® 4 processor may contain design
defects or errors known as errata, which may cause the product to deviate from published specifications. Current characterized
errata are available on request.
∆
Intel processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor numbers differentiate features within each processor
family, not across different processor families. Over time processor numbers will increment based on changes in clock, speed,
cache, FSB, or other features, and increments are not intended to represent proportional or quantitative increases in any
particular feature. Current roadmap processor number progression is not necessarily representative of future roadmaps. See
www.intel.com/products/processor_number for details.
Intel, Pentium, Core, and the Intel logo are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
Copyright © 2007–2008 Intel Corporation
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 3
Contents
1 Introduction ...................................................................................................11
1.1 Document Goals and Scope ...................................................................11
1.1.1 Importance of Thermal Management ..........................................11
1.1.2 Document Goals......................................................................11
1.1.3 Document Scope .....................................................................12
1.2 References ..........................................................................................13
1.3 Definition of Terms ...............................................................................13
2 Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information .........................................................15
2.1 Mechanical Requirements ......................................................................15
2.1.1 Processor Package ...................................................................15
2.1.2 Heatsink Attach ......................................................................17
2.2 Thermal Requirements ..........................................................................18
2.2.1 Processor Case Temperature .....................................................18
2.2.2 Thermal Profile .......................................................................19
2.2.3 TCONTROL..................................................................................20
2.3 Heatsink Design Considerations ..............................................................21
2.3.1 Heatsink Size..........................................................................22
2.3.2 Heatsink Mass.........................................................................22
2.3.3 Package IHS Flatness...............................................................23
2.3.4 Thermal Interface Material........................................................23
2.4 System Thermal Solution Considerations .................................................24
2.4.1 Chassis Thermal Design Capabilities...........................................24
2.4.2 Improving Chassis Thermal Performance ....................................24
2.4.3 Summary ...............................................................................25
2.5 System Integration Considerations..........................................................25
3 Thermal Metrology ..........................................................................................27
3.1 Characterizing Cooling Performance Requirements ....................................27
3.1.1 Example ................................................................................28
3.2 Processor Thermal Solution Performance Assessment ................................29
3.3 Local Ambient Temperature Measurement Guidelines.................................29
3.4 Processor Case Temperature Measurement Guidelines ...............................32
4 Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature .....................................33
4.1 Processor Power Dissipation ...................................................................33
4.2 Thermal Monitor Implementation ............................................................33
4.2.1 PROCHOT# Signal ...................................................................34
4.2.2 Thermal Control Circuit ............................................................34
4.2.3 Thermal Monitor 2 ...................................................................35
4.2.4 Operation and Configuration .....................................................36
4.2.5 On-Demand Mode ...................................................................37
4.2.6 System Considerations.............................................................37
4.2.7 Operating System and Application Software Considerations ...........38
4.2.8 THERMTRIP# Signal.................................................................38
4.2.9 Cooling System Failure Warning ................................................38
4 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
4.2.10 Digital Thermal Sensor.............................................................38
4.2.11 Platform Environmental Control Interface (PECI)..........................39
5 Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information ........41
5.1 Overview of the Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Reference Design ......41
5.1.1 Target Heatsink Performance ....................................................41
5.1.2 Acoustics ...............................................................................42
5.1.3 Effective Fan Curve .................................................................44
5.1.4 Voltage Regulator Thermal Management .....................................45
5.1.5 Altitude..................................................................................46
5.1.6 Reference Heatsink Thermal Validation .......................................46
5.2 Environmental Reliability Testing ............................................................46
5.2.1 Structural Reliability Testing .....................................................46
5.2.2 Power Cycling .........................................................................49
5.2.3 Recommended BIOS/CPU/Memory Test Procedures ......................49
5.3 Material and Recycling Requirements ......................................................49
5.4 Safety Requirements ............................................................................50
5.5 Geometric Envelope for Intel Reference BTX Thermal Module Assembly ........50
5.6 Preload and TMA Stiffness .....................................................................51
5.6.1 Structural Design Strategy........................................................51
5.6.2 TMA Preload versus Stiffness ....................................................51
6 ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information.......................................................55
6.1 ATX Reference Design Requirements .......................................................55
6.2 Validation Results for Reference Design ...................................................58
6.2.1 Heatsink Performance ..............................................................58
6.2.2 Acoustics ...............................................................................59
6.2.3 Altitude..................................................................................60
6.2.4 Heatsink Thermal Validation .....................................................60
6.3 Environmental Reliability Testing ............................................................61
6.3.1 Structural Reliability Testing .....................................................61
6.3.2 Power Cycling .........................................................................63
6.3.3 Recommended BIOS/CPU/Memory Test Procedures ......................63
6.4 Material and Recycling Requirements ......................................................63
6.5 Safety Requirements ............................................................................64
6.6 Geometric Envelope for Intel Reference ATX Thermal Mechanical Design ......64
6.7 Reference Attach Mechanism..................................................................65
6.7.1 Structural Design Strategy........................................................65
6.7.2 Mechanical Interface to the Reference Attach Mechanism ..............66
7 Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) .....................................................69
7.1 Intel® QST Algorithm ............................................................................69
7.1.1 Output Weighting Matrix ..........................................................70
7.1.2 Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) ........................................70
7.2 Board and System Implementation of Intel® QST ......................................72
7.3 Intel® QST Configuration and Tuning.......................................................74
7.4 Fan Hub Thermistor and Intel® QST ........................................................74
Appendix A LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading ......................................................................75
A.1 LGA775 Socket Heatsink Considerations ..................................................75
A.2 Metric for Heatsink Preload for ATX/uATX Designs Non-Compliant
with Intel® Reference Design .................................................................75
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 5
A.2.1 Heatsink Preload Requirement Limitations...................................75
A.2.2 Motherboard Deflection Metric Definition.....................................76
A.2.3 Board Deflection Limits ............................................................77
A.2.4 Board Deflection Metric Implementation Example.........................78
A.2.5 Additional Considerations .........................................................79
A.3 Heatsink Selection Guidelines.................................................................80
Appendix B Heatsink Clip Load Metrology ............................................................................81
B.1 Overview ............................................................................................81
B.2 Test Preparation...................................................................................81
B.2.1 Heatsink Preparation................................................................81
B.2.2 Typical Test Equipment ............................................................84
B.3 Test Procedure Examples.......................................................................84
B.3.1 Time-Zero, Room Temperature Preload Measurement ...................85
B.3.2 Preload Degradation under Bake Conditions ................................85
Appendix C Thermal Interface Management.........................................................................87
C.1 Bond Line Management .........................................................................87
C.2 Interface Material Area..........................................................................87
C.3 Interface Material Performance...............................................................87
Appendix D Case Temperature Reference Metrology..............................................................89
D.1 Objective and Scope .............................................................................89
D.2 Supporting Test Equipment....................................................................89
D.3 Thermal Calibration and Controls ............................................................91
D.4 IHS Groove .........................................................................................91
D.5 Thermocouple Attach Procedure .............................................................95
D.5.1 Thermocouple Conditioning and Preparation ................................95
D.5.2 Thermocouple Attachment to the IHS .........................................96
D.5.3 Solder Process ...................................................................... 101
D.5.4 Cleaning and Completion of Thermocouple Installation................ 105
D.6 Thermocouple Wire Management .......................................................... 108
Appendix E Legacy Fan Speed Control .............................................................................. 109
E.1 Thermal Solution Design ..................................................................... 109
E.1.1 Determine Thermistor Set Points ............................................. 109
E.1.2 Minimum Fan Speed Set Point ................................................. 110
E.2 Board and System Implementation ....................................................... 111
E.2.1 Choosing Fan Speed Control Settings ....................................... 111
E.3 Combining Thermistor and On-Die Thermal Sensor Control....................... 115
E.4 Interaction of Thermal Profile and TCONTROL ............................................. 115
Appendix F Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) System Thermal Considerations.................. 121
Appendix G Fan Performance for Reference Design ............................................................. 125
Appendix H Mechanical Drawings ..................................................................................... 128
Appendix I Intel Enabled Reference Solution Information.................................................... 146
6 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Figures
Figure 2-1. Package IHS Load Areas ..................................................................15
Figure 2-2. Processor Case Temperature Measurement Location ............................19
Figure 2-3. Example Thermal Profile ..................................................................20
Figure 3-1. Processor Thermal Characterization Parameter Relationships.................28
Figure 3-2. Locations for Measuring Local Ambient Temperature, Active ATX
Heatsink .......................................................................................31
Figure 3-3. Locations for Measuring Local Ambient Temperature, Passive Heatsink ...31
Figure 4-1. Thermal Monitor Control ..................................................................35
Figure 4-2. Thermal Monitor 2 Frequency and Voltage Ordering .............................36
Figure 4-3. TCONTROL for Digital Thermal Sensor................................................39
Figure 5-1. Effective TMA Fan Curves with Reference Extrusion..............................45
Figure 5-2. Random Vibration PSD ....................................................................47
Figure 5-3. Shock Acceleration Curve.................................................................48
Figure 5-4. Intel Type II TMA 65W Reference Design............................................50
Figure 5-5. Upward Board Deflection During Shock ..............................................51
Figure 5-6. Minimum Required Processor Preload to Thermal Module Assembly
Stiffness .......................................................................................52
Figure 5-7. Thermal Module Attach Pointes and Duct-to-SRM Interface Features ......53
Figure 6-1. D60188-001Reference Design – Exploded View ...................................56
Figure 6-2. E18764-001 Reference Design – Exploded View ..................................57
Figure 6-3. Bottom View of Copper Core Applied by TC-1996 Grease ......................57
Figure 6-4. Random Vibration PSD ....................................................................61
Figure 6-5. Shock Acceleration Curve.................................................................62
Figure 6-6. Upward Board Deflection During Shock ..............................................65
Figure 6-7. Reference Clip/Heatsink Assembly.....................................................66
Figure 6-8. Critical Parameters for Interfacing to Reference Clip.............................67
Figure 6-9. Critical Core Dimension ...................................................................67
Figure 7-1. Intel® QST Overview .......................................................................70
Figure 7-2. PID Controller Fundamentals ............................................................71
Figure 7-3. Intel® QST Platform Requirements ....................................................72
Figure 7-4. Example Acoustic Fan Speed Control Implementation...........................73
Figure 7-5. Digital Thermal Sensor and Thermistor ..............................................74
Figure 7-6. Board Deflection Definition ...............................................................77
Figure 7-7. Example: Defining Heatsink Preload Meeting Board Deflection Limit .......79
Figure 7-8. Load Cell Installation in Machined Heatsink Base Pocket – Bottom View ..82
Figure 7-9. Load Cell Installation in Machined Heatsink Base Pocket – Side View ......83
Figure 7-10. Preload Test Configuration..............................................................83
Figure 7-11. Omega Thermocouple ....................................................................90
Figure 7-12. 775-LAND LGA Package Reference Groove Drawing at 6 o’clock Exit .....92
Figure 7-13. 775-LAND LGA Package Reference Groove Drawing at 3 o’clock Exit
(Old Drawing) ..............................................................................93
Figure 7-14. IHS Groove at 6 o’clock Exit on the 775-LAND LGA Package ................94
Figure 7-15. IHS Groove at 6 o’clock Exit Orientation Relative to the LGA775
Socket ........................................................................................94
Figure 7-16. Inspection of Insulation on Thermocouple .........................................95
Figure 7-17. Bending the Tip of the Thermocouple ...............................................96
Figure 7-18. Securing Thermocouple Wires with Kapton* Tape Prior to Attach .........96
Figure 7-19. Thermocouple Bead Placement........................................................97
Figure 7-20. Position Bead on the Groove Step....................................................98
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 7
Figure 7-21. Detailed Thermocouple Bead Placement ...........................................98
Figure 7-22. Third Tape Installation ...................................................................98
Figure 7-23. Measuring Resistance Between Thermocouple and IHS .......................99
Figure 7-24. Applying Flux to the Thermocouple Bead ........................................ 100
Figure 7-25. Cutting Solder ............................................................................ 100
Figure 7-26. Positioning Solder on IHS ............................................................. 101
Figure 7-27. Solder Station Setup ................................................................... 102
Figure 7-28. View Through Lens at Solder Station.............................................. 103
Figure 7-29. Moving Solder back onto Thermocouple Bead .................................. 103
Figure 7-30. Removing Excess Solder .............................................................. 104
Figure 7-31. Thermocouple placed into groove .................................................. 105
Figure 7-32. Removing Excess Solder .............................................................. 105
Figure 7-33. Filling Groove with Adhesive ......................................................... 106
Figure 7-34. Application of Accelerant .............................................................. 106
Figure 7-35. Removing Excess Adhesive from IHS ............................................. 107
Figure 7-36. Finished Thermocouple Installation ................................................ 107
Figure 7-37. Thermocouple Wire Management................................................... 108
Figure 7-38. Thermistor Set Points .................................................................. 110
Figure 7-39. Example Fan Speed Control Implementation ................................... 111
Figure 7-40. Fan Speed Control....................................................................... 112
Figure 7-41. Temperature Range = 5 °C........................................................... 113
Figure 7-42. Temperature Range = 10 °C ......................................................... 114
Figure 7-43. On-Die Thermal Sensor and Thermistor .......................................... 115
Figure 7-44. FSC Definition Example................................................................ 117
Figure 7-45. System Airflow Illustration with System Monitor Point Area Identified . 122
Figure 7-46. Thermal sensor Location Illustration .............................................. 123
Figure 7-47. ATX/µATX Motherboard Keep-out Footprint Definition and Height
Restrictions for Enabling Components - Sheet 1 .............................. 129
Figure 7-48. ATX/µATX Motherboard Keep-out Footprint Definition and Height
Restrictions for Enabling Components - Sheet 2 .............................. 130
Figure 7-49. ATX/µATX Motherboard Keep-out Footprint Definition and Height
Restrictions for Enabling Components - Sheet 3 .............................. 131
Figure 7-50. BTX Thermal Module Keep Out Volumetric – Sheet 1 ........................ 132
Figure 7-51. BTX Thermal Module Keep Out Volumetric – Sheet 2 ........................ 133
Figure 7-52. BTX Thermal Module Keep Out Volumetric – Sheet 3 ........................ 134
Figure 7-53. BTX Thermal Module Keep Out Volumetric – Sheet 4 ........................ 135
Figure 7-54. BTX Thermal Module Keep Out Volumetric – Sheet 5 ........................ 136
Figure 7-55. ATX Reference Clip – Sheet 1........................................................ 137
Figure 7-56. ATX Reference Clip - Sheet 2 ........................................................ 138
Figure 7-57. Reference Fastener - Sheet 1........................................................ 139
Figure 7-58. Reference Fastener - Sheet 2........................................................ 140
Figure 7-59. Reference Fastener - Sheet 3........................................................ 141
Figure 7-60. Reference Fastener - Sheet 4........................................................ 142
Figure 7-61. Intel® D60188-001 Reference Solution Assembly ............................. 143
Figure 7-62. Intel® D60188-001 Reference Solution Heatsink .............................. 144
Figure 7-63. Intel® E18764-001 Reference Solution Assembly ............................. 145
8 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Tables
Table 2-1. Heatsink Inlet Temperature of Intel Reference Thermal Solutions............24
Table 2-2. Heatsink Inlet Temperature of Intel Boxed Processor Thermal Solutions ...24
Table 5-1. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Type II Reference TMA
Performance ...................................................................................42
Table 5-2. Acoustic Targets ..............................................................................43
Table 5-3. VR Airflow Requirements...................................................................46
Table 5-4. Processor Preload Limits ...................................................................52
Table 6-1. D60188-001 Reference Heatsink Performance ......................................58
Table 6-2. E18764-001 Reference Heatsink Performance ......................................58
Table 6-3. Acoustic Results for ATX Reference Heatsink (D60188-001) ...................59
Table 6-4. Acoustic Results for ATX Reference Heatsink (E18764-001)....................59
Table 7-1. Board Deflection Configuration Definitions ...........................................76
Table 7-2. Typical Test Equipment .....................................................................84
Table 7-3. FSC Definitions .............................................................................. 116
Table 7-4. ATX FSC Settings ........................................................................... 118
Table 7-5. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Fan Speed Control Settings ......... 119
Table 7-6. Fan Electrical Performance Requirements .......................................... 125
Table 7-7. Intel® Representative Contact for Licensing Information of BTX
Reference Design .......................................................................... 146
Table 7-8. D60188-001 Reference Thermal Solution Providers ............................. 146
Table 7-9. E18764-001 Reference Thermal Solution Providers ............................. 147
Table 7-10. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Reference Thermal Solution
Providers .................................................................................... 148
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 9
Revision History
Revision
Number
Description Revision Date
-001 • Initial release. July 2007
-002 • Added Intel® Core™2 Duo Desktop processor E4400 at Tc-max of
73.3 °C.
August 2007
-003 • Added Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2180 specifications August 2007
-004 • Added Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2160 and E2140 at Tcmax
of 73.3 °C
September
2007
-005 • Added Intel® Core™2 Duo Desktop processor E4600 October 2007
-006 • Added Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2200 specifications December 2007
-007 • Added Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core processor E1000Δ
series
• Updated reference design Intel P/N, supplier P/N and heatsink drawing
• Updated Intel® Boxed Processor Thermal Solutions inlet ambient
temperature assumption
January 2008
-008 • Added Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2220 specifications
• Added Intel® Core™2 Duo Desktop processor E4700 specifications
March 2008
-009 • Added Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core processor E1400 April 2008
-010 • Added Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core processor E1500 December 2008
§
10 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Introduction
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 11
1 Introduction
1.1 Document Goals and Scope
1.1.1 Importance of Thermal Management
The objective of thermal management is to ensure that the temperatures of all
components in a system are maintained within their functional temperature range.
Within this temperature range, a component is expected to meet its specified
performance. Operation outside the functional temperature range can degrade system
performance, cause logic errors or cause component and/or system damage.
Temperatures exceeding the maximum operating limit of a component may result in
irreversible changes in the operating characteristics of this component.
In a system environment, the processor temperature is a function of both system and
component thermal characteristics. The system level thermal constraints consist of the
local ambient air temperature and airflow over the processor as well as the physical
constraints at and above the processor. The processor temperature depends in
particular on the component power dissipation, the processor package thermal
characteristics, and the processor thermal solution.
All of these parameters are affected by the continued push of technology to increase
processor performance levels and packaging density (more transistors). As operating
frequencies increase and packaging size decreases, the power density increases while
the thermal solution space and airflow typically become more constrained or remains
the same within the system. The result is an increased importance on system design
to ensure that thermal design requirements are met for each component, including
the processor, in the system.
1.1.2 Document Goals
Depending on the type of system and the chassis characteristics, new system and
component designs may be required to provide adequate cooling for the processor.
The goal of this document is to provide an understanding of these thermal
characteristics and discuss guidelines for meeting the thermal requirements imposed
on single processor systems using the Intel® Core™2 Duo processor E6000 and E4000
series, Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series, and Intel® Celeron® DualCore
processor E1000Δ
series.
The concepts given in this document are applicable to any system form factor. Specific
examples used will be the Intel enabled reference solution for ATX/uATX systems. See
the applicable BTX form factor reference documents to design a thermal solution for
that form factor.
Introduction
12 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
1.1.3 Document Scope
This design guide supports the following processors:
• Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C applies to
Intel® Core™2 Duo processors E6700, E6600, E6420 and E6320
• Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 72.0 °C applies to
Intel® Core™2 Duo processors E6850, E6750, E6550 and E6540
• Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache of Tc-max of 72.0 °C applies to
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor E4700
• Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 61.4 °C applies to
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor E6000 series of processors E6400 and E6300 and
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor E4000 series of the processors E4400 and E4300
• Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C applies to
the Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processors E2160 and E2140
• Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C applies to
Intel® Core™2 Duo processors E6400, E4600, E4500, E4400, and E4300
• Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C applies to
the Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processors E2220, E2200, E2180, E2160, and
E2140
• Intel® Celeron® dual-core processor E1000 Series of Tc-max of 73.3 °C applies to
the Intel® Celeron ® dual-core processor E1200, E1400, and E1500
In this document when a reference is made to “the processor” it is intended that this
includes all the processors supported by this document. If needed for clarity, the
specific processor will be listed.
In this document, when a reference is made to the “the reference design” it is
intended that this includes all ATX reference designs (D60188-001 and E18764-001)
supported by this document. If needed for clarify, the specific reference design will be
listed.
In this document, when a reference is made to “the Datasheet”, the reader should
refer to the Intel® Core™2 Extreme Processor X6800 and Intel® Core™2 Duo Desktop
Processor E6000 and E4000 Sequences Datasheet, Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core
Desktop Processor E2000 Series Datasheet, or Intel® Celeron ® Dual-Core Processor
E1000 Series Datasheet. If needed for clarity, the specific processor datasheet will be
referenced.
Chapter 2 of this document discusses package thermal mechanical requirements to
design a thermal solution for the processor in the context of personal computer
applications. Chapter 3 discusses the thermal solution considerations and metrology
recommendations to validate a processor thermal solution. Chapter 4 addresses the
benefits of the processor’s integrated thermal management logic for thermal design.
Chapter 5 gives information on the Intel reference thermal solution for the processor
in BTX platform. Chapter 6 gives information on the Intel reference thermal solution
for the processor in ATX platform. Chapter 7 discusses the implementation of acoustic
fan speed control.
The physical dimensions and thermal specifications of the processor that are used in
this document are for illustration only. Refer to the datasheet for the product
dimensions, thermal power dissipation and maximum case temperature. In case of
conflict, the data in the datasheet supersedes any data in this document.
Introduction
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 13
1.2 References
Material and concepts available in the following documents may be beneficial when
reading this document.
Document Location
Intel® Core™2 Extreme Processor X6800 and Intel® Core™2 Duo
Desktop Processor E6000 and E4000 Series Datasheet
http://intel.com
/design/processor/datashts/3132
78.htm
Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core Desktop Processor E2000 Series
Datasheet
www.intel.com//design/processor
/datashts/316981.htm
Intel® Celeron ® Dual-Core Processor E1000 Series Datasheet http://www.intel.com/design/proc
essor/datashts/318924.htm
LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide http://intel.com/design/
Pentium4/guides/ 302666.htm
uATX SFF Design Guidance http://www.formfactors.org/
Fan Specification for 4-wire PWM Controlled Fans http://www.formfactors.org/
ATX Thermal Design Suggestions http://www.formfactors.org/
microATX Thermal Design Suggestions http://www.formfactors.org/
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) System Design Guide http://www.formfactors.org/
Thermally Advantaged Chassis version 1.1 http://www.intel.com/go/chassis/
1.3 Definition of Terms
Term Description
TA
The measured ambient temperature locally surrounding the processor. The ambient
temperature should be measured just upstream of a passive heatsink or at the fan inlet
for an active heatsink.
TC
The case temperature of the processor, measured at the geometric center of the topside
of the IHS.
TE
The ambient air temperature external to a system chassis. This temperature is usually
measured at the chassis air inlets.
TS
Heatsink temperature measured on the underside of the heatsink base, at a location
corresponding to TC.
TC-MAX
The maximum case temperature as specified in a component specification.
ΨCA
Case-to-ambient thermal characterization parameter (psi). A measure of thermal
solution performance using total package power. Defined as (TC – TA) / Total Package
Power.
Note: Heat source must be specified for Ψ measurements.
Introduction
14 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Term Description
ΨCS
Case-to-sink thermal characterization parameter. A measure of thermal interface
material performance using total package power. Defined as
(TC – TS) / Total Package Power.
Note: Heat source must be specified for Ψ measurements.
ΨSA
Sink-to-ambient thermal characterization parameter. A measure of heatsink thermal
performance using total package power. Defined as
(TS – TA) / Total Package Power.
Note: Heat source must be specified for Ψ measurements.
TIM
Thermal Interface Material: The thermally conductive compound between the heatsink
and the processor case. This material fills the air gaps and voids, and enhances the
transfer of the heat from the processor case to the heatsink.
PMAX The maximum power dissipated by a semiconductor component.
TDP Thermal Design Power: a power dissipation target based on worst-case applications.
Thermal solutions should be designed to dissipate the thermal design power.
IHS Integrated Heat Spreader: a thermally conductive lid integrated into a processor
package to improve heat transfer to a thermal solution through heat spreading.
LGA775
Socket
The surface mount socket designed to accept the processors in the 775–Land LGA
package.
ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface.
Bypass
Bypass is the area between a passive heatsink and any object that can act to form a
duct. For this example, it can be expressed as a dimension away from the outside
dimension of the fins to the nearest surface.
Thermal
Monitor
A feature on the processor that attempts to keep the processor die temperature within
factory specifications.
TCC
Thermal Control Circuit: Thermal Monitor uses the TCC to reduce die temperature by
lowering effective processor frequency when the die temperature has exceeded its
operating limits.
TDIODE Temperature reported from the on-die thermal diode.
FSC
Fan Speed Control: Thermal solution that includes a variable fan speed which is driven
by a PWM signal and uses the on-die thermal diode as a reference to change the duty
cycle of the PWM signal.
TCONTROL TCONTROL is the specification limit for use with the on-die thermal diode.
PWM
Pulse width modulation is a method of controlling a variable speed fan. The enabled 4
wire fans use the PWM duty cycle % from the fan speed controller to modulate the fan
speed.
Health
Monitor
Component
Any standalone or integrated component that is capable of reading the processor
temperature and providing the PWM signal to the 4 pin fan header.
BTX Balanced Technology Extended.
TMA Thermal Module Assembly. The heatsink, fan and duct assembly for the BTX thermal
solution
§
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 15
2 Processor Thermal/Mechanical
Information
2.1 Mechanical Requirements
2.1.1 Processor Package
The processors covered in the document are packaged in a 775-Land LGA package
that interfaces with the motherboard via a LGA775 socket. Refer to the datasheet for
detailed mechanical specifications.
The processor connects to the motherboard through a land grid array (LGA) surface
mount socket. The socket contains 775 contacts arrayed about a cavity in the center
of the socket with solder balls for surface mounting to the motherboard. The socket is
named LGA775 socket. A description of the socket is in the LGA775 Socket Mechanical
Design Guide.
The package includes an integrated heat spreader (IHS) that is shown in Figure 2-1
for illustration only. Refer to the processor datasheet for further information. In case
of conflict, the package dimensions in the processor datasheet supersedes dimensions
provided in this document.
Figure 2-1. Package IHS Load Areas
Top Surface of IHS
to install a heatsink
IHS Step
to interface w ith LGA775
Socket Load Plate
Substrate Top Surface of IHS
to install a heatsink
IHS Step
to interface w ith LGA775
Socket Load Plate
Substrate
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
16 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
The primary function of the IHS is to transfer the non-uniform heat distribution from
the die to the top of the IHS, out of which the heat flux is more uniform and spread
over a larger surface area (not the entire IHS area). This allows more efficient heat
transfer out of the package to an attached cooling device. The top surface of the IHS
is designed to be the interface for contacting a heatsink.
The IHS also features a step that interfaces with the LGA775 socket load plate, as
described in LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide. The load from the load plate is
distributed across two sides of the package onto a step on each side of the IHS. It is
then distributed by the package across all of the contacts. When correctly actuated,
the top surface of the IHS is above the load plate allowing proper installation of a
heatsink on the top surface of the IHS. After actuation of the socket load plate, the
seating plane of the package is flush with the seating plane of the socket. Package
movement during socket actuation is along the Z direction (perpendicular to
substrate) only. Refer to the LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide for further
information about the LGA775 socket.
The processor package has mechanical load limits that are specified in the processor
datasheet. The specified maximum static and dynamic load limits should not be
exceeded during their respective stress conditions. These include heatsink installation,
removal, mechanical stress testing, and standard shipping conditions.
• When a compressive static load is necessary to ensure thermal performance of the
thermal interface material between the heatsink base and the IHS, it should not
exceed the corresponding specification given in the processor datasheet.
• When a compressive static load is necessary to ensure mechanical performance, it
should remain in the minimum/maximum range specified in the processor
datasheet
• The heatsink mass can also generate additional dynamic compressive load to the
package during a mechanical shock event. Amplification factors due to the impact
force during shock must be taken into account in dynamic load calculations. The
total combination of dynamic and static compressive load should not exceed the
processor datasheet compressive dynamic load specification during a vertical
shock. For example, with a 0.550 kg [1.2 lb] heatsink, an acceleration of 50G
during an 11 ms trapezoidal shock with an amplification factor of 2 results in
approximately a 539 N [117 lbf] dynamic load on the processor package. If a
178 N [40 lbf] static load is also applied on the heatsink for thermal performance
of the thermal interface material the processor package could see up to a 717 N
[156 lbf]. The calculation for the thermal solution of interest should be compared
to the processor datasheet specification.
No portion of the substrate should be used as a load- bearing surface.
Finally, the processor datasheet provides package handling guidelines in terms of
maximum recommended shear, tensile and torque loads for the processor IHS relative
to a fixed substrate. These recommendations should be followed in particular for
heatsink removal operations.
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 17
2.1.2 Heatsink Attach
2.1.2.1 General Guidelines
There are no features on the LGA775 socket to directly attach a heatsink: a
mechanism must be designed to attach the heatsink directly to the motherboard. In
addition to holding the heatsink in place on top of the IHS, this mechanism plays a
significant role in the robustness of the system in which it is implemented, in
particular:
• Ensuring thermal performance of the thermal interface material (TIM) applied
between the IHS and the heatsink. TIMs based on phase change materials are
very sensitive to applied pressure: the higher the pressure, the better the initial
performance. TIMs such as thermal greases are not as sensitive to applied
pressure. Designs should consider a possible decrease in applied pressure over
time due to potential structural relaxation in retention components.
• Ensuring system electrical, thermal, and structural integrity under shock and
vibration events. The mechanical requirements of the heatsink attach mechanism
depend on the mass of the heatsink and the level of shock and vibration that the
system must support. The overall structural design of the motherboard and the
system have to be considered when designing the heatsink attach mechanism.
Their design should provide a means for protecting LGA775 socket solder joints.
One of the strategies for mechanical protection of the socket is to use a preload
and high stiffness clip. This strategy is implemented by the reference design and
described in Section 6.7.
Note: Package pull-out during mechanical shock and vibration is constrained by the LGA775
socket load plate (refer to the LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide for further
information).
2.1.2.2 Heatsink Clip Load Requirement
The attach mechanism for the heatsink developed to support the processor should
create a static preload on the package between 18 lbf and 70 lbf throughout the life
of the product for designs compliant with the reference design assumptions:
• 72 mm x 72 mm mounting hole span for ATX (refer to Figure 7-47).
• TMA preload vs. stiffness for BTX within the limits shown on Figure 5-6.
• And no board stiffening device (backing plate, chassis attach, etc.).
The minimum load is required to protect against fatigue failure of socket solder joint in
temperature cycling.
It is important to take into account potential load degradation from creep over time
when designing the clip and fastener to the required minimum load. This means that,
depending on clip stiffness, the initial preload at beginning of life of the product may
be significantly higher than the minimum preload that must be met throughout the life
of the product. For additional guidelines on mechanical design, in particular on designs
departing from the reference design assumptions refer to Appendix A.
For clip load metrology guidelines, refer to Appendix B.
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
18 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
2.1.2.3 Additional Guidelines
In addition to the general guidelines given above, the heatsink attach mechanism for
the processor should be designed to the following guidelines:
• Holds the heatsink in place under mechanical shock and vibration events and
applies force to the heatsink base to maintain desired pressure on the thermal
interface material. Note that the load applied by the heatsink attach mechanism
must comply with the package specifications described in the processor datasheet.
One of the key design parameters is the height of the top surface of the processor
IHS above the motherboard. The IHS height from the top of board is expected to
vary from 7.517 mm to 8.167 mm. This data is provided for information only, and
should be derived from:
⎯ The height of the socket seating plane above the motherboard after reflow,
given in the LGA775 Socket Mechanical Design Guide with its tolerances.
⎯ The height of the package, from the package seating plane to the top of the
IHS, and accounting for its nominal variation and tolerances that are given in
the corresponding processor datasheet.
• Engages easily, and if possible, without the use of special tools. In general, the
heatsink is assumed to be installed after the motherboard has been installed into
the chassis.
• Minimizes contact with the motherboard surface during installation and actuation
to avoid scratching the motherboard.
2.2 Thermal Requirements
Refer to the datasheet for the processor thermal specifications. The majority of
processor power is dissipated through the IHS. There are no additional components,
e.g., BSRAMs, which generate heat on this package. The amount of power that can be
dissipated as heat through the processor package substrate and into the socket is
usually minimal.
The thermal limits for the processor are the Thermal Profile and TCONTROL. The Thermal
Profile defines the maximum case temperature as a function of power being
dissipated. TCONTROL is a specification used in conjunction with the temperature
reported by the digital thermal sensor and a fan speed control method. Designing to
these specifications allows optimization of thermal designs for processor performance
and acoustic noise reduction.
2.2.1 Processor Case Temperature
For the processor, the case temperature is defined as the temperature measured at
the geometric center of the package on the surface of the IHS. For illustration,
Figure 2-2 shows the measurement location for a 37.5 mm x 37.5 mm
[1.474 in x 1.474 in] 775-Land LGA processor package with a 28.7 mm x 28.7 mm
[1.13 in x 1.13 in] IHS top surface. Techniques for measuring the case temperature
are detailed in Section 3.4.
Note: In case of conflict, the package dimensions in the processor datasheet supersedes
dimensions provided in this document.
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 19
Figure 2-2. Processor Case Temperature Measurement Location
37.5 mm
Measure TC at this point
(geometric center of the package)
37.5 mm
37.5 mm
Measure TC at this point
(geometric center of the package)
37.5 mm
2.2.2 Thermal Profile
The Thermal Profile defines the maximum case temperature as a function of processor
power dissipation. The TDP and Maximum Case Temperature are defined as the
maximum values of the thermal profile. By design the thermal solutions must meet
the thermal profile for all system operating conditions and processor power levels.
Refer to the processor datasheet for further information.
While the thermal profile provides flexibility for ATX /BTX thermal design based on its
intended target thermal environment, thermal solutions that are intended to function
in a multitude of systems and environments need to be designed for the worst-case
thermal environment. The majority of ATX /BTX platforms are targeted to function in
an environment that will have up to a 35 °C ambient temperature external to the
system.
Note: For ATX platforms, an active air-cooled design, assumed be used in ATX Chassis, with
a fan installed at the top of the heatsink equivalent to the reference design (see
Chapter 6) should be designed to manage the processor TDP at an inlet temperature
of 35 °C + 5 °C = 40 °C.
For BTX platforms, a front-to-back cooling design equivalent to Intel BTX TMA Type II
reference design (see the Chapter 5) should be designed to manage the processor TDP
at an inlet temperature of 35 °C + 0.5 °C = 35.5 °C.
The slope of the thermal profile was established assuming a generational
improvement in thermal solution performance of the reference design. For an example
of Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C in ATX
platform, its improvement is about 16% over the Intel reference design (D60188-
001). This performance is expressed as the slope on the thermal profile and can be
thought of as the thermal resistance of the heatsink attached to the processor, ΨCA
(Refer to
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
20 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Section 3.1). The intercept on the thermal profile assumes a maximum ambient
operating condition that is consistent with the available chassis solutions.
To determine compliance to the thermal profile, a measurement of the actual
processor power dissipation is required. The measured power is plotted on the
Thermal Profile to determine the maximum case temperature. Using the example in
Figure 2-3 for the Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C
dissipating 50 W, the maximum case temperature is 56.2 °C. See the datasheet for
the thermal profile.
Figure 2-3. Example Thermal Profile
2.2.3 TCONTROL
TCONTROL defines the maximum operating temperature for the digital thermal sensor
when the thermal solution fan speed is being controlled by the digital thermal sensor.
The TCONTROL parameter defines a very specific processor operating region where fan
speed can be reduced. This allows the system integrator a method to reduce the
acoustic noise of the processor cooling solution, while maintaining compliance to the
processor thermal specification.
Note: The TCONTROL value for the processor is relative to the Thermal Control Circuit (TCC)
activation set point which will be seen as 0 via the digital thermal sensor. As a result
the TCONTROL value will always be a negative number. See Chapter 4 for the
discussion the thermal management logic and features and Chapter 7 on Intel® Quiet
System Technology (Intel® QST).
The value of TCONTROL is driven by a number of factors. One of the most significant of
these is the processor idle power. As a result a processor with a high (closer to 0 )
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 21
TCONTROL will dissipate more power than a part with lower value (farther from 0, e.g.,
more negative number) of TCONTROL when running the same application.
This is achieved in part by using the ΨCA vs. RPM and RPM vs. Acoustics (dBA)
performance curves from the Intel enabled thermal solution. A thermal solution
designed to meet the thermal profile would be expected to provide similar acoustic
performance of different parts with potentially different TCONTROL values.
The value for TCONTROL is calculated by the system BIOS based on values read from a
factory configured processor register. The result can be used to program a fan speed
control component. See the appropriate processor datasheet for further details on
reading the register and calculating TCONTROL.
See Chapter 7, Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST), for details on
implementing a design using TCONTROL and the Thermal Profile.
2.3 Heatsink Design Considerations
To remove the heat from the processor, three basic parameters should be considered:
• The area of the surface on which the heat transfer takes place. Without any
enhancements, this is the surface of the processor package IHS. One method used
to improve thermal performance is by attaching a heatsink to the IHS. A heatsink
can increase the effective heat transfer surface area by conducting heat out of the
IHS and into the surrounding air through fins attached to the heatsink base.
• The conduction path from the heat source to the heatsink fins. Providing a
direct conduction path from the heat source to the heatsink fins and selecting
materials with higher thermal conductivity typically improves heatsink
performance. The length, thickness, and conductivity of the conduction path from
the heat source to the fins directly impact the thermal performance of the
heatsink. In particular, the quality of the contact between the package IHS and
the heatsink base has a higher impact on the overall thermal solution performance
as processor cooling requirements become stricter. Thermal interface material
(TIM) is used to fill in the gap between the IHS and the bottom surface of the
heatsink, and thereby improve the overall performance of the stack-up (IHS-TIMHeatsink).
With extremely poor heatsink interface flatness or roughness, TIM may
not adequately fill the gap. The TIM thermal performance depends on its thermal
conductivity as well as the pressure applied to it. Refer to Section 2.3.4 and
Appendix C for further information on TIM and on bond line management between
the IHS and the heatsink base.
• The heat transfer conditions on the surface on which heat transfer takes
place. Convective heat transfer occurs between the airflow and the surface
exposed to the flow. It is characterized by the local ambient temperature of the
air, TA, and the local air velocity over the surface. The higher the air velocity over
the surface, and the cooler the air, the more efficient is the resulting cooling. The
nature of the airflow can also enhance heat transfer via convection. Turbulent flow
can provide improvement over laminar flow. In the case of a heatsink, the surface
exposed to the flow includes in particular the fin faces and the heatsink base.
Active heatsinks typically incorporate a fan that helps manage the airflow through
the heatsink.
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
22 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Passive heatsink solutions require in-depth knowledge of the airflow in the chassis.
Typically, passive heatsinks see lower air speed. These heatsinks are therefore
typically larger (and heavier) than active heatsinks due to the increase in fin surface
required to meet a required performance. As the heatsink fin density (the number of
fins in a given cross-section) increases, the resistance to the airflow increases: it is
more likely that the air travels around the heatsink instead of through it, unless air
bypass is carefully managed. Using air-ducting techniques to manage bypass area can
be an effective method for controlling airflow through the heatsink.
2.3.1 Heatsink Size
The size of the heatsink is dictated by height restrictions for installation in a system
and by the real estate available on the motherboard and other considerations for
component height and placement in the area potentially impacted by the processor
heatsink. The height of the heatsink must comply with the requirements and
recommendations published for the motherboard form factor of interest. Designing a
heatsink to the recommendations may preclude using it in system adhering strictly to
the form factor requirements, while still in compliance with the form factor
documentation.
For the ATX/microATX form factor, it is recommended to use:
• The ATX motherboard keep-out footprint definition and height restrictions for
enabling components, defined for the platforms designed with the LGA775 socket
in Appendix H of this design guide.
• The motherboard primary side height constraints defined in the ATX Specification
V2.1 and the microATX Motherboard Interface Specification V1.1 found at
http://www.formfactors.org/.
The resulting space available above the motherboard is generally not entirely available
for the heatsink. The target height of the heatsink must take into account airflow
considerations (for fan performance for example) as well as other design
considerations (air duct, etc.).
For BTX form factor, it is recommended to use:
• The BTX motherboard keep-out footprint definitions and height restrictions for
enabling components for platforms designed with the LGA77 socket in Appendix H
of this design guide.
• An overview of other BTX system considerations for thermal solutions can be
obtained in the latest version of the Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) System
Design Guide found at http://www.formfactors.org/.
2.3.2 Heatsink Mass
With the need to push air cooling to better performance, heatsink solutions tend to
grow larger (increase in fin surface) resulting in increased mass. The insertion of
highly thermally conductive materials like copper to increase heatsink thermal
conduction performance results in even heavier solutions. As mentioned in
Section 2.1, the heatsink mass must take into consideration the package and socket
load limits, the heatsink attach mechanical capabilities, and the mechanical shock and
vibration profile targets. Beyond a certain heatsink mass, the cost of developing and
implementing a heatsink attach mechanism that can ensure the system integrity
under the mechanical shock and vibration profile targets may become prohibitive.
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 23
The recommended maximum heatsink mass for the ATX thermal solution is 550g. This
mass includes the fan and the heatsink only. The attach mechanism (clip, fasteners,
etc.) are not included.
The mass limit for BTX heatsinks that use Intel reference design structural ingredients
is 900 grams. The BTX structural reference component strategy and design is
reviewed in depth in the latest version of the Balanced Technology Extended (BTX)
System Design Guide.
Note: The 550g mass limit for ATX solutions is based on the capabilities of the reference
design components that retain the heatsink to the board and apply the necessary
preload. Any reuse of the clip and fastener in derivative designs should not exceed
550g. ATX Designs that have a mass of greater than 550g should analyze the preload
as discussed in Appendix A and retention limits of the fastener.
Note: The chipset components on the board are affected by processor heatsink mass.
Exceeding these limits may require the evaluation of the chipset for shock and
vibration.
2.3.3 Package IHS Flatness
The package IHS flatness for the product is specified in the datasheet and can be used
as a baseline to predict heatsink performance during the design phase.
Intel recommends testing and validating heatsink performance in full mechanical
enabling configuration to capture any impact of IHS flatness change due to combined
socket and heatsink loading. While socket loading alone may increase the IHS
warpage, the heatsink preload redistributes the load on the package and improves the
resulting IHS flatness in the enabled state.
2.3.4 Thermal Interface Material
Thermal interface material application between the processor IHS and the heatsink
base is generally required to improve thermal conduction from the IHS to the
heatsink. Many thermal interface materials can be pre-applied to the heatsink base
prior to shipment from the heatsink supplier and allow direct heatsink attach, without
the need for a separate thermal interface material dispense or attach process in the
final assembly factory.
All thermal interface materials should be sized and positioned on the heatsink base in
a way that ensures the entire processor IHS area is covered. It is important to
compensate for heatsink-to-processor attach positional alignment when selecting the
proper thermal interface material size.
When pre-applied material is used, it is recommended to have a protective application
tape over it. This tape must be removed prior to heatsink installation.
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
24 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
2.4 System Thermal Solution Considerations
2.4.1 Chassis Thermal Design Capabilities
The Intel reference thermal solutions and Intel Boxed Processor thermal solutions
assume that the chassis delivers a maximum TA at the inlet of the processor fan
heatsink. The following tables show the TA requirements for the reference solutions
and Intel Boxed Processor thermal solutions.
Table 2-1. Heatsink Inlet Temperature of Intel Reference Thermal Solutions
ATX D60188-
001
ATX E18764-001 BTX Type II
Heatsink Inlet
Temperature
40 °C 40 °C 35.5 °C
NOTE:
1. Intel reference designs (D60188-001 and E18764-001) are assumed be used in the
chassis where expected the temperature rise is 5 °C.
Table 2-2. Heatsink Inlet Temperature of Intel Boxed Processor Thermal Solutions
Boxed Processor for Intel® Core™2 Duo Processor
E6000 and E4000 Series, Intel® Pentium® Dual Core
Processor E2000 Series, and Intel® Celeron® DualCore
Processor E1000 Series
Heatsink Inlet
Temperature
40 °C
NOTE:
1. Boxed Processor thermal solutions for ATX assume the use of the thermally advantaged
chassis (refer to Thermally Advantaged Chassis version 1.1 for Thermally Advantaged
Chassis thermal and mechanical requirements).
2.4.2 Improving Chassis Thermal Performance
The heat generated by components within the chassis must be removed to provide an
adequate operating environment for both the processor and other system
components. Moving air through the chassis brings in air from the external ambient
environment and transports the heat generated by the processor and other system
components out of the system. The number, size and relative position of fans and
vents determine the chassis thermal performance, and the resulting ambient
temperature around the processor. The size and type (passive or active) of the
thermal solution and the amount of system airflow can be traded off against each
other to meet specific system design constraints. Additional constraints are board
layout, spacing, component placement, acoustic requirements and structural
considerations that limit the thermal solution size. For more information, refer to the
Performance ATX Desktop System Thermal Design Suggestions or Performance
microATX Desktop System Thermal Design Suggestions or Balanced Technology
Extended (BTX) System Design Guide documents available on the
http://www.formfactors.org/ web site.
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 25
In addition to passive heatsinks, fan heatsinks and system fans are other solutions
that exist for cooling integrated circuit devices. For example, ducted blowers, heat
pipes and liquid cooling are all capable of dissipating additional heat. Due to their
varying attributes, each of these solutions may be appropriate for a particular system
implementation.
To develop a reliable, cost-effective thermal solution, thermal characterization and
simulation should be carried out at the entire system level, accounting for the thermal
requirements of each component. In addition, acoustic noise constraints may limit the
size, number, placement, and types of fans that can be used in a particular design.
To ease the burden on thermal solutions, the Thermal Monitor feature and associated
logic have been integrated into the silicon of the processor. By taking advantage of
the Thermal Monitor feature, system designers may reduce thermal solution cost by
designing to TDP instead of maximum power. Thermal Monitor attempts to protect the
processor during sustained workload above TDP. Implementation options and
recommendations are described in Chapter 4.
2.4.3 Summary
In summary, considerations in heatsink design include:
• The local ambient temperature TA at the heatsink, which is a function of chassis
design.
• The thermal design power (TDP) of the processor, and the corresponding
maximum TC as calculated from the thermal profile. These parameters are usually
combined in a single lump cooling performance parameter, ΨCA (case to air
thermal characterization parameter). More information on the definition and the
use of ΨCA is given Sections 3.1.
• Heatsink interface to IHS surface characteristics, including flatness and roughness.
• The performance of the thermal interface material used between the heatsink and
the IHS.
• The required heatsink clip static load, between 18 lbf to 70 lbf throughout the life
of the product (Refer to Section 2.1.2.2 for further information).
• Surface area of the heatsink.
• Heatsink material and technology.
• Volume of airflow over the heatsink surface area.
• Development of airflow entering and within the heatsink area.
• Physical volumetric constraints placed by the system
2.5 System Integration Considerations
Manufacturing with Intel® Components using 775–Land LGA Package and LGA775
Socket documentation provides Best Known Methods for all aspects LGA775 socket
based platforms and systems manufacturing. Of particular interest for package and
heatsink installation and removal is the System Assembly module. A video covering
system integration is also available. Contact your Intel field sales representative for
further information.
Processor Thermal/Mechanical Information
26 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
§
Thermal Metrology
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 27
3 Thermal Metrology
This chapter discusses guidelines for testing thermal solutions, including measuring
processor temperatures. In all cases, the thermal engineer must measure power
dissipation and temperature to validate a thermal solution. To define the performance
of a thermal solution the “thermal characterization parameter”, Ψ (“psi”) will be used.
3.1 Characterizing Cooling Performance
Requirements
The idea of a “thermal characterization parameter”, Ψ (“psi”), is a convenient way to
characterize the performance needed for the thermal solution and to compare thermal
solutions in identical situations (same heat source and local ambient conditions). The
thermal characterization parameter is calculated using total package power.
Note: Heat transfer is a three-dimensional phenomenon that can rarely be accurately and
easily modeled by a single resistance parameter like Ψ.
The case-to-local ambient thermal characterization parameter value (ΨCA) is used as a
measure of the thermal performance of the overall thermal solution that is attached to
the processor package. It is defined by the following equation, and measured in units
of °C/W:
ΨCA = (TC – TA) / PD (Equation 1)
Where:
ΨCA = Case-to-local ambient thermal characterization parameter (°C/W)
TC = Processor case temperature (°C)
TA = Local ambient temperature in chassis at processor (°C)
PD = Processor total power dissipation (W) (assumes all power dissipates
through the IHS)
The case-to-local ambient thermal characterization parameter of the processor, ΨCA, is
comprised of ΨCS, the thermal interface material thermal characterization parameter,
and of ΨSA, the sink-to-local ambient thermal characterization parameter:
ΨCA = ΨCS + ΨSA (Equation 2)
Where:
ΨCS = Thermal characterization parameter of the thermal interface material
(°C/W)
ΨSA = Thermal characterization parameter from heatsink-to-local ambient
(°C/W)
Thermal Metrology
28 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
ΨCS is strongly dependent on the thermal conductivity and thickness of the TIM
between the heatsink and IHS.
ΨSA is a measure of the thermal characterization parameter from the bottom of the
heatsink to the local ambient air. ΨSA is dependent on the heatsink material, thermal
conductivity, and geometry. It is also strongly dependent on the air velocity through
the fins of the heatsink.
Figure 3-1 illustrates the combination of the different thermal characterization
parameters.
Figure 3-1. Processor Thermal Characterization Parameter Relationships
TIM
TS
TA
ΨCA
LGA775 Socket
Processor
IHS
System Board
TC
Heatsink
TIM
TS
TA
ΨCA
LGA775 Socket
Processor
IHS
System Board
TC
Heatsink
3.1.1 Example
The cooling performance, ΨCA, is then defined using the principle of thermal
characterization parameter described above:
• The case temperature TC-MAX and thermal design power TDP given in the processor
datasheet.
• Define a target local ambient temperature at the processor, TA.
Since the processor thermal profile applies to all processor frequencies, it is important
to identify the worst case (lowest ΨCA) for a targeted chassis characterized by TA to
establish a design strategy.
The following provides an illustration of how one might determine the appropriate
performance targets. The example power and temperature numbers used here are not
related to any specific Intel processor thermal specifications, and are for illustrative
purposes only.
Thermal Metrology
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 29
Assume the TDP, as listed in the datasheet, is 100 W and the maximum case
temperature from the thermal profile for 100 W is 67 °C. Assume as well that the
system airflow has been designed such that the local ambient temperature is 38 °C.
Then the following could be calculated using equation 1 (shown on previous page):
ΨCA = (TC,- TA) / TDP = (67 – 38) / 100 = 0.29 °C/W
To determine the required heatsink performance, a heatsink solution provider would
need to determine ΨCS performance for the selected TIM and mechanical load
configuration. If the heatsink solution were designed to work with a TIM material
performing at ΨCS ≤ 0.10 °C/W, solving for equation 2 from above, the performance of
the heatsink would be:
ΨSA = ΨCA − ΨCS = 0.29 − 0.10 = 0.19 °C/W
3.2 Processor Thermal Solution Performance
Assessment
Thermal performance of a heatsink should be assessed using a thermal test vehicle
(TTV) provided by Intel. The TTV is a stable heat source that the user can make
accurate power measurement, whereas processors can introduce additional factors
that can impact test results. In particular, the power level from actual processors
varies significantly, even when running the maximum power application provided by
Intel, due to variances in the manufacturing process. The TTV provides consistent
power and power density for thermal solution characterization and results can be
easily translated to real processor performance. Accurate measurement of the power
dissipated by an actual processor is beyond the scope of this document.
Once the thermal solution is designed and validated with the TTV, it is strongly
recommended to verify functionality of the thermal solution on real processors and on
fully integrated systems. The Intel maximum power application enables steady power
dissipation on a processor to assist in this testing. This maximum power application is
provided by Intel.
3.3 Local Ambient Temperature Measurement
Guidelines
The local ambient temperature TA is the temperature of the ambient air surrounding
the processor. For a passive heatsink, TA is defined as the heatsink approach air
temperature; for an actively cooled heatsink, it is the temperature of inlet air to the
active cooling fan.
It is worthwhile to determine the local ambient temperature in the chassis around the
processor to understand the effect it may have on the case temperature.
TA is best measured by averaging temperature measurements at multiple locations in
the heatsink inlet airflow. This method helps reduce error and eliminate minor spatial
variations in temperature. The following guidelines are meant to enable accurate
determination of the localized air temperature around the processor during system
thermal testing.
Thermal Metrology
30 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
For active heatsinks, it is important to avoid taking measurement in the dead flow
zone that usually develops above the fan hub and hub spokes. Measurements should
be taken at four different locations uniformly placed at the center of the annulus
formed by the fan hub and the fan housing to evaluate the uniformity of the air
temperature at the fan inlet. The thermocouples should be placed approximately
3 mm to 8 mm [0.1 to 0.3 in] above the fan hub vertically and halfway between the
fan hub and the fan housing horizontally as shown in the ATX heatsink in Figure 3-2
(avoiding the hub spokes). Using an open bench to characterize an active heatsink can
be useful, and usually ensures more uniform temperatures at the fan inlet. However,
additional tests that include a solid barrier above the test motherboard surface can
help evaluate the potential impact of the chassis. This barrier is typically clear
Plexiglas*, extending at least 100 mm [4 in] in all directions beyond the edge of the
thermal solution. Typical distance from the motherboard to the barrier is
81 mm [3.2 in]. For even more realistic airflow, the motherboard should be populated
with significant elements like memory cards, graphic card, and chipset heatsink. If a
barrier is used, the thermocouple can be taped directly to the barrier with a clear tape
at the horizontal location as previously described, half way between the fan hub and
the fan housing. If a variable speed fan is used, it may be useful to add a
thermocouple taped to the barrier above the location of the temperature sensor used
by the fan to check its speed setting against air temperature. When measuring TA in a
chassis with a live motherboard, add-in cards, and other system components, it is
likely that the TA measurements will reveal a highly non-uniform temperature
distribution across the inlet fan section.
For passive heatsinks, thermocouples should be placed approximately 13 mm to
25 mm [0.5 to 1.0 in] away from processor and heatsink as shown in Figure 3-3. The
thermocouples should be placed approximately 51 mm [2.0 in] above the baseboard.
This placement guideline is meant to minimize the effect of localized hot spots from
baseboard components.
Note: Testing an active heatsink with a variable speed fan can be done in a thermal chamber
to capture the worst-case thermal environment scenarios. Otherwise, when doing a
bench top test at room temperature, the fan regulation prevents the heatsink from
operating at its maximum capability. To characterize the heatsink capability in the
worst-case environment in these conditions, it is then necessary to disable the fan
regulation and power the fan directly, based on guidance from the fan supplier.
Thermal Metrology
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 31
Figure 3-2. Locations for Measuring Local Ambient Temperature, Active ATX Heatsink
Note: Drawing Not to Scale
Figure 3-3. Locations for Measuring Local Ambient Temperature, Passive Heatsink
Note: Drawing Not to Scale
Thermal Metrology
32 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
3.4 Processor Case Temperature Measurement
Guidelines
To ensure functionality and reliability, the processor is specified for proper operation
when TC is maintained at or below the thermal profile as listed in the datasheet. The
measurement location for TC is the geometric center of the IHS. Figure 2-2 shows the
location for TC measurement.
Special care is required when measuring TC to ensure an accurate temperature
measurement. Thermocouples are often used to measure TC. Before any temperature
measurements are made, the thermocouples must be calibrated, and the complete
measurement system must be routinely checked against known standards. When
measuring the temperature of a surface that is at a different temperature from the
surrounding local ambient air, errors could be introduced in the measurements. The
measurement errors could be caused by poor thermal contact between the junction of
the thermocouple and the surface of the integrated heat spreader, heat loss by
radiation, convection, by conduction through thermocouple leads, or by contact
between the thermocouple cement and the heatsink base.
Appendix D defines a reference procedure for attaching a thermocouple to the IHS of
a 775-Land LGA processor package for TC measurement. This procedure takes into
account the specific features of the 775-Land LGA package and of the LGA775 socket
for which it is intended.
§
Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 33
4 Thermal Management Logic and
Thermal Monitor Feature
4.1 Processor Power Dissipation
An increase in processor operating frequency not only increases system performance,
but also increases the processor power dissipation. The relationship between
frequency and power is generalized in the following equation:
P = CV2
F (where P = power, C = capacitance, V = voltage, F = frequency). From this
equation, it is evident that power increases linearly with frequency and with the
square of voltage. In the absence of power saving technologies, ever increasing
frequencies will result in processors with power dissipations in the hundreds of watts.
Fortunately, there are numerous ways to reduce the power consumption of a
processor, and Intel is aggressively pursuing low power design techniques. For
example, decreasing the operating voltage, reducing unnecessary transistor activity,
and using more power efficient circuits can significantly reduce processor power
consumption.
An on-die thermal management feature called Thermal Monitor is available on the
processor. It provides a thermal management approach to support the continued
increases in processor frequency and performance. By using a highly accurate on-die
temperature sensing circuit and a fast acting Thermal Control Circuit (TCC), the
processor can rapidly initiate thermal management control. The Thermal Monitor can
reduce cooling solution cost, by allowing thermal designs to target TDP.
The processor also supports an additional power reduction capability known as
Thermal Monitor 2 described in Section 4.2.3.
4.2 Thermal Monitor Implementation
The Thermal Monitor consists of the following components:
• A highly accurate on-die temperature sensing circuit
• A bi-directional signal (PROCHOT#) that indicates if the processor has exceeded
its maximum temperature or can be asserted externally to activate the Thermal
Control Circuit (TCC) (see Section 4.2.1 for more details on user activation of TCC
via PROCHOT# signal)
• A Thermal Control Circuit that will attempt to reduce processor temperature by
rapidly reducing power consumption when the on-die temperature sensor indicates
that it has exceeded the maximum operating point.
• Registers to determine the processor thermal status.
Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature
34 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
4.2.1 PROCHOT# Signal
The primary function of the PROCHOT# signal is to provide an external indication the
processor has reached the TCC activation temperature. While PROCHOT# is asserted,
the TCC will be active. Assertion of the PROCHOT# signal is independent of any
register settings within the processor. It is asserted any time the processor die
temperature reaches the trip point.
PROCHOT# can be configured via BIOS as an output or bi-directional signal. As an
output, PROCHOT# will go active when the processor temperature of either core
reaches the TCC activation temperature. As an input, assertion of PROCHOT# will
activate the TCC for both cores. The TCC will remain active until the system deasserts
PROCHOT#.
The temperature at which the PROCHOT# signal goes active is individually calibrated
during manufacturing. Once configured, the processor temperature at which the
PROCHOT# signal is asserted is not re-configurable.
One application of the Bi-directional PROCHOT# is for the thermal protection of
voltage regulators (VR). System designers can implement a circuit to monitor the VR
temperature and activate the TCC when the temperature limit of the VR is reached. By
asserting PROCHOT# (pulled-low) which activates the TCC, the VR can cool down as a
result of reduced processor power consumption. Bi-directional PROCHOT# can allow
VR thermal designs to target maximum sustained current instead of maximum
current. Systems should still provide proper cooling for the VR, and rely on bidirectional
PROCHOT# signal only as a backup in case of system cooling failure.
Note: A thermal solution designed to meet the thermal profile specifications should rarely
experience activation of the TCC as indicated by the PROCHOT# signal going active.
4.2.2 Thermal Control Circuit
The Thermal Control Circuit portion of the Thermal Monitor must be enabled for the
processor to operate within specifications. The Thermal Monitor’s TCC, when active,
will attempt to lower the processor temperature by reducing the processor power
consumption. There are two methods by which TCC can reduce processor power
dissipation. These methods are referred to as Thermal Monitor 1 (TM1) and Thermal
Monitor 2 (TM2).
4.2.2.1 Thermal Monitor
In the original implementation of thermal monitor this is done by changing the duty
cycle of the internal processor clocks, resulting in a lower effective frequency. When
active, the TCC turns the processor clocks off and then back on with a predetermined
duty cycle. The duty cycle is processor specific, and is fixed for a particular processor.
The maximum time period the clocks are disabled is ~3 μs. This time period is
frequency dependent and higher frequency processors will disable the internal clocks
for a shorter time period. Figure 4-1 illustrates the relationship between the internal
processor clocks and PROCHOT#.
Performance counter registers, status bits in model specific registers (MSRs), and the
PROCHOT# output pin are available to monitor the Thermal Monitor behavior.
Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 35
Figure 4-1. Thermal Monitor Control
PROCHOT#
Resultant
internal clock
Normal clock
Internal clock
Duty cycle
control
4.2.3 Thermal Monitor 2
The second method of power reduction is TM2. TM2 provides an efficient means of
reducing the power consumption within the processor and limiting the processor
temperature.
When TM2 is enabled, and a high temperature situation is detected, the enhanced TCC
will be activated. The enhanced TCC causes the processor to adjust its operating
frequency (by dropping the bus-to-core multiplier to its minimum available value) and
input voltage identification (VID) value. This combination of reduced frequency and
VID results in a reduction in processor power consumption.
A processor enabled for TM2 includes two operating points, each consisting of a
specific operating frequency and voltage. The first operating point represents the
normal operating condition for the processor.
The second operating point consists of both a lower operating frequency and voltage.
When the TCC is activated, the processor automatically transitions to the new
frequency. This transition occurs very rapidly (on the order of 5 microseconds). During
the frequency transition, the processor is unable to service any bus requests, all bus
traffic is blocked. Edge-triggered interrupts will be latched and kept pending until the
processor resumes operation at the new frequency.
Once the new operating frequency is engaged, the processor will transition to the new
core operating voltage by issuing a new VID code to the voltage regulator. The
voltage regulator must support VID transitions in order to support TM2. During the
voltage change, it will be necessary to transition through multiple VID codes to reach
the target operating voltage. Each step will be one VID table entry (i.e. 12.5 mV
steps). The processor continues to execute instructions during the voltage transition.
Operation at the lower voltage reduces the power consumption of the processor,
providing a temperature reduction.
Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature
36 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Once the processor has sufficiently cooled, and a minimum activation time has
expired, the operating frequency and voltage transition back to the normal system
operating point. Transition of the VID code will occur first, in order to insure proper
operation once the processor reaches its normal operating frequency. Refer to
Figure 4-2 for an illustration of this ordering.
Figure 4-2. Thermal Monitor 2 Frequency and Voltage Ordering
VID
Frequency
Temperature TTM2
f
MAX
f
TM2
VID
VIDTM2
PROCHOT#
Time
Refer to the datasheet for further information on TM2.
4.2.4 Operation and Configuration
Thermal Monitor must be enabled to ensure proper processor operation.
The Thermal Control Circuit feature can be configured and monitored in a number of
ways. OEMs are required to enable the Thermal Control Circuit while using various
registers and outputs to monitor the processor thermal status. The Thermal Control
Circuit is enabled by the BIOS setting a bit in an MSR (model specific register).
Enabling the Thermal Control Circuit allows the processor to attempt to maintain a
safe operating temperature without the need for special software drivers or interrupt
handling routines. When the Thermal Control Circuit has been enabled, processor
power consumption will be reduced after the thermal sensor detects a high
temperature, i.e. PROCHOT# assertion. The Thermal Control Circuit and PROCHOT#
transitions to inactive once the temperature has been reduced below the thermal trip
point, although a small time-based hysteresis has been included to prevent multiple
PROCHOT# transitions around the trip point. External hardware can monitor
PROCHOT# and generate an interrupt whenever there is a transition from active-toinactive
or inactive-to-active. PROCHOT# can also be configured to generate an
internal interrupt which would initiate an OEM supplied interrupt service routine.
Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 37
Regardless of the configuration selected, PROCHOT# will always indicate the thermal
status of the processor.
The power reduction mechanism of thermal monitor can also be activated manually
using an “on-demand” mode. Refer to Section 4.2.5 for details on this feature.
4.2.5 On-Demand Mode
For testing purposes, the thermal control circuit may also be activated by setting bits
in the ACPI MSRs. The MSRs may be set based on a particular system event (e.g., an
interrupt generated after a system event), or may be set at any time through the
operating system or custom driver control thus forcing the thermal control circuit on.
This is referred to as “on-demand” mode. Activating the thermal control circuit may be
useful for thermal solution investigations or for performance implication studies. When
using the MSRs to activate the on-demand clock modulation feature, the duty cycle is
configurable in steps of 12.5%, from 12.5% to 87.5%.
For any duty cycle, the maximum time period the clocks are disabled is ~3 μs. This
time period is frequency dependent, and decreases as frequency increases. To achieve
different duty cycles, the length of time that the clocks are disabled remains constant,
and the time period that the clocks are enabled is adjusted to achieve the desired
ratio. For example, if the clock disable period is 3 µs, and a duty cycle of ¼ (25%) is
selected, the clock on time would be reduced to approximately 1 μs [on time (1 μs) ÷
total cycle time (3 + 1) μs = ¼ duty cycle]. Similarly, for a duty cycle of 7/8 (87.5%),
the clock on time would be extended to 21 μs [21 ÷ (21 + 3) = 7/8 duty cycle].
In a high temperature situation, if the thermal control circuit and ACPI MSRs
(automatic and on-demand modes) are used simultaneously, the fixed duty cycle
determined by automatic mode would take precedence.
Note: On-demand mode can not activate the power reduction mechanism of Thermal
Monitor 2
4.2.6 System Considerations
Intel requires the Thermal Monitor and Thermal Control Circuit to be enabled for all
processors. The thermal control circuit is intended to protect against short term
thermal excursions that exceed the capability of a well designed processor thermal
solution. Thermal Monitor should not be relied upon to compensate for a thermal
solution that does not meet the thermal profile up to the thermal design power (TDP).
Each application program has its own unique power profile, although the profile has
some variability due to loop decisions, I/O activity and interrupts. In general, compute
intensive applications with a high cache hit rate dissipate more processor power than
applications that are I/O intensive or have low cache hit rates.
The processor TDP is based on measurements of processor power consumption while
running various high power applications. This data is used to determine those
applications that are interesting from a power perspective. These applications are then
evaluated in a controlled thermal environment to determine their sensitivity to
activation of the thermal control circuit. This data is used to derive the TDP targets
published in the processor datasheet.
Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature
38 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
A system designed to meet the thermal profile specification published in the processor
datasheet greatly reduces the probability of real applications causing the thermal
control circuit to activate under normal operating conditions. Systems that do not
meet these specifications could be subject to more frequent activation of the thermal
control circuit depending upon ambient air temperature and application power profile.
Moreover, if a system is significantly under designed, there is a risk that the Thermal
Monitor feature will not be capable of reducing the processor power and temperature
and the processor could shutdown and signal THERMTRIP#.
For information regarding THERMTRIP#, refer to the processor datasheet and to
Section 4.2.8 of this Thermal Design Guidelines.
4.2.7 Operating System and Application Software
Considerations
The Thermal Monitor feature and its thermal control circuit work seamlessly with ACPI
compliant operating systems. The Thermal Monitor feature is transparent to
application software since the processor bus snooping, ACPI timer, and interrupts are
active at all times.
4.2.8 THERMTRIP# Signal
In the event of a catastrophic cooling failure, the processor will automatically shut
down when the silicon temperature has exceeded the TCC activation temperature by
approximately 20 to 25 °C. At this point the system bus signal THERMTRIP# goes
active and power must be removed from the processor. THERMTRIP# activation is
independent of processor activity and does not generate any bus cycles. Refer to the
processor datasheet for more information about THERMTRIP#.
The temperature where the THERMTRIP# signal goes active is individually calibrated
during manufacturing and once configuration can not be changed.
4.2.9 Cooling System Failure Warning
It may be useful to use the PROCHOT# signal as an indication of cooling system
failure. Messages could be sent to the system administrator to warn of the cooling
failure, while the thermal control circuit would allow the system to continue
functioning or allow a normal system shutdown. If no thermal management action is
taken, the silicon temperature may exceed the operating limits, causing THERMTRIP#
to activate and shut down the processor. Regardless of the system design
requirements or thermal solution ability, the Thermal Monitor feature must still be
enabled to ensure proper processor operation.
4.2.10 Digital Thermal Sensor
Multiple digital thermal sensors can be implemented within the package without
adding a pair of signal pins per sensor as required with the thermal diode. The digital
thermal sensor is easier to place in thermally sensitive locations of the processor than
the thermal diode. This is achieved due to a smaller foot print and decreased
sensitivity to noise. Since the DTS is factory set on a per-part basis there is no need
for the health monitor components to be updated at each processor family
Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 39
The processor introduces the Digital Thermal Sensor (DTS) as the on-die sensor to use
for fan speed control (FSC). The DTS will eventually replace the on-die thermal diode
used in pervious products. The processor will have both the DTS and thermal diode
enabled. The DTS is monitoring the same sensor that activates the TCC (see
Section 4.2.2). Readings from the DTS are relative to the activation of the TCC. The
DTS value where TCC activation occurs is 0 (zero).
A TCONTROL value will be provided for use with DTS. The usage model for TCONTROL with
the DTS is the same as with the on-die thermal diode:
• If the Digital thermal sensor is less than TCONTROL, the fan speed can be reduced.
• If the Digital thermal sensor is greater than or equal to TCONTROL, then TC must be
maintained at or below the Thermal Profile for the measured power dissipation.
The calculation of TCONTROL is slightly different from previous product. There is no base
value to sum with the TOFFSET located in the same MSR as used in previous processors.
The BIOS only needs to read the TOFFSET MSR and provide this value to the fan speed
control device.
Figure 4-3. TCONTROL for Digital Thermal Sensor
Digital Thermometer Temperature
30
20
10
70
60
50
40
30
20
0
70
60
50
40
Tcontrol= 66
Tcontrol= -10
Fan Speed
Temperature
Time
Power
Thermal Diode Temperature
30
20
10
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
70
60
50
40
30
20
0
70
60
50
40
30
20
0
70
60
50
40
Tcontrol= 66
Tcontrol
Fan Speed
Temperature
Time
Power
Digital Thermometer Temperature
30
20
10
70
60
50
40
30
20
0
70
60
50
40
Tcontrol= 66
Tcontrol= -10
Fan Speed
Temperature
Time
Power
Thermal Diode Temperature
30
20
10
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
70
60
50
40
30
20
0
70
60
50
40
30
20
0
70
60
50
40
Tcontrol= 66
Tcontrol
Fan Speed
Temperature
Time
Power
Note: The processor has both the DTS and thermal diode. The TCONTROL in the MSR is relevant
only to the DTS.
4.2.11 Platform Environmental Control Interface (PECI)
The PECI interface is a proprietary single wire bus between the processor and the
chipset or other health monitoring device. At this time the digital thermal sensor is the
only data being transmitted. For an overview of the PECI interface see PECI Feature
Set Overview. For additional information on the PECI, see the datasheet.
The PECI bus is available on pin G5 of the LGA 775 socket. Intel chipsets beginning
with the ICH8 have included PECI host controller. The PECI interface and the
Manageability Engine are key elements to the Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel®
Thermal Management Logic and Thermal Monitor Feature
40 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
QST), see Chapter 7 and the Intel® Quiet System Technology Configuration and
Tuning Manual.
Intel has worked with many vendors that provide fan speed control devices to provide
PECI host controllers. Please consult the local representative for your preferred vendor
for their product plans and availability.
§
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 41
5 Balanced Technology Extended
(BTX) Thermal/Mechanical
Design Information
5.1 Overview of the Balanced Technology Extended
(BTX) Reference Design
The reference thermal module assembly is a Type II BTX compliant design and is
compliant with the reference BTX motherboard keep-out and height recommendations
defined Section 6.6.
The solution comes as an integrated assembly. An isometric view of the assembly is
provided Figure 5-4.
5.1.1 Target Heatsink Performance
Table 5-1 provides the target heatsink performance for the processor with the BTX
boundary conditions. The results will be evaluated using the test procedure described
in Section 5.2.
The table also includes a TA assumption of 35.5 °C for the Intel reference thermal
solution at the processor fan heatsink inlet discussed Section 3.3. The analysis
assumes a uniform external ambient temperature to the chassis of 35 °C across the
fan inlet, resulting in a temperature rise, TR, of 0.5 °C. Meeting TA and ΨCA targets can
maximize processor performance (refer to Sections 2.2, 2.4. and Chapter 4).
Minimizing TR, can lead to improved acoustics.
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
42 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Table 5-1. Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Type II Reference TMA Performance
Processor Thermal
Requirements,
Ψca
(Mean + 3σ)
TA Assumption
Notes
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with
4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C
0.38 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,2
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with
4 MB / 2 MB cache at Tc-max of
72.0 °C
0.56 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,2,3
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with
2 MB cache at Tc-max of 61.4 °C
0.40 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,2
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with
2 MB cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C
0.58 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,2,3
Intel® Pentium® Dual Core
processor E2000 series at Tc-max
of 61.4 °C
0.40 °C/W 35.5 °C 1
Intel® Pentium® Dual Core
processor E2000 series at Tc-max
of 73.3 °C
0.58 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,3
Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core Processor
E1000 series at Tc-max of 73.3° C
0.58 °C/W 35.5 °C 1,3
NOTES:
1. Performance targets (Ψ ca) as measured with a live processor at TDP.
2. The difference in Ψ ca between the Intel® Core™2 Duo 4 MB and 2 MB is due to a slight
difference in the die size.
3. BTX Type II reference TMA is the higher thermal solution performance of the Intel®
Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB / 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 72.0 °C, Intel® Core™2 Duo
processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C, Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor
E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C, and Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core Processor E1000
Series at Tc-max of 73.3° C. Customers can generate an improvement in cost saving
for these processors to likely use the designs with the cheater TIM, the cheater fan and
the lower fin density extrusion.
5.1.2 Acoustics
To optimize acoustic emission by the fan heatsink assembly, the Type II reference
design implements a variable speed fan. A variable speed fan allows higher thermal
performance at higher fan inlet temperatures (TA) and the appropriate thermal
performance with improved acoustics at lower fan inlet temperatures. Using the
example in Table 5-2 for the Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max
of 60.1 °C the required fan speed necessary to meet thermal specifications can be
controlled by the fan inlet temperature and should comply with the following
requirements.
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 43
Table 5-2. Acoustic Targets
Fan
Speed
RPM
Thermistor
Set Point
Acoustic Thermal
Requirements,
Ψca
Notes
~ 5300 High
TA ≥ 35 °C
≤ 6.4 BA 0.38 °C/W Case 1:
Thermal Design Power
Maximum fan speed
100% PWM duty cycle
~ 2500 Low
TA = 23 °C
No Target
Defined
0.56 °C/W Case 2
Thermal Design Power
System (PSU, HDD, TMA)
Fan speed limited by the
fan hub thermistor
~ 1400 Low
TA = 23 °C
≤ 3.4 BA ~0.87 °C/W Case 3
50% Thermal Design
Power
TMA Only
~ 1400 Low
TA = 23 °C
≤ 4.0 BA ~0.87 °C/W Case 3
50% Thermal Design
Power
System (PSU, HDD, TMA)
NOTES:
1. Acoustic performance is defined in terms of measured sound power (LwA) as defined in
ISO 9296 standard, and measured according to ISO 7779.
2. Acoustic testing will be for the TMA only when installed in a BTX S2 chassis for Case 1
and 3
3. Acoustics testing for Case 2 will be system level in the same a BTX S2 reference chassis
and commercially available power supply. Acoustic data for Case 2 will be provided in
the validation report but this condition is not a target for the design. The acoustic model
is predicting that the power supply fan will be the acoustic limiter.
4. The fan speeds (RPM) are estimates for one of the two reference fans and will be
adjusted to meet thermal performance targets then acoustic target during validation.
The designer should identify the fan speed required to meet the effective fan curve
shown in Section 5.1.3
While the fan hub thermistor helps optimize acoustics at high processor workloads by
adapting the maximum fan speed to support the processor thermal profile, additional
acoustic improvements can be achieved at lower processor workload by using the
TCONTROL specifications described in Section 2.2.3. Intel’s recommendation is to use the
fan with 4 Wire PWM Controlled to implement fan speed control capability based the
digital thermal sensor. Refer to Chapter 7 for further details.
Note: Appendix G gives detailed fan performance for the Intel reference thermal solutions
with 4 Wire PWM Controlled fan.
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
44 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
5.1.3 Effective Fan Curve
The TMA must fulfill the processor cooling requirements shown in Table 5-1 when it is
installed in a functional BTX system. When installed in a system, the TMA must
operate against the backpressure created by the chassis impedance (due to vents,
bezel, peripherals, etc…) and will operate at lower net airflow than if it were tested
outside of the system on a bench top or open air environment. Therefore an allowance
must be made to accommodate or predict the reduction in Thermal Module
performance due to the reduction in heatsink airflow from chassis impedance. For this
reason, it is required that the Thermal Module satisfy the prescribed ΨCA requirements
when operating against an impedance that is characteristic for BTX platforms.
Because of the coupling between TMA thermal performance and system impedance,
the designer should understand the TMA effective fan curve. This effective fan curve
represents the performance of the fan component AND the impedance of the stator,
heatsink, duct, and flow partitioning devices. The BTX system integrator will be able to
evaluate a TMA based on the effective fan curve of the assembly and the airflow
impedance of their target system.
Note: It is likely that at some operating points the fans speed will be driven by the system
airflow requirements and not the processor thermal limits.
Figure 5-1 shows the effective fan curve for the reference design TMA. These curves
are based on analysis. The boundary conditions used are the S2 6.9L reference
chassis, the reference TMA with the flow portioning device, extrusion and an AVC Type
II fan geometry.
When selecting a fan for use in the TMA care should be taken that similar effective fan
curves can be achieved. Final verification requires the overlay of the Type II MASI
curve to ensure thermal compliance.
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 45
Figure 5-1. Effective TMA Fan Curves with Reference Extrusion
0.000
0.050
0.100
0.150
0.200
0.250
0.300
0.350
0.400
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0
Airflow (cfm)
dP (in. H2O)
Reference TMA @ 5300 RPM
Reference TMA @ 2500 RPM
Reference TMA @ 1200 RPM
5.1.4 Voltage Regulator Thermal Management
The BTX TMA is integral to the cooling of the processor voltage regulator (VR). The
reference design TMA will include a flow partitioning device to ensure an appropriate
airflow balance between the TMA and the VR. In validation the need for this
component will be evaluated.
The BTX thermal management strategy relies on the Thermal Module to provide
effective cooling for the voltage regulator (VR) chipset and system memory
components on the motherboard. The Thermal Module is required to have features
that allow for airflow to bypass the heatsink and flow over the VR region on both the
primary and secondary sides of the board. The following requirements apply to VR
cooling.
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
46 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Table 5-3. VR Airflow Requirements
Item Target
Minimum VR bypass airflow for
775_VR_CONFIG_06 processors
2.4 CFM
NOTES:
1. This is the recommended airflow rate that should be delivered to the VR when the VR
power is at a maximum in order to support the 775_VR_CONFIG_06 processors at TDP
power dissipation and the chassis external environment temperature is at 35 ºC. Less
airflow is necessary when the VR power is not at a maximum or if the external ambient
temperature is less than 35 ºC.
2. This recommended airflow rate is based on the requirements for the Intel® 965 Express
Chipset Family.
5.1.5 Altitude
The reference TMA will be evaluated at sea level. However, many companies design
products that must function reliably at high altitude, typically 1,500 m [5,000 ft] or
more. Air-cooled temperature calculations and measurements at sea level must be
adjusted to take into account altitude effects like variation in air density and overall
heat capacity. This often leads to some degradation in thermal solution performance
compared to what is obtained at sea level, with lower fan performance and higher
surface temperatures. The system designer needs to account for altitude effects in the
overall system thermal design to make sure that the TC requirement for the processor
is met at the targeted altitude.
5.1.6 Reference Heatsink Thermal Validation
The Intel reference heatsink will be validated within the specific boundary conditions
based on the methodology described Section 5.2.
Testing is done in a BTX chassis at ambient lab temperature. The test results, for a
number of samples, will be reported in terms of a worst-case mean + 3σ value for
thermal characterization parameter using real processors (based on the thermal test
vehicle correction factors).
5.2 Environmental Reliability Testing
5.2.1 Structural Reliability Testing
Structural reliability tests consist of unpackaged, system -level vibration and shock
tests of a given thermal solution in the assembled state. The thermal solution should
meet the specified thermal performance targets after these tests are conducted;
however, the test conditions outlined here may differ from your own system
requirements.
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 47
5.2.1.1 Random Vibration Test Procedure
Recommended performance requirement for a system:
• Duration: 10 min/axis, 3 axes
• Frequency Range: 5 Hz to 500 Hz
5 Hz @ .001 g2/Hz to 20 Hz @ 0.01 g2/Hz (slope up)
20 Hz to 500 Hz @ 0.01 g2/Hz (flat)
• Power Spectral Density (PSD) Profile: 2.2 G RMS
Figure 5-2. Random Vibration PSD
Vibration System Level
0.0001
0.001
0.01
0.1
1 10 100 1000
Hz
g2/Hz
+ 3 dB Control Limit
- 3 dB Control Limit
5.2.1.2 Shock Test Procedure
Recommended performance requirement for a system:
•Quantity: 2 drops for + and - directions in each of 3 perpendicular axes (i.e., total
12 drops).
•Profile: 25 G trapezoidal waveform
225 in/sec minimum velocity change. (systems > 20 lbm)
250 in/sec minimum velocity change. (systems < 20 lbm)
•Setup: Mount sample system on tester.
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
48 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Figure 5-3. Shock Acceleration Curve
5.2.1.2.1 Recommended Test Sequence
Each test sequence should start with components (i.e., motherboard, heatsink
assembly, etc.) that have never been previously submitted to any reliability testing.
The test sequence should always start with a visual inspection after assembly, and
BIOS/CPU/Memory test (refer to Section 6.3.3).
Prior to the mechanical shock & vibration test, the units under test should be
preconditioned for 72 hours at 45 ºC. The purpose is to account for load relaxation
during burn-in stage.
The stress test should be followed by a visual inspection and then BIOS/CPU/Memory
test.
5.2.1.2.2 Post-Test Pass Criteria
The post-test pass criteria are:
1. No significant physical damage to the heatsink attach mechanism (including such
items as clip and motherboard fasteners).
2. Heatsink must remain attached to the motherboard.
3. Heatsink remains seated and its bottom remains mated flatly against IHS surface.
No visible gap between the heatsink base and processor IHS. No visible tilt of the
heatsink with respect to its attach mechanism.
4. No signs of physical damage on motherboard surface due to impact of heatsink or
heatsink attach mechanism.
5. No visible physical damage to the processor package.
6. Successful BIOS/Processor/memory test of post-test samples.
7. Thermal compliance testing to demonstrate that the case temperature
specification can be met.
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 49
5.2.2 Power Cycling
Thermal performance degradation due to TIM degradation is evaluated using power
cycling testing. The test is defined by 7500 cycles for the case temperature from room
temperature (~23 ºC) to the maximum case temperature defined by the thermal
profile at TDP.
5.2.3 Recommended BIOS/CPU/Memory Test Procedures
This test is to ensure proper operation of the product before and after environmental
stresses, with the thermal mechanical enabling components assembled. The test shall
be conducted on a fully operational motherboard that has not been exposed to any
battery of tests prior to the test being considered.
Testing setup should include the following components, properly assembled and/or
connected:
• Appropriate system motherboard
• Processor
• All enabling components, including socket and thermal solution parts
• Power supply
• Disk drive
• Video card
• DIMM
• Keyboard
• Monitor
The pass criterion is that the system under test shall successfully complete the
checking of BIOS, basic processor functions and memory, without any errors.
5.3 Material and Recycling Requirements
Material shall be resistant to fungal growth. Examples of non-resistant materials
include cellulose materials, animal and vegetable based adhesives, grease, oils, and
many hydrocarbons. Synthetic materials such as PVC formulations, certain
polyurethane compositions (e.g., polyester and some polyethers), plastics which
contain organic fillers of laminating materials, paints, and varnishes also are
susceptible to fungal growth. If materials are not fungal growth resistant, then MILSTD-810E,
Method 508.4 must be performed to determine material performance.
Material used shall not have deformation or degradation in a temperature life test.
Any plastic component exceeding 25 grams must be recyclable per the European Blue
Angel recycling standards.
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
50 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
5.4 Safety Requirements
Heatsink and attachment assemblies shall be consistent with the manufacture of units
that meet the safety standards:
• UL Recognition-approved for flammability at the system level. All mechanical and
thermal enabling components must be a minimum UL94V-2 approved.
• CSA Certification. All mechanical and thermal enabling components must have
CSA certification.
• All components (in particular the heatsink fins) must meet the test requirements
of UL1439 for sharp edges.
• If the International Accessibility Probe specified in IEC 950 can access the moving
parts of the fan, consider adding safety feature so that there is no risk of personal
injury.
5.5 Geometric Envelope for Intel Reference BTX
Thermal Module Assembly
Figure 7-50 through Figure 7-54 in Appendix H gives the motherboard keep-out
information for the BTX thermal mechanical solutions. Additional information on BTX
design considerations can be found in Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) System
Design Guide available at http://www.formfactors.org.
The maximum height of the TMA above the motherboard is 60.60 mm [2.386 inches],
for compliance with the motherboard primary side height constraints defined in the
BTX Interface Specification for Zone A, found at http://www.formfactors.org.
Figure 5-4. Intel Type II TMA 65 W Reference Design
Development vendor information for the Intel Type II TMA Reference Solution is
provided in Appendix I.
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 51
5.6 Preload and TMA Stiffness
5.6.1 Structural Design Strategy
Structural design strategy for the Intel Type II TMA is to minimize upward board
deflection during shock to help protect the LGA775 socket.
BTX thermal solutions utilize the SRM and TMA that together resists local board
curvature under the socket and minimize, board deflection (Figure 5-5). In addition, a
moderate preload provides initial downward deflection.
Figure 5-5. Upward Board Deflection During Shock
5.6.2 TMA Preload versus Stiffness
The Thermal Module assembly is required to provide a static preload to ensure
protection against fatigue failure of socket solder joint. The allowable preload range
for BTX platforms is provided in Table 5-4, but the specific target value is a function of
the Thermal Module effective stiffness.
The solution space for the Thermal Module effective stiffness and applied preload
combinations is shown by the shaded region of Figure 5-6. This solution space shows
that the Thermal Module assembly must have an effective stiffness that is sufficiently
large such that the minimum preload determined from the relationship requirement in
Figure 5-6 does not exceed the maximum allowed preload shown in Table 5-4.
Furthermore, if the Thermal Module effective stiffness is so large that the minimum
preload determined from Figure 5-6 is below the minimum required value given in
Less curvature in
region between SRM
and TMA
Shock Load
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
52 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Table 5-4, then the Thermal Module should be re-designed to have a preload that lies
within the range given in Table 5-4, allowing for preload tolerances.
Table 5-4. Processor Preload Limits
Parameter Minimum Required Maximum
Allowed
Notes
Processor Preload 98 N [22 lbf] 222 N [50 lbf] 1
NOTES:
1. These values represent upper and lower bounds for the processor preload. The nominal
preload design point for the Thermal Module is based on a combination of requirements
of the TIM, ease of assembly and the Thermal Module effective stiffness.
Figure 5-6. Minimum Required Processor Preload to Thermal Module Assembly Stiffness
NOTES:
1. The shaded region shown is the acceptable domain for Thermal Module assembly
effective stiffness and processor preload combinations. The Thermal Module design
should have a design preload and stiffness that lies within this region. The design
tolerance for the preload and TMA stiffness should also reside within this boundary.
Note that the lower and upper horizontal boundaries represent the preload limits
provided in Table 5-4. The equation for the left hand boundary is described in note 2.
2. The equation for this section of the preload-Thermal Module stiffness boundary is given
by the following relationship: Min Preload = 1.38E-3*k^2 – 1.18486k + 320.24753 for
k < 300 N/mm where k is the Thermal Module assembly effective stiffness. Please note
that this equation is only valid in the stiffness domain of 93N/mm < k < 282N/mm. This
equation would not apply, for example, for TMA stiffness less than 93N/mm,
3. The target stiffness for the 65W Type II TMA reference design is 484 N/mm
(2764 lb / in).
Note: These preload and stiffness recommendations are specific to the TMA mounting
scheme that meets the BTX Interface Specification and Support Retention Mechanism
(SRM) Design Guide. For TMA mounting schemes that use only the motherboard
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 53
mounting hole position for TMA attach, the required preload is approximately 10-15N
greater than the values stipulated in Figure 5-6; however, Intel has not conducted any
validation testing with this TMA mounting scheme.
Figure 5-7. Thermal Module Attach Pointes and Duct-to-SRM Interface Features
SRM
Front attach point
use 6x32 screw
See detail A
Detail A
See detail B
Detail B
Rear attach point
use 6x32 screw
Chassis PEM nut
Duct front interface
feature see note 2
SRM
Front attach point
use 6x32 screw
See detail A
Detail A
See detail B
Detail B
Rear attach point
use 6x32 screw
Chassis PEM nut
Duct front interface
feature see note 2
NOTES:
1. For clarity the motherboard is not shown in this figure. In an actual assembly, the
captive 6x32 screws in the thermal module pass through the rear holes in the
motherboard designated in the socket keep-in Figure 7-50 through Figure 7-54 in
Appendix H and screw into the SRM and chassis PEM features.
2. This front duct ramp feature has both outer and inner lead-in that allows the feature to
slide easily into the SRM slot and around the chassis PEM nut. Note that the front PEM
nut is part of the chassis not the SRM.
§
Balanced Technology Extended (BTX) Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
54 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 55
6 ATX Thermal/Mechanical
Design Information
6.1 ATX Reference Design Requirements
This chapter will document the requirements for an active air-cooled design, with a
fan installed at the top of the heatsink. The thermal technology required for the
processor.
The processors of Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C,
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 61.4 °C and Intel®
Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C require a thermal
solution equivalent to the D60188-001 reference design, see Figure 6-1 for an
exploded view of this reference design.
Note: The part number D60188-001 provided in this document is for reference only. The
revision number -001 may be subject to change without notice.
The D60188-001 reference design takes advantage of an acoustic improvement to
reduce the fan speed to show the acoustic advantage (its acoustic results show in the
Table 6-3).
The D60188-001 reference design takes advantage of the cost saving for the light
fan/heatsink mass (450g) and the new TIM material (Dow Corning TC-1996 grease). A
bottom view of the copper core applied by this grease is provided Figure 6-3.
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
56 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Figure 6-1. D60188-001Reference Design – Exploded View
The processors of Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB / 2 MB cache at Tc-max of
72.0 °C, Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C, Intel®
Pentium® Dual Core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C, and Intel® Celeron®
Dual-Core processor E1000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C require a thermal solution
equivalent to the E18764-001 reference design; see Figure 6-2 for an exploded view
of this reference design.
Note: The part number E18764-001 provided in this document is for reference only. The
revision number -001 may be subject to change without notice.
The E18764-001 reference design takes advantage of an acoustic improvement to
reduce the fan speed to show the acoustic advantage (its acoustic results show in the
Table 6-4).
The E18764-001 reference design takes advantage of the cost savings for the several
features of the design including the reduced heatsink height, inserted aluminum core,
and the new TIM material (Dow Corning TC-1996 grease, see Figure 6-3). The overall
46mm height thermal solution supports the unique and smaller desktop PCs including
small and ultra small form factors, down to the 5L size, see uATX SFF Guidance for
additional details on uATX SFF design.
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 57
Figure 6-2. E18764-001 Reference Design – Exploded View
Figure 6-3. Bottom View of Copper Core Applied by TC-1996 Grease
The ATX motherboard keep-out and the height recommendations defined Section 6.6
remain the same for a thermal solution for the processor in the 775-Land LGA
package.
Note: If this fan design is used in your product and you will deliver it to end use customers,
you have the responsibility to determine an adequate level of protection (e.g.,
protection barriers, a cage, or an interlock) against contact with the energized fan by
the user during user servicing.
Note: Development vendor information for the reference design is provided in Appendix I.
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
58 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
6.2 Validation Results for Reference Design
6.2.1 Heatsink Performance
Table 6-1 provides the D60188-001 heatsink performance for the processors of Intel®
Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C, Intel® Core™2 Duo
processor with 2 MB cache at Tc-max of 61.4 °C, and Intel® Pentium® Dual Core
processor E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C. Table 6-2 provides the E18764-001
heatsink performance for the processors of Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB /
2 MB cache at Tc-max of 72.0 °C and Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB cache at
Tc-max of 73.3 °C, Intel® Pentium® dual-core processor E2000 series at Tc-max of
73.3 °C, and Intel® Celeron® dual-core processor E1000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C.
The results are based on the test procedure described in Section 6.2.4.
The tables also include a TA assumption of 40°C for the Intel reference thermal
solution at the processor fan heatsink inlet discussed Section 2.4.1.
Table 6-1. D60188-001 Reference Heatsink Performance
Processor Target Thermal
Performance, Ψca
(Mean + 3σ)
TA Assumption
Notes
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB
cache at Tc-max of 60.1 °C
0.31 °C/W 40 °C 1, 2
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB
cache at Tc-max of 61.4 °C
0.33 °C/W 40 °C 1, 2
Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor
E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C
0.33 °C/W 40 °C 1
NOTES:
1. Performance targets (Ψ ca) as measured with a live processor at TDP.
2. The difference in Ψ ca between the Intel® Core™2 Duo 4 MB and 2 MB is due to a slight
difference in the die size.
Table 6-2. E18764-001 Reference Heatsink Performance
Processor Target Thermal
Performance,
Ψca
(Mean + 3σ)
TA Assumption
Notes
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 4 MB /
2 MB cache at Tc-max of 72.0 °C
0.49 °C/W 40 °C 1, 2
Intel® Core™2 Duo processor with 2 MB
cache at Tc-max of 73.3 °C
0.51 °C/W 40 °C 1, 2
Intel® Pentium® Dual Core processor
E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C
0.51 °C/W 40 °C 1
Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core processor
E1000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C
0.51 °C/W 40 °C 1
NOTES:
1. Performance targets (Ψ ca) as measured with a live processor at TDP.
2. The difference in Ψ ca between the Intel® Core™2 Duo 4 MB and 2 MB is due to a slight
difference in the die size.
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 59
6.2.2 Acoustics
To optimize acoustic emission by the fan heatsink assembly, the reference design
implements a variable speed fan. A variable speed fan allows higher thermal
performance at higher fan inlet temperatures (TA) and lower thermal performance with
improved acoustics at lower fan inlet temperatures. The required fan speed necessary
to meet thermal specifications can be controlled by the fan inlet temperature and
should comply with requirements listed in the following table.
Table 6-3. Acoustic Results for ATX Reference Heatsink (D60188-001)
Fan
Speed
RPM
Thermistor
Set Point
Acoustic Thermal Requirements, Ψca Notes
2900 High
TA = 40 °C
4.5 BA 0.31 °C/W (Core™2 Duo 4MB at Tc-max of 60.1 °C)
0.33 °C/W (Core™2 Duo 2MB at Tc-max of 61.4 °C)
0.33 °C/W (E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C )
1800 Low
TA = 30 °C
3.5 BA 0.46 °C/W (Core™2 Duo 4MB at Tc-max of 60.1 °C)
0.48 °C/W (Core™2 Duo 2MB at Tc-max of 61.4 °C)
0.48 °C/W (E2000 series at Tc-max of 61.4 °C)
Thermal
Design
Power, Fan
speed
limited by
the fan hub
thermistor
1000 Low
TA = 28 °C
Minimum
fan speed
Table 6-4. Acoustic Results for ATX Reference Heatsink (E18764-001)
Fan
Speed
RPM
Thermistor
Set Point
Acoustic Thermal Requirements, Ψca Notes
3900 High
TA = 40 °C
5.0 BA • 0.49 °C/W (Intel Core™2 Duo processor, 4 MB /
2 MB at Tc-max of 72.0 °C)
• 0.51 °C/W (Intel Core™2 Duo processor, 2 MB at
Tc-max of 73.3 °C)
• 0.51 °C/W (E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C )
• 0.51 °C/W (E1000 Series of Tc-max of 73.3 °C )
2000 Low
TA = 30 °C
3.5 BA • 0.65 °C/W (Intel Core™2 Duo processor, 4 MB /
2 MB at Tc-max of 72.0 °C)
• 0.67 °C/W (Intel Core™2 Duo processor, 2 MB at
Tc-max of 73.3 °C)
• 0.67 °C/W (E2000 series at Tc-max of 73.3 °C)
• 0.67 °C/W (E1000 Series of Tc-max of 73.3 °C)
Thermal
Design
Power, Fan
speed
limited by
the fan hub
thermistor
NOTES:
1. Acoustic performance is defined in terms of measured sound power (LwA) as defined in
ISO 9296 standard, and measured according to ISO 7779.
While the fan hub thermistor helps optimize acoustics at high processor workloads by
adapting the maximum fan speed to support the processor thermal profile, additional
acoustic improvements can be achieved at lower processor workload by using the
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
60 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
TCONTROL specifications described in Section 2.2.3. Intel recommendation is to use the
fan with 4 Wire PWM Controlled to implement fan speed control capability based
digital thermal sensor temperature. Refer to Chapter 7 for further details.
Note: Appendix G gives detailed fan performance for the Intel reference thermal solutions
with 4 Wire PWM Controlled fan.
6.2.3 Altitude
Many companies design products that must function reliably at high altitude, typically
1,500 m [5,000 ft] or more. Air-cooled temperature calculations and measurements at
the test site elevation must be adjusted to take into account altitude effects like
variation in air density and overall heat capacity. This often leads to some degradation
in thermal solution performance compared to what is obtained at sea level, with lower
fan performance and higher surface temperatures. The system designer needs to
account for altitude effects in the overall system thermal design to make sure that the
TC requirement for the processor is met at the targeted altitude.
6.2.4 Heatsink Thermal Validation
Intel recommends evaluation of the heatsink within the specific boundary conditions
based on the methodology described Section 6.3.
Testing is done on bench top test boards at ambient lab temperature. In particular, for
the reference heatsink, the Plexiglas* barrier is installed 81.28 mm [3.2 in] above the
motherboard (refer to Sections 3.3 and 6.6).
The test results, for a number of samples, are reported in terms of a worst-case mean
+ 3σ value for thermal characterization parameter using real processors (based on the
thermal test vehicle correction factors).
Note: The above 81.28 mm obstruction height that is used for testing complies with the
recommended obstruction height of 88.9 mm for the ATX form factor. However, it
would conflict with systems in strict compliance with the ATX specification which
allows an obstruction as low as 76.2 mm above the motherboard surface in Area A.
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 61
6.3 Environmental Reliability Testing
6.3.1 Structural Reliability Testing
Structural reliability tests consist of unpackaged, board-level vibration and shock tests
of a given thermal solution in the assembled state. The thermal solution should meet
the specified thermal performance targets after these tests are conducted; however,
the test conditions outlined here may differ from your own system requirements.
6.3.1.1 Random Vibration Test Procedure
Duration: 10 min/axis, 3 axes
Frequency Range: 5 Hz to 500 Hz
Power Spectral Density (PSD) Profile: 3.13 G RMS
Figure 6-4. Random Vibration PSD
0.001
0.01
0.1
1 10 100 1000
Frequency (Hz)
PSD (g^2/Hz)
3.13GRMS (10 minutes per axis)
5 Hz 500 Hz
(5, 0.01)
(20, 0.02) (500, 0.02)
6.3.1.2 Shock Test Procedure
Recommended performance requirement for a motherboard:
• Quantity: 3 drops for + and - directions in each of 3 perpendicular axes (i.e.,
total 18 drops).
• Profile: 50 G trapezoidal waveform, 170 in/sec minimum velocity change.
• Setup: Mount sample board on test fixture.
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
62 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Figure 6-5. Shock Acceleration Curve
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Time (milliseconds)
A
c
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
(g)
6.3.1.2.1 Recommended Test Sequence
Each test sequence should start with components (i.e., motherboard, heatsink
assembly, etc.) that have never been previously submitted to any reliability testing.
The test sequence should always start with a visual inspection after assembly, and
BIOS/CPU/Memory test (refer to Section 6.3.3).
Prior to the mechanical shock & vibration test, the units under test should be
preconditioned for 72 hours at 45 ºC. The purpose is to account for load relaxation
during burn-in stage.
The stress test should be followed by a visual inspection and then BIOS/CPU/Memory
test.
6.3.1.2.2 Post-Test Pass Criteria
The post-test pass criteria are:
1. No significant physical damage to the heatsink attach mechanism (including such
items as clip and motherboard fasteners).
2. Heatsink must remain attached to the motherboard.
3. Heatsink remains seated and its bottom remains mated flatly against IHS surface.
No visible gap between the heatsink base and processor IHS. No visible tilt of the
heatsink with respect to its attach mechanism.
4. No signs of physical damage on motherboard surface due to impact of heatsink or
heatsink attach mechanism.
5. No visible physical damage to the processor package.
6. Successful BIOS/Processor/memory test of post-test samples.
7. Thermal compliance testing to demonstrate that the case temperature
specification can be met.
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 63
6.3.2 Power Cycling
Thermal performance degradation due to TIM degradation is evaluated using power
cycling testing. The test is defined by 7500 cycles for the case temperature from room
temperature (~23 ºC) to the maximum case temperature defined by the thermal
profile at TDP.
6.3.3 Recommended BIOS/CPU/Memory Test Procedures
This test is to ensure proper operation of the product before and after environmental
stresses, with the thermal mechanical enabling components assembled. The test shall
be conducted on a fully operational motherboard that has not been exposed to any
battery of tests prior to the test being considered.
Testing setup should include the following components, properly assembled and/or
connected:
• Appropriate system motherboard
• Processor
• All enabling components, including socket and thermal solution parts
• Power supply
• Disk drive
• Video card
• DIMM
• Keyboard
• Monitor
The pass criterion is that the system under test shall successfully complete the
checking of BIOS, basic processor functions and memory, without any errors.
6.4 Material and Recycling Requirements
Material shall be resistant to fungal growth. Examples of non-resistant materials
include cellulose materials, animal and vegetable based adhesives, grease, oils, and
many hydrocarbons. Synthetic materials such as PVC formulations, certain
polyurethane compositions (e.g., polyester and some polyethers), plastics which
contain organic fillers of laminating materials, paints, and varnishes also are
susceptible to fungal growth. If materials are not fungal growth resistant, then MILSTD-810E,
Method 508.4 must be performed to determine material performance.
Material used shall not have deformation or degradation in a temperature life test.
Any plastic component exceeding 25 grams must be recyclable per the European Blue
Angel recycling standards.
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
64 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
6.5 Safety Requirements
Heatsink and attachment assemblies shall be consistent with the manufacture of units
that meet the safety standards:
• UL Recognition-approved for flammability at the system level. All mechanical and
thermal enabling components must be a minimum UL94V-2 approved.
• CSA Certification. All mechanical and thermal enabling components must have
CSA certification.
• All components (in particular the heatsink fins) must meet the test requirements
of UL1439 for sharp edges.
• If the International Accessibility Probe specified in IEC 950 can access the moving
parts of the fan, consider adding safety feature so that there is no risk of personal
injury.
6.6 Geometric Envelope for Intel Reference ATX
Thermal Mechanical Design
Figure 7-47, Figure 7-48 and Figure 7-49 in Appendix H gives detailed reference
ATX/μATX motherboard keep-out information for the reference thermal/mechanical
enabling design. These drawings include height restrictions in the enabling component
region.
The maximum height of the reference solution above the motherboard is 71.12 mm
[2.8 inches], and is compliant with the motherboard primary side height constraints
defined in the ATX Specification revision 2.1 and the microATX Motherboard Interface
Specification revision 1.1 found at http://www.formfactors.org. The reference solution
requires a chassis obstruction height of at least 81.28 mm [3.2 inches], measured
from the top of the motherboard (refer to Sections 3.3 and 6.2.4). This allows for
appropriate fan inlet airflow to ensure fan performance, and therefore overall cooling
solution performance. This is compliant with the recommendations found in both ATX
Specification V2.1 and microATX Motherboard Interface Specification V1.1 documents.
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 65
6.7 Reference Attach Mechanism
6.7.1 Structural Design Strategy
Structural design strategy for the reference design is to minimize upward board
deflection during shock to help protect the LGA775 socket.
The reference design uses a high clip stiffness that resists local board curvature under
the heatsink, and minimizes, in particular, upward board deflection (Figure 6-6). In
addition, a moderate preload provides initial downward deflection.
Figure 6-6. Upward Board Deflection During Shock
The target metal clip nominal stiffness is 540 N/mm [3100 lb/in]. The combined target
for reference clip and fasteners nominal stiffness is 380 N/mm [2180 lb/in]. The
nominal preload provided by the reference design is 191.3 N ± 44.5 N [43 lb ± 10 lb].
Note: Intel reserves the right to make changes and modifications to the design as necessary
to the reference design, in particular the clip and fastener.
Less curvature in
region under stiff clip
Shock Load
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
66 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
6.7.2 Mechanical Interface to the Reference Attach Mechanism
The attach mechanism component from the reference design can be used by other 3rd
party cooling solutions. The attach mechanism consists of:
• A metal attach clip that interfaces with the heatsink core, see Appendix H,
Figure 7-55 and Figure 7-56 for the component drawings.
• Four plastic fasteners, see Appendix H, Figure 7-57, Figure 7-58, Figure 7-59 and
Figure 7-60 for the component drawings.
The clip is assembled to heatsink during copper core insertion, and is meant to be
trapped between the core shoulder and the extrusion as shown in Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7. Reference Clip/Heatsink Assembly
Core shoulder
traps clip in place
Clip
The mechanical interface with the reference attach mechanism is defined in Figure 6-8
and Figure 6-9. Complying with the mechanical interface parameters is critical to
generating a heatsink preload compliant with the minimum preload requirement given
in Section 2.1.2.2.
Additional requirements for the reference attach mechanism (clip and fasteners)
include:
• Heatsink/fan mass ≤ 550 g (i.e., total assembly mass, including clip and fasteners
< 595 g
• Whole assembly center of gravity ≤ 25.4 mm, measured from the top of the IHS
⎯ Whole assembly = Heatsink + Fan + Attach clip + Fasteners
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 67
Figure 6-8. Critical Parameters for Interfacing to Reference Clip
Core
Fin Array
Fan
Clip
See Detail A
Detail A
Fin Array
Clip Core
1.6 mm
Figure 6-9. Critical Core Dimension
R 0.40 mm max
R 0.40 mm max
Φ36.14 +/- 0.10 mm
Gap required to avoid
core surface blemish
during clip assembly.
Recommend 0.3 mm min.
1.00 mm min
2.596 +/- 0.10 mm
Φ38.68 +/- 0.30 mm
1.00 +/- 0.10 mm
Core
NOTE: Dimension from the bottom of the clip to the bottom of the
heatsink core (or base) should be met to enable the required
load from the heatsink clip (i.e., 43 lbf nominal +/- 10 lbf)
§
ATX Thermal/Mechanical Design Information
68 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST)
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 69
7 Intel® Quiet System
Technology (Intel® QST)
In the Intel® 965 Express Family Chipset a new control algorithm for fan speed control
is being introduced. It is composed of an Intel® Management Engine (ME) in the
Graphics Memory Controller Hub (GMCH) which executes the Intel® Quiet System
Technology (Intel® QST) algorithm and the ICH8 containing the sensor bus and fan
control circuits.
The ME provides integrated fan speed control in lieu of the mechanisms available in a
SIO or a stand-alone ASIC. The Intel QST is time based as compared to the linear or
state control used by the current generation of FSC devices.
A short discussion of Intel QST will follow along with thermal solution design
recommendations. For a complete discussion of programming the Intel QST in the ME
please consult the Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) Configuration and
Tuning Manual.
Note: Fan speed control algorithms and Intel QST in particular rely on a thermal solution
being compliant to the processor thermal profile. It is unlikely that any fan speed
control algorithm can compensate for a non-compliant thermal solution. See Chapter 5
and Chapter 6 for thermal solution requirements that should be met before evaluating
or configuring a system with Intel QST.
7.1 Intel® QST Algorithm
The objective of Intel QST is to minimize the system acoustics by more closely
controlling the thermal sensors to the corresponding processor or chipset device
TCONTROL value. This is achieved by the use of a Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID)
control algorithm and a Fan Output Weighting Matrix. The PID algorithm takes into
account the difference between the current temperature and the target (TCONTROL), the
rate of change and direction of change to minimize the required fan speed change.
The Fan Output Weighting Matrix uses the effects of each fan on a thermal sensor to
minimize the required fan speed changes
Figure 7-1 shows in a very simple manner how Intel QST works. See the Intel Quiet
System Technology (Intel® QST) Configuration and Tuning Manual for a detail
discussion of the inputs and response.
Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST)
70 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Figure 7-1. Intel® QST Overview
Fan to sensor
Relationship
(Output Weighting Matrix)
Temperature sensing
and response
Calculations
(PID)
Fan Commands
(PID)
Fans
Temperature
Sensors
Intel® QST
System Response
PECI / SST PWM
7.1.1 Output Weighting Matrix
Intel QST provides an Output Weighting Matrix that provides a means for a single
thermal sensor to affect the speed of multiple fans. An example of how the matrix
could be used is if a sensor located next to the memory is sensitive to changes in both
the processor heatsink fan and a 2nd fan in the system. By placing a factor in this
matrix additional the Intel QST could command the processor thermal solution fan and
this 2nd fan to both accelerate a small amount. At the system level these two small
changes can result in a smaller change in acoustics than having a single fan respond
to this sensor.
7.1.2 Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID)
The use of Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control algorithms allow the
magnitude of fan response to be determined based upon the difference between
current temperature readings and specific temperature targets. A major advantage of
a PID Algorithm is the ability to control the fans to achieve sensor temperatures much
closer to the TCONTROL.
Figure 7-2 is an illustration of the PID fan control algorithm. As illustrated in the
figure, when the actual temperature is below the target temperature, the fan will slow
down. The current FSC devices have a fixed temperature vs. PWM output relationship
and miss this opportunity to achieve additional acoustic benefits. As the actual
temperature starts ramping up and approaches the target temperature, the algorithm
will instruct the fan to speed up gradually, but will not abruptly increase the fan speed
to respond to the condition. It can allow an overshoot over the target temperature for
a short period of time while ramping up the fan to bring the actual temperature to the
Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST)
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 71
target temperature. As a result of its operation, the PID control algorithm can enable
an acoustic-friendly platform.
Figure 7-2. PID Controller Fundamentals
Proportional
Error
Derivative (Slope)
Integral (time averaged) RPM Temperature
Time
+ dPWM
- dPWM
Actual
Temperature
Fan
Speed
Limit
Temperature
For a PID algorithm to work limit temperatures are assigned for each temperature
sensor. For Intel QST, the TCONTROL for the processor and chipset are to be used as the
limit temperature. The ME will measure the error, slope and rate of change using the
following equations:
• Proportional Error (P) = TLIMIT – TACTUAL
• Integral (I) = Time averaged error
• Derivative (D) = ΔTemp / ΔTime
Three gain values are used to control response of algorithm.
• Kp = proportional gain
• Ki = Integral gain
• Kd = derivative gain
The Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST) Configuration and Tuning Manual
provides initial values for the each of the gain constants. In addition it provides a
methodology to tune these gain values based on system response.
Finally the fan speed change will be calculated using the following formula:
ΔPWM = -P*(Kp) – I*(Ki) + D*(Kd)
Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST)
72 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
7.2 Board and System Implementation of Intel® QST
To implement the board must be configured as shown in Figure 7-3 and listed below:
• ME system (S0-S1) with Controller Link connected and powered
• DRAM with Channel A DIMM 0 installed and 2MB reserved for Intel® QST FW
execution
• SPI Flash with sufficient space for the Intel® QST Firmware
• SST-based thermal sensors to provide board thermal data for Intel® QST
algorithms
• Intel® QST firmware
Figure 7-3. Intel® QST Platform Requirements
Note: Simple Serial Transport (SST) is a single wire bus that is included in the ICH8 to
provide additional thermal and voltage sensing capability to the Intel® Management
Engine (ME)
Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST)
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 73
Figure 7-4 shows the major connections for a typical implementation that can support
processors with Digital thermal sensor or a thermal diode. In this configuration a SST
Thermal Sensor has been added to read the on-die thermal diode that is in all of the
processors in the 775-land LGA packages shipped before the Intel® Core™2 Duo
processor. With the proper configuration information the ME can be accommodate
inputs from PECI or SST for the processor socket. Additional SST sensors can be
added to monitor system thermal (see Appendix F for BTX recommendations for
placement).
Figure 7-4. Example Acoustic Fan Speed Control Implementation
Intel has engaged with a number of major manufacturers of thermal / voltage sensors
to provide devices for the SST bus. Contact your Intel Field Sales representative for
the current list of manufacturers and visit their web sites or local sales representatives
for a part suitable for your design.
Intel® Quiet System Technology (Intel® QST)
74 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
7.3 Intel® QST Configuration and Tuning
Initial configuration of the Intel QST is the responsibility of the board manufacturer.
The SPI flash should be programmed with the hardware configuration of the
motherboard and initial settings for fan control, fan monitoring, voltage and thermal
monitoring. This initial data is generated using the Intel provided Configuration Tool.
At the system integrator the Configuration Tool can be used again but this time to
tune the Intel QST subsystem to reflect the shipping system configuration. In the
tuning process the Intel QST can be modified to have the proper relationships between
the installed fans and sensors in the shipping system. A Weighting Matrix Utility and
Intel QST Log program are planned to assist in optimizing the fan management and
achieve acoustic goal.
See your Intel field sales representative for availability of these tools.
7.4 Fan Hub Thermistor and Intel® QST
There is no closed loop control between Intel QST and the thermistor, but they can
work in tandem to provide the maximum fan speed reduction. The BTX reference
design includes a thermistor on the fan hub. This Variable Speed Fan curve will
determine the maximum fan speed as a function of the inlet ambient temperature and
by design provides a ΨCA sufficient to meet the thermal profile of the processor. Intel
QST, by measuring the processor Digital thermal sensor will command the fan to
reduce speed below the VSF curve in response to processor workload. Conversely if
the processor workload increases the FSC will command the fan via the PWM duty
cycle to accelerate the fan up to the limit imposed by the VSF curve. Care needs to be
taken in BTX designs to ensure the fan speed at the minimum operating speed
provides sufficient air flow to support the other system components.
Figure 7-5. Digital Thermal Sensor and Thermistor Fan Speed (RPM)
Inlet Temperature (°C)
Full
Speed
30 38
Min.
Operating
Variable Speed Fan (VSF) Curve
Fan Speed
Operating Range
with FSC
34
Min %Fan Speed
(% PWM Duty Cycle)
100 %
Fan Speed
(RPM)
Inlet Temperature (°C)
Full
Speed
30 38
Min.
Operating
Variable Speed Fan (VSF) Curve
Fan Speed
Operating Range
with FSC
34
Min %Fan Speed
(% PWM Duty Cycle)
100 %
§
LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 75
Appendix A LGA775 Socket Heatsink
Loading
A.1 LGA775 Socket Heatsink Considerations
Heatsink clip load is traditionally used for:
• Mechanical performance in mechanical shock and vibration
⎯ Refer to Section 6.7.1 for the information on the structural design strategy for
the reference design
• Thermal interface performance
⎯ Required preload depends on TIM
⎯ Preload can be low for thermal grease
In addition to mechanical performance in shock and vibration and TIM performance,
LGA775 socket requires a minimum heatsink preload to protect against fatigue failure
of socket solder joints.
Solder ball tensile stress is originally created when, after inserting a processor into the
socket, the LGA775 socket load plate is actuated. In addition, solder joint shear stress
is caused by coefficient of thermal expansion (CTE) mismatch induced shear loading.
The solder joint compressive axial force (Faxial) induced by the heatsink preload helps
to reduce the combined joint tensile and shear stress.
Overall, the heatsink required preload is the minimum preload needed to meet all of
the above requirements: Mechanical shock and vibration and TIM performance AND
LGA775 socket protection against fatigue failure.
A.2 Metric for Heatsink Preload for ATX/uATX
Designs Non-Compliant with Intel®
Reference Design
A.2.1 Heatsink Preload Requirement Limitations
Heatsink preload by itself is not an appropriate metric for solder joint force across
various mechanical designs and does not take into account for example (not an
exhaustive list):
• Heatsink mounting hole span
• Heatsink clip/fastener assembly stiffness and creep
• Board stiffness and creep
• Board stiffness is modified by fixtures like backing plate, chassis attach, etc.
LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading
76 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Simulation shows that the solder joint force (Faxial) is proportional to the board
deflection measured along the socket diagonal. The matching of Faxial required to
protect the LGA775 socket solder joint in temperature cycling is equivalent to
matching a target MB deflection.
Therefore, the heatsink preload for LGA775 socket solder joint protection against
fatigue failure can be more generally defined as the load required to create a target
board downward deflection throughout the life of the product.
This board deflection metric provides guidance for mechanical designs that differ from
the reference design for ATX//µATX form factor.
A.2.2 Motherboard Deflection Metric Definition
Motherboard deflection is measured along either diagonal (refer to Figure 7-6):
d = dmax – (d1 + d2)/2
d’ = dmax – (d’1 + d’2)/2
Configurations in which the deflection is measured are defined in the Table 7-1.
To measure board deflection, follow industry standard procedures (such as IPC) for
board deflection measurement. Height gauges and possibly dial gauges may also be
used.
Table 7-1. Board Deflection Configuration Definitions
Configuration
Parameter
Processor + Socket
load plate
Heatsink Parameter Name
d_ref yes no BOL deflection, no preload
d_BOL yes yes BOL deflection with preload
d_EOL yes yes EOL deflection
NOTES:
BOL: Beginning of Life
EOL: End of Life
LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 77
Figure 7-6. Board Deflection Definition
d1
d2
d’1
d’2
A.2.3 Board Deflection Limits
Deflection limits for the ATX/µATX form factor are:
d_BOL - d_ref≥ 0.09 mm and d_EOL - d_ref ≥ 0.15 mm
And
d’_BOL – d’_ref≥ 0.09 mm and d_EOL’ – d_ref’ ≥ 0.15 mm
NOTES:
1. The heatsink preload must remain within the static load limits defined in the processor
datasheet at all times.
2. Board deflection should not exceed motherboard manufacturer specifications.
LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading
78 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
A.2.4 Board Deflection Metric Implementation Example
This section is for illustration only, and relies on the following assumptions:
• 72 mm x 72 mm hole pattern of the reference design
• Board stiffness = 900 lb/in at BOL, with degradation that simulates board creep
over time
⎯ Though these values are representative, they may change with selected
material and board manufacturing process. Check with your motherboard
vendor.
• Clip stiffness assumed constant – No creep.
Using Figure 7-7, the heatsink preload at beginning of life is defined to comply with
d_EOL – d_ref = 0.15 mm depending on clip stiffness assumption.
Note that the BOL and EOL preload and board deflection differ. This is a result of the
creep phenomenon. The example accounts for the creep expected to occur in the
motherboard. It assumes no creep to occur in the clip. However, there is a small
amount of creep accounted for in the plastic fasteners. This situation is somewhat
similar to the reference design.
The impact of the creep to the board deflection is a function of the clip stiffness:
• The relatively compliant clips store strain energy in the clip under the BOL preload
condition and tend to generate increasing amounts of board deflection as the
motherboard creeps under exposure to time and temperature.
• In contrast, the stiffer clips stores very little strain energy, and therefore do not
generate substantial additional board deflection through life.
NOTES:
1. Board and clip creep modify board deflection over time and depends on board
stiffness, clip stiffness, and selected materials.
2. Designers must define the BOL board deflection that will lead to the correct
end of life board deflection
LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 79
Figure 7-7. Example: Defining Heatsink Preload Meeting Board Deflection Limit
A.2.5 Additional Considerations
Intel recommends to design to {d_BOL - d_ref = 0.15mm} at BOL when EOL
conditions are not known or difficult to assess.
The following information is given for illustration only. It is based on the reference
keep-out, assuming there is no fixture that changes board stiffness:
d_ref is expected to be 0.18 mm on average, and be as high as 0.22 mm
As a result, the board should be able to deflect 0.37 mm minimum at BOL
Additional deflection as high as 0.09 mm may be necessary to account for additional
creep effects impacting the board/clip/fastener assembly. As a result, designs could
see as much as 0.50 mm total downward board deflection under the socket.
In addition to board deflection, other elements need to be considered to define the
space needed for the downward board total displacement under load, like the potential
interference of through-hole mount component pin tails of the board with a
mechanical fixture on the back of the board.
NOTES:
1. The heatsink preload must remain below the maximum load limit of the
package at all times (Refer to processor datasheet)
2. Board deflection should not exceed motherboard manufacturer specifications.
LGA775 Socket Heatsink Loading
80 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
A.2.5.1 Motherboard Stiffening Considerations
To protect LGA775 socket solder joint, designers need to drive their mechanical design
to:
• Allow downward board deflection to put the socket balls in a desirable force state
to protect against fatigue failure of socket solder joint (refer to Sections A.2.1,
A.2.2, and A.2.3.
• Prevent board upward bending during mechanical shock event
• Define load paths that keep the dynamic load applied to the package within
specifications published in the processor datasheet
Limiting board deflection may be appropriate in some situations like:
• Board bending during shock
• Board creep with high heatsink preload
However, the load required to meet the board deflection recommendation (refer to
Section A.2.3) with a very stiff board may lead to heatsink preloads exceeding
package maximum load specification. For example, such a situation may occur when
using a backing plate that is flush with the board in the socket area, and prevents the
board to bend underneath the socket.
A.3 Heatsink Selection Guidelines
Evaluate carefully heatsinks coming with motherboard stiffening devices (like backing
plates), and conduct board deflection assessments based on the board deflection
metric.
Solutions derived from the reference design comply with the reference heatsink
preload, for example:
• The Boxed Processor
• The reference design (D60188-001 and E18764-001)
Intel will collaborate with vendors participating in its third party test house program to
evaluate third party solutions. Vendor information now is available in Intel® Core™2
Duo Processor Support Components webpage www.intel.com/go/thermal_Core2Duo .
§
Heatsink Clip Load Metrology
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 81
Appendix B Heatsink Clip Load
Metrology
B.1 Overview
This section describes a procedure for measuring the load applied by the
heatsink/clip/fastener assembly on a processor package.
This procedure is recommended to verify the preload is within the design target range
for a design, and in different situations. For example:
• Heatsink preload for the LGA775 socket
• Quantify preload degradation under bake conditions.
Note: This document reflects the current metrology used by Intel. Intel is continuously
exploring new ways to improve metrology. Updates will be provided later as this
document is revised as appropriate.
B.2 Test Preparation
B.2.1 Heatsink Preparation
Three load cells are assembled into the base of the heatsink under test, in the area
interfacing with the processor Integrated Heat Spreader (IHS), using load cells
equivalent to those listed in Section B.2.2.
To install the load cells, machine a pocket in the heatsink base, as shown in
Figure 7-8 and Figure 7-9. The load cells should be distributed evenly, as close as
possible to the pocket walls. Apply wax around the circumference of each load cell and
the surface of the pocket around each cell to maintain the load cells in place during
the heatsink installation on the processor and motherboard (Refer to Figure 7-9).
The depth of the pocket depends on the height of the load cell used for the test. It is
necessary that the load cells protrude out of the heatsink base. However, this
protrusion should be kept minimal, as it will create additional load by artificially
raising the heatsink base. The measurement offset depends on the whole assembly
stiffness (i.e. motherboard, clip, fastener, etc.). For example, the reference design clip
and fasteners assembly stiffness is around 380 N/mm [2180 lb/in]. In that case, a
protrusion of 0.038 mm [0.0015”] will create an extra load of 15 N [3.3 lb].
Figure 7-10 shows an example using the reference design.
Note: When optimizing the heatsink pocket depth, the variation of the load cell height
should also be taken into account to make sure that all load cells protrude equally
from the heatsink base. It may be useful to screen the load cells prior to installation to
minimize variation.
Heatsink Clip Load Metrology
82 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Remarks: Alternate Heatsink Sample Preparation
As mentioned above, making sure that the load cells have minimum protrusion out of
the heatsink base is paramount to meaningful results. An alternate method to make
sure that the test setup will measure loads representative of the non-modified design
is:
• Machine the pocket in the heat sink base to a depth such that the tips of the load
cells are just flush with the heat sink base
• Then machine back the heatsink base by around 0.25 mm [0.01”], so that the
load cell tips protrude beyond the base.
Proceeding this way, the original stack height of the heatsink assembly should be
preserved. This should not affect the stiffness of the heatsink significantly.
Figure 7-8. Load Cell Installation in Machined Heatsink Base Pocket – Bottom View
Package IHS
Outline (Top
Surface)
Load Cells
Heatsink Base Pocket
Diameter ~ 29 mm
[~1.15”]
Heatsink Clip Load Metrology
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 83
Figure 7-9. Load Cell Installation in Machined Heatsink Base Pocket – Side View
Figure 7-10. Preload Test Configuration
Load Cells (3x)
Preload Fixture (copper
core with milled out pocket)
Wax to maintain load cell in
position during heatsink
installation
Height of pocket
~ height of
selected load
cell
Load cell protrusion
(Note: to be optimized depending on
assembly stiffness)
Heatsink Clip Load Metrology
84 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
B.2.2 Typical Test Equipment
For the heatsink clip load measurement, use equivalent test equipment to the one
listed Table 7-2.
Table 7-2. Typical Test Equipment
Item Description Part Number
(Model)
Load cell
Notes: 1, 5
Honeywell*-Sensotec* Model 13 subminiature
load cells, compression only
Select a load range depending on load level
being tested.
www.sensotec.com
AL322BL
Data Logger (or
scanner)
Notes: 2, 3, 4
Vishay* Measurements Group Model 6100
scanner with a 6010A strain card (one card
required per channel).
Model 6100
NOTES:
1. Select load range depending on expected load level. It is usually better, whenever
possible, to operate in the high end of the load cell capability. Check with your load cell
vendor for further information.
2. Since the load cells are calibrated in terms of mV/V, a data logger or scanner is
required to supply 5 volts DC excitation and read the mV response. An
automated model will take the sensitivity calibration of the load cells and convert the
mV output into pounds.
3. With the test equipment listed above, it is possible to automate data recording and
control with a 6101-PCI card (GPIB) added to the scanner, allowing it to be connected
to a PC running LabVIEW* or Vishay's StrainSmart* software.
4. IMPORTANT: In addition to just a zeroing of the force reading at no applied load, it is
important to calibrate the load cells against known loads. Load cells tend to drift.
Contact your load cell vendor for calibration tools and procedure information.
5. When measuring loads under thermal stress (bake for example), load cell thermal
capability must be checked, and the test setup must integrate any hardware used along
with the load cell. For example, the Model 13 load cells are temperature compensated
up to 71 °C, as long as the compensation package (spliced into the load cell's wiring) is
also placed in the temperature chamber. The load cells can handle up to 121 °C
(operating), but their uncertainty increases according to 0.02% rdg/°F.
B.3 Test Procedure Examples
The following sections give two examples of load measurement. However, this is not
meant to be used in mechanical shock and vibration testing.
Any mechanical device used along with the heatsink attach mechanism will need to be
included in the test setup (i.e., back plate, attach to chassis, etc.).
Prior to any test, make sure that the load cell has been calibrated against known
loads, following load cell vendor’s instructions.
Heatsink Clip Load Metrology
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 85
B.3.1 Time-Zero, Room Temperature Preload
Measurement
1. Pre-assemble mechanical components on the board as needed prior to mounting
the motherboard on an appropriate support fixture that replicate the board attach
to a target chassis
• For example: standard ATX board should sit on ATX compliant stand-offs. If the
attach mechanism includes fixtures on the back side of the board, those must be
included, as the goal of the test is to measure the load provided by the actual
heatsink mechanism.
2. Install relevant test vehicle (TTV, processor) in the socket
3. Assemble the heatsink reworked with the load cells to motherboard as shown for
the reference design example in Figure 7-10, and actuate attach mechanism.
4. Collect continuous load cell data at 1 Hz for the duration of the test. A minimum
time to allow the load cell to settle is generally specified by the load vendors
(often of order of 3 minutes). The time zero reading should be taken at the end of
this settling time.
5. Record the preload measurement (total from all three load cells) at the target time
and average the values over 10 seconds around this target time as well, i.e. in the
interval , for example over [target time – 5 seconds ; target time + 5 seconds].
B.3.2 Preload Degradation under Bake Conditions
This section describes an example of testing for potential clip load degradation under
bake conditions.
1. Preheat thermal chamber to target temperature (45 ºC or 85 ºC for example)
2. Repeat time-zero, room temperature preload measurement
3. Place unit into preheated thermal chamber for specified time
4. Record continuous load cell data as follows:
• Sample rate = 0.1 Hz for first 3 hrs
• Sample rate = 0.01 Hz for the remainder of the bake test
5. Remove assembly from thermal chamber and set into room temperature
conditions
6. Record continuous load cell data for next 30 minutes at sample rate of 1 Hz.
§
Heatsink Clip Load Metrology
86 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Thermal Interface Management
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 87
Appendix C Thermal Interface
Management
To optimize a heatsink design, it is important to understand the impact of factors
related to the interface between the processor and the heatsink base. Specifically, the
bond line thickness, interface material area and interface material thermal
conductivity should be managed to realize the most effective thermal solution.
C.1 Bond Line Management
Any gap between the processor integrated heat spreader (IHS) and the heatsink base
degrades thermal solution performance. The larger the gap between the two surfaces,
the greater the thermal resistance. The thickness of the gap is determined by the
flatness and roughness of both the heatsink base and the integrated heat spreader,
plus the thickness of the thermal interface material (for example thermal grease) used
between these two surfaces and the clamping force applied by the heatsink attach
clip(s).
C.2 Interface Material Area
The size of the contact area between the processor and the heatsink base will impact
the thermal resistance. There is, however, a point of diminishing returns. Unrestrained
incremental increases in thermal interface material area do not translate to a
measurable improvement in thermal performance.
C.3 Interface Material Performance
Two factors impact the performance of the interface material between the processor
and the heatsink base:
• Thermal resistance of the material
• Wetting/filling characteristics of the material
Thermal resistance is a description of the ability of the thermal interface material to
transfer heat from one surface to another. The higher the thermal resistance, the less
efficient the interface material is at transferring heat. The thermal resistance of the
interface material has a significant impact on the thermal performance of the overall
thermal solution. The higher the thermal resistance, the larger the temperature drop
is across the interface and the more efficient the thermal solution (heatsink, fan) must
be to achieve the desired cooling.
The wetting or filling characteristic of the thermal interface material is its ability,
under the load applied by the heatsink retention mechanism, to spread and fill the gap
between the processor and the heatsink. Since air is an extremely poor thermal
conductor, the more completely the interface material fills the gaps, the lower the
temperature drops across the interface. In this case, thermal interface material area
also becomes significant; the larger the desired thermal interface material area, the
higher the force required to spread the thermal interface material.
§
Thermal Interface Management
88 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Case Temperature Reference Metrology
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 89
Appendix DCase Temperature
Reference Metrology
D.1 Objective and Scope
This appendix defines a reference procedure for attaching a thermocouple to the IHS
of a 775-land LGA package for TC measurement. This procedure takes into account the
specific features of the 775-land LGA package and of the LGA775 socket for which it is
intended. The recommended equipment for the reference thermocouple installation,
including tools and part numbers are also provided. In addition a video Thermocouple
Attach Using Solder – Video CD-ROM is available that shows the process in real time.
The following supplier can do machining the groove and attaching a thermocouple to
the IHS followed by the reference procedure. The supplier is listed the following table
as a convenience to Intel’s general customers and the list may be subject to change
without notice.
Supplier Contact Phone Email Address
THERM-X OF
CALIFORNIA
Ernesto B
Valencia
510-441-7566
Ext. 242
ernestov@ther
m-x.com
1837 Whipple
Road, Hayward,
Ca 94544
D.2 Supporting Test Equipment
To apply the reference thermocouple attach procedure, it is recommended to use the
equipment (or equivalent) given in the following table.
Item Description Part Number
Measurement and Output
Microscope Olympus* Light microscope or equivalent SZ-40
DMM Digital Multi Meter for resistance measurement Fluke 79 Series
Thermal Meter Hand held thermocouple meter Multiple Vendors
Solder Station (see note 1 for ordering information)
Heater Block Heater assembly to reflow solder on IHS 30330
Heater WATLOW120V 150W Firerod 0212G G1A38-
L12
Transformer Superior Powerstat transformer 05F857
Case Temperature Reference Metrology
90 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Item Description Part Number
Miscellaneous Hardware
Solder Indium Corp. of America
Alloy 57BI / 42SN / 1AG 0.010 Diameter
52124
Flux Indium Corp. of America 5RMA
Loctite* 498
Adhesive
Super glue w/thermal characteristics 49850
Adhesive
Accelerator
Loctite* 7452 for fast glue curing 18490
Kapton* Tape For holding thermocouple in place Not Available
Thermocouple Omega *,36 gauge, “T” Type
(see note 2 for ordering information)
OSK2K1280/5SR
TC-TT-T-36-72
Calibration and Control
Ice Point Cell Omega*, stable 0 ºC temperature source for
calibration and offset
TRCIII
Hot Point Cell Omega *, temperature source to control and
understand meter slope gain
CL950-A-110
NOTES:
1. The Solder Station consisting of the Heater Block, Heater, Press and Transformer are
available from Jemelco Engineering 480-804-9514
2. This part number is a custom part with the specified insulation trimming and packaging
requirements necessary for quality thermocouple attachment, See Figure 7-11. Order
from Omega Anthony Alvarez, Direct phone (203) 359-7671, Direct fax (203) 968-
7142, E-Mail: aalvarez@omega.com
Figure 7-11. Omega Thermocouple
Case Temperature Reference Metrology
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 91
D.3 Thermal Calibration and Controls
It is recommended that full and routine calibration of temperature measurement
equipment be performed before attempting to perform temperature case
measurement. Intel recommends checking the meter probe set against known
standards. This should be done at 0 ºC (using ice bath or other stable temperature
source) and at an elevated temperature, around 80 ºC (using an appropriate
temperature source).
Wire gauge and length also should be considered as some less expensive
measurement systems are heavily impacted by impedance. There are numerous
resources available throughout the industry to assist with implementation of proper
controls for thermal measurements.
NOTES:
1. It is recommended to follow company standard procedures and wear safety
items like glasses for cutting the IHS and gloves for chemical handling.
2. Please ask your Intel field sales representative if you need assistance to
groove and/or install a thermocouple according to the reference process.
D.4 IHS Groove
Cut a groove in the package IHS; see the drawings given in Figure 7-12 and
Figure 7-13. The groove orientation in Figure 7-12 is toward the IHS notch to allow
the thermocouple wire to be routed under the socket lid. This will protect the
thermocouple from getting damaged or pinched when removing and installing the
heatsink (see Figure 7-37).
Case Temperature Reference Metrology
92 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
Figure 7-12. 775-LAND LGA Package Reference Groove Drawing at 6 o’clock Exit
Case Temperature Reference Metrology
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 93
Figure 7-13. 775-LAND LGA Package Reference Groove Drawing at 3 o’clock Exit (Old Drawing)
Case Temperature Reference Metrology
94 Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines
The orientation of the groove at 6 o’clock exit relative to the package pin 1 indicator
(gold triangle in one corner of the package) is shown in Figure 7-14 for the 775-Land
LGA package IHS.
Figure 7-14. IHS Groove at 6 o’clock Exit on the 775-LAND LGA Package
When the processor is installed in the LGA775 socket, the groove is parallel to the
socket load lever, and is toward the IHS notch as shown Figure 7-15.
Figure 7-15. IHS Groove at 6 o’clock Exit Orientation Relative to the LGA775 Socket
Select a machine shop that is capable of holding drawing specified tolerances. IHS
groove geometry is critical for repeatable placement of the thermocouple bead,
ensuring precise thermal measurements. The specified dimensions minimize the
impact of the groove on the IHS under the socket load. A larger groove may cause the
IHS to warp under the socket load such that it does not represent the performance of
an ungrooved IHS on production packages.
Inspect parts for compliance to specifications before accepting from machine shop.
Pin1 indicator
IHS Groove
Case Temperature Reference Metrology
Thermal and Mechanical Design Guidelines 95
D.5 Thermocouple Attach Procedure
The procedure to attach a thermocouple with solder takes about 15 minutes to
complete. Before proceeding turn on the solder block heater, as it can take up to
30 minutes to reach the target temperature of 153 – 155 °C.
Note: To avoid damage to the processor ensure the IHS temperature does not exceed
155 °C.
As a complement to the written procedure a video Thermocouple Attach Using Solder
– Video CD-ROM is available.
D.5.1 Thermocouple Conditioning and Preparation
7. Use a calibrated thermocouple as specified in Sections D.2 and D.3.
8. Under a microscope verify the thermocouple insulation meets the quality
requirements. The insulation should be about 1/16 inch (0.062 ± 0.030) from the
end of the bead (Figure 7-16).
Figure 7-16. Inspection of Insulation on Thermocouple
9. Measure the thermocouple resistance by holding both contacts on the connector
on one probe and the tip of thermocouple to the other probe of the DMM
(measurement should be about~3.0 ohms for 36-gauge type T thermocouple).